This is a modern-English version of The School System of Norway, originally written by Anderson, David Allen.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

THE SCHOOL SYSTEM OF NORWAY
DAVID ALLEN ANDERSON, Ph.D.

RICHARD G. BADGER
THE GORHAM PRESS
BOSTON
Copyright, 1913, by Richard G. Badger
All rights reserved
The Gorham Press, Boston, U. S. A.
RICHARD G. BADGER
THE GORHAM PRESS
BOSTON
Copyright, 1913, by Richard G. Badger
All rights reserved
The Gorham Press, Boston, U. S. A.
AUTHOR'S PREFACE
This account is a descriptive statement of the organization, management, operation, and efficiency of the public school system of Norway. The intent has been to consider only the more vital features, those essentials which definitely shape the products of educational endeavor. Many topics of interest have been touched but briefly while others have been omitted altogether. Some attention has been given to pointing out good qualities of the Norwegian schools and to indicating wherein we might improve our own.
This account provides a detailed overview of the organization, management, operation, and effectiveness of Norway's public school system. The goal has been to focus on the most important aspects, the essentials that definitely influence the outcomes of educational efforts. Many interesting topics have been mentioned briefly, while others have been left out completely. Some emphasis has been placed on highlighting the strengths of Norwegian schools and suggesting ways we could enhance our own system.
The materials entering into the make-up of this dissertation were gathered during a summer and autumn devoted to travel and study in Norway. Much time was spent in study at the University Library in Christiania and still more in the visitation of schools. It was with pleasure that I availed myself of the opportunity to see the schools in operation. I observed recitations throughout the entire program of study in every grade from the kindergarten to the University. I also visited many special schools and other educational institutions both public and private. Further than this, I was benefited by frequent conferences with the leading educators of the country and by almost constant associations with schoolmen, patrons, and students.[Pg 4] These personal investigations enabled me to become familiar with the spirit and work of the schools, and they furnish background for a large part of the content of this treatise. Since no adequate account of the schools of Norway is in print, the authority for this work has been gained chiefly from school laws, annual reports from the Department of Ecclesiastical and Educational Affairs (chiefly statistical), and the individual research referred to above.
The information for this dissertation was gathered during a summer and autumn dedicated to travel and study in Norway. I spent a lot of time studying at the University Library in Oslo and even more time visiting schools. I was excited to take the opportunity to see the schools in action. I observed classes across the entire curriculum from kindergarten to university. I also visited many specialized schools and other educational institutions, both public and private. Additionally, I benefited from frequent discussions with leading educators in the country and by interacting almost constantly with teachers, parents, and students.[Pg 4] These personal investigations allowed me to understand the spirit and operations of the schools, providing the foundation for much of the content in this work. Since there is no comprehensive account of the schools in Norway available in print, the authority for this study has mainly come from school laws, annual reports from the Department of Ecclesiastical and Educational Affairs (mostly statistical), and the individual research mentioned earlier.
It was my good fortune to be provided with official credentials as holder of a Traveling Fellowship for study in Norway from the State University of Iowa; a commission to study the school system of Norway from His Excellency, B. F. Carroll, the Governor of the State of Iowa; and a letter of introduction to Norway's educational executives from Hon. Elmer Ellsworth Brown, at that time Commissioner of Education for the United States. These credentials had the effect of intensifying the already superior courtesy and obliging disposition of the Norwegian officials and schoolmen, who gave me free access to every facility for the pursuance of my work within the state and voluntarily offered their cooperation whenever I might desire it. Their gracious exemplification of the spirit of brotherly kindness made my work among them a constant delight. I desire to express my gratitude to the Norwegians wherever I traveled for the rare cordiality characterizing my reception among them and to acknowledge my obligations to J. K. Qvigstad, chef for Kirk-og Undervisningsdepartmentet; Knut Johannes Hougen, byraachef for Undervisningsvaesen; A. H. Raeder,[Pg 5] Undervisningsraadets formand; Johan Andreas Johnsen, Skoledirektoren i Kristiania stift; Otto Andreas Anderssen, Bestyrer og forstelaerer i det Paedagogiske Seminar for Laerere red hoiere Almenskoler, for valuable suggestions and careful reading and criticism of the entire work in manuscript; further to Iowa's Board of Education and the Graduate Faculty of the State University of Iowa for the appointment which made possible the investigation; to Professor F. E. Bolton, who first suggested that I make the study and who has constantly been to me a wise counsellor and a willing co-operator; and finally to my wife who, through all, has been both critic and companion.
It was my good luck to receive official credentials as a holder of a Traveling Fellowship for study in Norway from the State University of Iowa; a commission to study the school system of Norway from His Excellency, B. F. Carroll, the Governor of Iowa; and a letter of introduction to Norway's educational leaders from Hon. Elmer Ellsworth Brown, who was then the Commissioner of Education for the United States. These credentials made the already exceptional courtesy and willingness of the Norwegian officials and educators even stronger, granting me free access to all facilities for my work and their cooperation whenever I needed it. Their generous display of brotherly kindness made my experience among them a constant joy. I want to express my gratitude to the Norwegians I met throughout my travels for the warm welcome I received and to acknowledge my indebtedness to J. K. Qvigstad, chef for Kirk-og Undervisningsdepartmentet; Knut Johannes Hougen, byraachef for Undervisningsvaesen; A. H. Raeder,[Pg 5] Undervisningsraadets formand; Johan Andreas Johnsen, Skoledirektoren i Kristiania stift; Otto Andreas Anderssen, Bestyrer og forstelaerer i det Paedagogiske Seminar for Laerere red hoiere Almenskoler, for their valuable suggestions and careful reading and critique of the entire manuscript; further to Iowa's Board of Education and the Graduate Faculty of the State University of Iowa for the appointment that made my investigation possible; to Professor F. E. Bolton, who first suggested that I undertake this study and has always been a wise advisor and a willing collaborator; and finally to my wife who has been both a critic and a companion throughout this journey.
David Allen Anderson.
The State University of Iowa,
Iowa City,
May, 1912.
David Anderson.
The State University of Iowa,
Iowa City,
May 1912.
REVIEWER'S PREFACE
Kristiania den 16 februar 1912.
Kristiania, February 16, 1912.
Jeg har med stor fornoielse gjennemlaest Mr. David A. Andersons fremstilling av Norges Undervisningsvaesen og fundet den i all vaesentlige ting korrekt, fuldstaendig og oplysende. Gjennem personlig iagttagelse, samtale med kompetente maend og studium av den vigtigste litteratur er det lykkes forfatteren at danne sig en klar og noiagtig forestilling om de norske skolers ordning og saeregne arbeidsformer i deres historiske tilblivelse og nuvaerende vilkaar. Hans reflektioner og domme vedner om paedagogiske indsight og uavhaengig opfatning. Det er mulig at han nu og da er noget tilboielig til at domme vel gunstig om vore skoleinstitutioners effektivitet og vort folks interesse og offervillighed for at gjorc denne saa stor some mulig, men dette for haenge sammen med at han ser tingene mot en bakgrund av amerikanske forhold, som han onsker reformeret.
Jeg har med stor fornøjelse gennemlæst Mr. David A. Andersons fremstilling af Norges undervisningssystem og fundet den i alle væsentlige henseender korrekt, fuldstændig og informativ. Gennem personlig observation, samtale med kompetente personer og studium af den vigtigste litteratur er det lykkedes forfatteren at danne sig en klar og præcis forståelse af de norske skolers ordning og særlige arbejdsformer i deres historiske udvikling og nuværende vilkår. Hans refleksioner og vurderinger vidner om pædagogisk indsigt og uafhængig opfattelse. Det er muligt, at han nu og da har en tendens til at dømme gunstigt om vores skoleinstitutioners effektivitet og vores folks interesse og villighed til at gøre dette så stort som muligt, men dette hænger sammen med, at han ser tingene i relation til en baggrund af amerikanske forhold, som han ønsker reformeret.
Jeg har ikke havt anledning til at kontrollere i det enkelte de statistiske opgaver forfatteren meddeler, men da disse er hentet ut fra officielle kilder tviler jeg ikke paa at de er rigtige.
Jeg har ikke haft mulighed for at kontrollere de statistiske opgaver, forfatteren nævner, men da de er taget fra officielle kilder, tvivler jeg ikke på, at de er korrekte.
Professor dr Otto Anderssen,
Principal of the Pedagogical Seminary annexed to the
University of Christiania.
Prof. Dr. Otto Anderssen,
Head of the Pedagogical Seminary associated with the
University of Christiania.
REVIEWER'S PREFACE
(Translation)
Christiania, February 16, 1912.
Christiania, Feb 16, 1912.
I have, with great pleasure, read through Mr. David A. Anderson's presentation of Norway's school system and found it in all essentials correct, complete and illuminating. Through personal observation, conversation with competent men and study of the most important literature, the author has succeeded in getting a clear and exact view of the Norwegian school methods and characteristic forms of work in their historical development and present condition. His reflections and judgments testify to pedagogical insight and independence of views. It may be that now and then he is somewhat inclined to judge too favorably as to the efficiency of our institutions and the interest of our people and their readiness to sacrifice in order to make this efficiency as high as possible, but this may be due to the fact that he views it against a background of American conditions, which he desires to improve.
I have thoroughly enjoyed reading Mr. David A. Anderson's presentation of Norway's school system, and I found it to be fundamentally accurate, comprehensive, and enlightening. Through personal observation, discussions with knowledgeable individuals, and studying key literature, the author has gained a clear and precise understanding of the Norwegian school methods and their historical development and current status. His reflections and judgments demonstrate pedagogical insight and independent thinking. He may occasionally be a bit too optimistic about the effectiveness of our institutions and the public's interest and willingness to invest in maximizing this efficiency, but this might stem from his perspective shaped by American conditions, which he aims to improve.
I have not taken occasion to verify in detail the statistical tables the author includes, but since they have been gathered from official sources I do not doubt that they are correct.
I haven't had the chance to check the statistical tables the author provided in detail, but since they come from official sources, I have no doubt they are accurate.
Professor Dr. Otto Anderssen,
Principal of the Pedagogical Seminary, affiliated with
the University of Christiania.
Professor Dr. Otto Anderssen,
Principal of the Pedagogical Seminary, associated with
the University of Christiania.
EDITOR'S PREFACE
The most pressing problems of education at the present time are those of organization and administration of educational forces. Problems of method of instruction though important are entirely subsidiary, for if all the people can be aroused to a desire for education and then be shown ways and means of attaining it the very desire for education will be the most important factor in learning.
The biggest issues in education right now are how to organize and manage educational resources. While teaching methods are important, they come second to this. If we can inspire people to want an education and then show them how to achieve it, that desire for education will be the key factor in learning.
No means of studying questions of organization and administration are so valuable as the comparative. Various studies of education in foreign countries have been made, but there still exists a need for many more investigations. Norway has furnished a great many illustrious statesmen, scientists and literary masters, and is also a country abounding in men of a high type of valor, physical prowess, honesty and industry, and consequently the educational ideals and practices which prevail there should be worthy of most careful consideration. Heretofore, only fragmentary accounts of Norway's educational system have been available in the English language. At the writer's suggestion, Mr. Anderson made a trip abroad for the purpose of studying the system at first hand. His intimate acquaintance with the language was a prime essential[Pg 10] in acquiring an understanding through observation and reading. That he has made an accurate interpretation is attested by the foreword of one of Norway's eminent scholars and that he has made an interesting account will be conceded by all who peruse the pages. It is hoped that many more studies of a similar nature will follow in the near future.
No way of studying organization and administration issues is as valuable as comparison. There have been various studies on education in other countries, but there's still a need for many more investigations. Norway has produced many distinguished statesmen, scientists, and literary figures, and it is also a country filled with brave, strong, honest, and hardworking people. Therefore, the educational ideals and practices there deserve careful consideration. Until now, only limited information about Norway's educational system has been available in English. At the writer's suggestion, Mr. Anderson traveled abroad to study the system firsthand. His familiarity with the language was crucial for gaining understanding through observation and reading. His accurate interpretation is supported by the foreword of a prominent Norwegian scholar, and anyone who reads the pages will find his account engaging. It is hoped that many more similar studies will follow soon.
Frederick E. Bolton,
State University of Washington,
Seattle, April 8, 1913.
Frederick E. Bolton,
State University of Washington,
Seattle, April 8, 1913.
CONTENTS
Chapter I
Background and Organization
I. Introduction 19
1. History of Norway (brief sketch) 19
2. Geographical features 22
3. National characteristics, aims and ideals 25
II. Differentiation of Schools 28
1. Primary school—rural and city 28
2. Secondary 30
3. The University and other schools 32
III. Distribution of Schools and Pupils 34
1. Primary—rural and city 34
2. Secondary—middle school and gymnasium 41
3. Teachers' Seminaries 41
4. The University 41
5. Private schools 43
IV. Pupils 44
1. Age in primary schools, secondary schools and teachers' seminaries 44
2. Comparisons with America in equipment and time spent in school 50
[Pg 12]3. Specialization 51
V. Organization—Relation to state, commune and city 51
1. The state department and its divisions 51
2. Units of organization 53
3. The school board and school committees 56
4. City superintendent (Inspector) and ward principles (Overlaererer) 60
5. Private citizens a factor 61
6. Financial support of schools 62
VI. Buildings and Grounds 64
1. General character of buildings 64
2. Equipment 64
3. Playgrounds 69
4. Homes for principals and teachers 70
VII. General Features of Inner Organization 71
1. The teaching staff 71
2. Plan of instruction 72
3. Gymnastics 74
4. Lunches 75
5. School discipline 76
6. Attendance 77
[Pg 13]7. Health 77
Chapter II
Teachers
I. Qualification and Certification of Teachers 79
1. General situation and tendencies 79
2. Special teachers 80
II. Training of Teachers 81
1. Introductory 81
2. Seminaries—establishment and work 83
III. Teachers' Official Titles 85
1. In the several schools—significance 85
IV. Teachers' Tenure of Office 86
1. Positions—Permanent and temporary 87
2. Comparisons with conditions in America 89
3. Changes in teaching staff (with tables) 89
V. Teachers' Salaries 91
1. General statement 91
2. Additional benefits 92
[Pg 14]3. Schedules (with tables) 94
Chapter III
Courses of Study in State Schools
I. Introductory—Rise, development, and present
form of the curriculum 96
1. Origin and evolution of the course of study 96
a. The early schools; their work, influence, and development in Norway 97
2. Three sections of schools 99
II. The Primary School 101
1. Rural and city 101
2. Schedules of courses 104
a. Comparisons 106
b. Subjects emphasized 107
3. Outline of subjects of instruction 108
a. Religion 108
b. Norwegian 118
c. Mathematics 125
d. Geography 129
e. History 134
f. Nature study 139
g. Other subjects: writing and drawing, vocal music, manual training, gymnastics 146
III. The Middle School 149
1. Its standard, aim, and method 149
[Pg 15]2. Outline of subjects of instruction 151
IV. The Gymnasium 162
1. Outline of subjects of instruction 162
Chapter IV
Interpretative Conclusions
1. The people and their ideals 181
2. Facilities for education 184
3. Directing authority and management of schools 187
4. Teachers' training 191
5. The teacher's life 195
6. The curriculum 197
a. Religious instruction and education 198
b. The classics 201
c. Physical culture 204
d. Vocal music 206
7. Lines of instruction in the gymnasium 207
8. Co-education 210
9. The school year 214
10. School lunches 215
11. Comparative attainments 217
12. Methods of instruction 220
13. Continuity of effort 222
Bibliography 225
Index 229
Chapter 1
Background and Organization
I. Intro 19
1. A Brief History of Norway 19
2. Geographic features 22
3. National traits, goals, and values 25
II. School Differentiation 28
Primary school—rural and urban 28
2. High School 30
3. The University and other schools 32
III. School and Student Distribution 34
Primary—rural and urban 34
2. Secondary—middle school and high school 41
3. Teacher Training Colleges 41
The University 41
5. Private schools __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
IV. Students 44
1. Age in elementary schools, high schools, and teacher training colleges 44
2. Comparisons with the United States regarding equipment and time spent in school 50
[Pg 12]3. Specialization 51
V. Organization—Relation to state, commune and city 51
1. The State Department and its divisions 51
2. Organizational Units 53
3. The school board and school committees 56
4. City superintendent (Inspector) and ward principles (Overlaererer) 60
Private citizens play a role 61
6. School funding 62
VI. Facilities Management 64
General character of buildings 64
2. Gear 64
Playgrounds 69
4. Housing for principals and teachers 70
VII. General Features of Internal Structure 71
The teaching team 71
2. Instruction plan 72
Gymnastics 74
Lunches 75
5. School discipline 76
Attendance 77
[Pg 13]7. Health 77
Chapter 2
Educators
I. Teacher Qualification and Certification 79
Current situation and trends 79
2. Special educators 80
II. Teacher Training 81
Intro 81
Seminaries—foundation and operation 83
III. Teachers' Titles 85
In the various schools—importance 85
IV. Teachers' Job Security 86
Positions—Full-time and part-time 87
2. Comparisons with conditions in America 89
3. Changes in teaching staff (with tables) 89
V. Teacher Salaries 91
General statement 91
2. Extra benefits 92
[Pg 14]3. Schedules (with tables) 94
Chapter 3
Courses of Study in Public Schools
I. Introduction—Rise, development, and present
curriculum format 96
1. History and development of the study program 96
a. The early schools: their work, impact, and growth in Norway 97
2. Three types of schools 99
II. The Elementary School 101
Rural and urban 101
Course schedules 104
a. Comparisons 106
b. Key subjects highlighted 107
3. Overview of Instructional Topics 108
a. Religion 108
b. Norwegian 118
c. Math 125
d. Geography 129
e. History 134
f. Nature study 139
g. Other subjects: writing and drawing, vocal music, hands-on training, gymnastics 146
III. The Junior High School 149
1. Its standard, purpose, and approach 149
[Pg 15]2. Overview of subjects to be taught 151
IV. The Gym 162
1. Overview of subjects to be taught 162
Chapter IV
Interpretive Conclusions
1. The people and their beliefs 181
Educational facilities 184
3. Leadership and management of schools 187
4. Teacher training 191
The teacher's life 195
The curriculum __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Religious education 198
b. The classics 201
c. Fitness culture 204
d. Vocal music 206
7. Guidelines for the gym 207
8. Co-ed 210
The school year __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
School lunches 215
Comparative achievements 217
12. Teaching methods 220
13. Ongoing effort 222
Bibliography 225
Index 229
THE SCHOOL SYSTEM OF NORWAY
Chapter I
BACKGROUND AND ORGANIZATION
I. INTRODUCTION
The history of mankind in Norway covers a period of at least five thousand years and includes a great variety of interesting incidents and conditions. The accounts of the earlier ages may be read only in archaeological formations, while for more recent times, these silent records are supplemented and enriched by traditions. All such accounts are of deep interest and significance but only in a measure reliable. We have no really authentic information regarding Norway's political history until the reign of Harald the Fair Haired (860-930). We do know, however, that, previous to his establishment of the sovereign state of Norway in 872, the people had known only the rule of numerous petty, warring earls and kings. Besides this, the entire country had been subjected to the devastations of the vikings. These sea robbers were the terror of all the coast countries in western Europe and the British Isles[Pg 20] until about the year 900 when sea robbery at home was abolished, and the Norsemen became colonizers, migrating to surrounding islands, the west and south of Europe, and probably America. Now when piracy began to decline the people rose to a higher plane of living, and the prosperity attained through peace and industry was found to be the more desirable. A long succession of kings, some good and some evil, ruled the land. Paganism was gradually overcome, and about the year 1,000 Christianity was established.
The history of humanity in Norway spans at least five thousand years and includes a wide range of fascinating events and conditions. The stories of earlier times can only be understood through archaeological findings, while more recent events are amplified and enriched by traditions. All these accounts are intriguing and significant, but only somewhat reliable. We lack truly authentic information about Norway's political history until the reign of Harald Fairhair (860-930). However, we do know that before he formed the sovereign state of Norway in 872, the people were ruled by various petty, warring earls and kings. Additionally, the entire country had suffered from the destruction caused by the Vikings. These sea raiders instilled fear in all the coastal nations of Western Europe and the British Isles[Pg 20] until about the year 900 when piracy at home ended, and the Norsemen became colonizers, migrating to nearby islands, as well as to the west and south of Europe, and possibly even America. As piracy began to fade, the people improved their standard of living, and the prosperity gained through peace and industry proved to be much more desirable. A long line of kings, both good and bad, ruled the land. Paganism gradually diminished, and around the year 1000, Christianity took hold.
From this time on, for several centuries, the country experienced only moderate visible progress though large gains were made in potential powers. In 1381, Norway entered into a union with Denmark and remained in large measure subject to her power until 1814. This period of more than four hundred years was a season of little good and of great hardships to the people. Their development received little attention, the resources of the country and the cause of education were neglected, and the masses were not recognized in a way that would tend to their enlightenment and progress. The entire nation suffered from international difficulties as well as from oppression at home. Conditions remained unimproved and the latent powers of the people, which had been accumulating for generations, found no adequate means for expression.
From this point forward, for several centuries, the country saw only moderate visible progress, even though significant advancements were made in its potential. In 1381, Norway entered into a union with Denmark and largely remained under its influence until 1814. This period of over four hundred years was marked by hardships and little good for the people. Their development was mostly overlooked, the country’s resources and education were neglected, and the general population was not recognized in ways that could foster their enlightenment and advancement. The whole nation struggled with international challenges and oppression at home. Conditions did not improve, and the latent potential of the people, which had built up over generations, found no proper outlet for expression.
When in 1814 the treaty of Kiel, sanctioned by the European powers, forced Norway into an unwilling union with Sweden, the Norwegians revolted; and, in their attempt to liberate themselves, adopted a constitution[Pg 21] for their government.[1] Their revolt created ill feelings on the part of the Swedes while the demands for complete sovereignty by Sweden were resented by the Norwegians. The adoption of this constitution by the people of Norway and their standing so tenaciously for its recognition are manifestations of the spirit which had been developing among them for centuries. They believed that they were being imposed upon and stood firm for their rights. They had felt the crushing hand of foreign rule, they had observed the benefits of independence, they had developed confidence in their own powers, and now they were converted to the idea that the time for home rule was upon them. Civil liberty was their dream. State rights came to be demanded. Their time to act in a decisive manner had come. The people had grown into a nation deserving and in need of larger powers, and their best advancement was in great measure dependent upon the exercise of these powers. Conditions then justified their demands and Sweden, appreciating the situation, yielded, acknowledged the independence of Norway, and agreed to govern in accordance with the newly adopted constitution. On the other hand, Norway acceded to the demands of Sweden in accepting the King of Sweden as theirs also.
When in 1814 the treaty of Kiel, sanctioned by the European powers, forced Norway into an unwilling union with Sweden, the Norwegians revolted; and, in their attempt to liberate themselves, adopted a constitution[Pg 21] for their government.[1] Their revolt created ill feelings on the part of the Swedes while the demands for complete sovereignty by Sweden were resented by the Norwegians. The adoption of this constitution by the people of Norway and their standing so tenaciously for its recognition are manifestations of the spirit which had been developing among them for centuries. They believed that they were being imposed upon and stood firm for their rights. They had felt the crushing hand of foreign rule, they had observed the benefits of independence, they had developed confidence in their own powers, and now they were converted to the idea that the time for home rule was upon them. Civil liberty was their dream. State rights came to be demanded. Their time to act in a decisive manner had come. The people had grown into a nation deserving and in need of larger powers, and their best advancement was in great measure dependent upon the exercise of these powers. Conditions then justified their demands and Sweden, appreciating the situation, yielded, acknowledged the independence of Norway, and agreed to govern in accordance with the newly adopted constitution. On the other hand, Norway acceded to the demands of Sweden in accepting the King of Sweden as theirs also.
Now for nearly one hundred years this union was maintained. Comparative peace and prosperity prevailed and the outlook seemed favorable for both nations. Sweden profited because of the new relations, and Norway gained in strength and power through her[Pg 22] experience in individual initiative and governmental duties generally. While the relations between the two countries were in the main friendly, on various occasions Norway felt that her rights were not always respected. The people craved larger privileges, more recognition among the nations of the world, and the exercise of greater authority. The functioning of capacities that had long lain dormant revealed to her the powers that were still latent. Norway became eager for absolute independence and these feelings rose to larger and larger proportions until desires became demands. All the people were ready and offered their services, their fortunes (whether large or scant), and their lives in the cause of freedom. Finally, formally, and without bloodshed, the bonds uniting the two countries were severed in 1905 and Norway became an independent nation.
Now for nearly one hundred years, this union was maintained. There was a relative sense of peace and prosperity, and the future looked promising for both nations. Sweden benefited from the new relations, and Norway gained strength and power through its experience with individual initiative and general governmental duties. While relations between the two countries were mostly friendly, Norway felt that its rights weren’t always respected on several occasions. The people wanted more privileges, greater recognition among the nations of the world, and more authority. The emergence of abilities that had long been dormant showed them the powers that were still potential. Norway grew eager for full independence, and these feelings intensified until wishes became demands. Everyone was ready to offer their services, their fortunes (whether large or small), and their lives for the cause of freedom. Finally, formally and without bloodshed, the bonds connecting the two countries were broken in 1905, and Norway became an independent nation.
Having briefly sketched the history of the country let us now turn our attention to its geography. Norway, as we all know, lies in the northwestern part of Europe, and measures over one thousand one hundred miles from north to south and from two hundred to nearly five hundred miles from east to west. Politically it is divided into eighteen counties (Amter) and the cities of Christiania and Bergen. These counties are subdivided into six hundred sixty-six townships or communes (Kommuner) which are again divided into school districts or circles (Kredser) numbering in all five thousand nine hundred seventy.[2]
Having briefly sketched the history of the country let us now turn our attention to its geography. Norway, as we all know, lies in the northwestern part of Europe, and measures over one thousand one hundred miles from north to south and from two hundred to nearly five hundred miles from east to west. Politically it is divided into eighteen counties (Amter) and the cities of Christiania and Bergen. These counties are subdivided into six hundred sixty-six townships or communes (Kommuner) which are again divided into school districts or circles (Kredser) numbering in all five thousand nine hundred seventy.[2]
The area is approximately one hundred and twenty-five[Pg 23] thousand square miles. Nearly all of it is made up of mountains which have no regularity in distribution, a large portion of them being merely heaps of barren rock thrown up in conglomerate masses. The valleys are as numerous and irregular as the mountains. In them are lakes, rivers, and waterfalls, their waters pure and clear as crystal. The lakes differ greatly in outline and size. The rivers in their windings dash furiously through precipitous, rugged, rocky channels, or glide murmuringly through quiet valleys until they reach the fjords which appear like huge arms of the sea, reaching deep into the earth and extending far inland. The waterfalls vary from mere threads tinkling into tiny pools to great torrents gushing over dizzy precipices. Viewed in combination these features present an infinite variety of exquisitely beautiful scenes.
The area is about one hundred and twenty-five[Pg 23] thousand square miles. Almost all of it is made up of mountains that are irregular in how they're spread out, with many being just piles of bare rock thrown together in messy clusters. The valleys are as numerous and uneven as the mountains. In these valleys, you'll find lakes, rivers, and waterfalls, with waters as pure and clear as crystal. The lakes vary greatly in shape and size. The rivers twist and turn, rushing fiercely through steep, rocky channels, or flowing gently through quiet valleys until they reach the fjords that look like massive arms of the sea, reaching deep into the land and extending far inland. The waterfalls range from thin strands tinkling into small pools to powerful torrents crashing over steep cliffs. Together, these features create an endless variety of stunningly beautiful scenes.
The climate of Norway is greatly diversified owing to the wide range in latitude and the influence of the Gulf stream. In the northern part and on the highest mountains there are vast fields of snow during the entire year, while in some of the sheltered portions along the western coast, the climate is well adapted to the cultivation of some of the tropical plants. It is, of course, essential that all plants that are cultivated be of rapid growth and of quick maturity, since their seasons are quite short. The atmospheric conditions are excelled nowhere. Few locations on the earth enjoy such freshness or provide so much mental and physical invigoration. Just the joy of living is more than recompense for all one's expense and trouble in going for a season into this summer home or nature.
The climate in Norway is very varied due to its wide latitude range and the impact of the Gulf Stream. In the northern region and on the highest mountains, there are large snow fields year-round, while in some sheltered areas along the western coast, the climate is suitable for growing some tropical plants. It's crucial that any cultivated plants grow quickly and mature fast since their growing season is quite short. The atmospheric conditions are unparalleled. Few places on Earth offer such freshness or provide as much mental and physical revitalization. The joy of living there is more than worth any expenses and efforts made to spend a season in this natural summer retreat.
Being situated so far to the north the days of summer are very long while those of winter are extremely short. This is noticeable even in the southern part of the country, and as one goes farther north it is more and more striking until upon reaching the arctic circle the summer traveler has the unique experience of seeing the sun at midnight. It is visible for weeks or months at a time, according to whether one is near the circle or farther toward the pole. For corresponding periods during the winter seasons the sun does not appear at all. It should not be inferred that these sunless days are intensely dark and gloomy. On the contrary, they, as well as the midnight sun, have fascinations peculiar to themselves and are of deep interest, especially to the novice in that latitude. The glitter of the stars, the glow of the moon, and the palpitating brilliance of the northern lights, combine with the light reflected from the vast snow fields and compensate in part for the absence of the direct rays from the sun.
Being so far north, summer days are really long, while winter days are extremely short. You can see this even in the southern part of the country, and as you move further north, it becomes more and more noticeable. Once you reach the Arctic Circle, summer travelers get the unique chance to see the sun at midnight. It can stay visible for weeks or even months, depending on whether you're near the circle or closer to the pole. During the corresponding winter periods, the sun doesn’t show up at all. However, it shouldn't be assumed that these sunless days are completely dark and dreary. On the contrary, both the sunless days and the midnight sun have their own unique allure and are deeply interesting, especially for those new to that latitude. The sparkle of the stars, the glow of the moon, and the shimmering brilliance of the northern lights all mix with the light reflected from the vast snow fields, partially making up for the missing direct sunlight.
The industries and occupations of the Norwegians are dependent in large measure upon environing conditions. Nearly one-fourth of the country is covered with a heavy growth of timber; hence, lumbering affords a large part of the most profitable employment. Much of the mountainous land can be used only for pasturage and, as a result, dairying claims considerable attention. Only a very small portion of the area (about four per cent) is suitable for agriculture and owing to this limitation of opportunity, comparatively few of the people are farmers. Their numerous fisheries supply cargoes, and train loads of fresh and cured fish to the[Pg 25] markets of the world. Fishing is, in fact, one of the most important industries, and a large percentage of the wage earners of the country engage in it. Since the bulk of their travel and transportation is by water, a great many become sailors. A certain amount of manufacturing also is done, and this provides another means of earning a livelihood. The fact that nearly all of the people are gathered into cities, towns, and settlements along the coast, is explained by a consideration of the activities and conditions herein set forth.
The jobs and industries of Norwegians are largely influenced by their surroundings. Almost a quarter of the country is covered in dense forests, so logging provides a significant amount of profitable work. Much of the mountainous land can only be used for pastures, leading to a focus on dairy farming. Only a small fraction of the land (about four percent) is suitable for farming, and due to this limited opportunity, relatively few people are farmers. Their extensive fishing operations supply large amounts of fresh and preserved fish to the[Pg 25] markets around the world. Fishing is actually one of the most crucial industries, and a large share of the country's workforce is involved in it. Since most travel and transportation rely on water, many people become sailors. Some manufacturing also takes place, providing another source of income. The fact that nearly everyone lives in cities, towns, and settlements along the coast can be understood by considering the activities and conditions described here.
The people of Norway are large of stature, vigorous, and alert in mind and body. They have ever been undaunted in their efforts to overcome the great, natural barriers to progress and to secure what they believed would be for their well-being. Toiling patiently and persistently, suffering hardships on land and perils at sea, they have developed the well-known characteristics of their sturdy race. The long, rigorous winters taught the people to provide amply for the needs of the future, and they learned also the economy of making every endeavor count for permanency. It has been and is still their aim and intent to so direct their efforts that their citizens may experience and enjoy not only in the present the best conditions made possible by the world's highest attainments, but that later generations also may reap valuable benefits therefrom. They realize that it is easily possible for today's provisions to supply the best for the present, and at the same time to bless tomorrow and the next day and all the coming years.
The people of Norway are tall, strong, and sharp-minded. They have always been fearless in their efforts to overcome the significant natural obstacles to progress and to secure what they believe will benefit them. Working diligently and consistently, enduring hardships on land and dangers at sea, they have developed the well-known traits of their resilient culture. The long, harsh winters taught them to prepare fully for future needs, and they also learned the importance of making every effort last. Their goal has always been to direct their efforts so that citizens can experience and enjoy the best conditions available today, made possible by the world's highest achievements, while also ensuring that future generations can benefit from these efforts. They understand that today’s provisions can provide the best for now and also bless tomorrow and all the years to come.
The Norwegians are as democratic in mind and[Pg 26] disposition as any people of the earth. They demand that the masses shall receive whatever benefit may come from prosperity at home, from their relations with other nations, or from legislation. They advocate further that right now is the time to increase opportunities, to multiply privileges, to raise standards of living, and to insure through conservative action a substantial basis on which the coming generations may safely build. In accord with their aims and ideals they study the questions of education, labor and capital, and many others of vital interest to the people. They seek out sources, eliminating the undesirable and cultivating those of favorable growth and fruitage. Recognizing their own resourcefulness and ability, the Norsemen strive to gain for themselves and for their descendants material prosperity and true culture. To these ends they foster educational advantages for all, the development of the arts and sciences, and the elevation of labor.
The Norwegians are as democratic in attitude and[Pg 26] disposition as any people on earth. They insist that everyone should benefit from prosperity at home, from international relations, or from laws passed. They believe that now is the time to increase opportunities, expand privileges, improve living standards, and ensure through careful action a strong foundation for future generations to build upon safely. In line with their goals and values, they explore issues related to education, labor, capital, and many other topics that matter to the people. They identify sources, eliminating the harmful ones and nurturing those that promote positive growth and outcomes. Acknowledging their own resourcefulness and capabilities, the Norse strive to secure material prosperity and genuine culture for themselves and their descendants. To achieve this, they promote educational opportunities for everyone, the development of the arts and sciences, and the upliftment of labor.
Educationally, they have ever been desirous of providing the best possible advantages. During the latter part of the nineteenth century and the few years of the present one, they have been in a position to put into execution a number of advance ideas which they have done without hesitation. Being observant of what other nations provide they have been ready to select from various sources whatever good they found, to eliminate any undesirable features which revealed themselves, and to strengthen the weaker points. Though they have been forced by conditions to assume and maintain a conservative attitude toward every[Pg 27] new project or attempt at reform, they have been also too democratic to permit tradition or precedent to bind them down or to hinder them in making changes in their school system, which they were convinced by experience or study would be for their good. In harmony with this they have been eager to make revisions where necessary; to introduce new features, which had been tested at home or abroad and found successful; and to cast aside relics of the past, unnecessary phases of work, and those things which might be supplanted by materials of superior advantage or value to the people served. They have become habituated to examining the new from every conceivable viewpoint, to finding its foundations, to testing its values, and to weighing its effects. When a thing has been thoroughly studied it is accepted or rejected according to whether it is adjudged desirable or undesirable for their use under existing conditions. In their effort to answer the demands of the people and to supply their needs, schools have been established according to local requirements. That is to say, every community enjoys school advantages, and every child in the entire state is privileged to receive instruction for a certain number of weeks each year at the expense of the state. All children are required to attend the schools of the state at least twelve weeks each year for seven years, or to receive instruction elsewhere which is equivalent to the amount required. In the more populous places higher schools also are provided for those who desire to take advantage of the opportunities afforded in them.
Educationally, they have always aimed to provide the best possible opportunities. In the late nineteenth century and the early years of this one, they were able to implement a number of innovative ideas without hesitation. By observing what other countries offer, they have been ready to select any good practices they found, eliminate any undesirable aspects, and strengthen weaker points. Although circumstances have forced them to take a cautious approach to new projects or reforms, they have also been too democratic to let tradition or past norms hold them back from making changes to their school system that they believe, based on experience or research, would benefit them. In line with this, they have been eager to make necessary revisions, introduce new features that have been tested successfully both locally and internationally, and discard outdated methods, unnecessary tasks, and those that could be replaced with better resources for the communities served. They have gotten used to evaluating the new from every possible angle, examining its foundations, testing its value, and weighing its impact. After thorough study, a proposal is either accepted or rejected based on whether it is deemed beneficial or not under the current conditions. In their effort to meet the needs of the community, schools have been established based on local requirements. In other words, every community has access to educational opportunities, and every child in the state is entitled to receive instruction for a specified number of weeks each year at the state's expense. All children are required to attend state schools for at least twelve weeks a year for seven years, or to receive equivalent instruction elsewhere. In more populated areas, higher-level schools are also available for those who want to take advantage of the opportunities they provide.
II. DIFFERENTIATION OF SCHOOLS.
It was early recognized by the Norwegians that through the means of education, better than any other way, they could develop a people qualified to pursue the arts, to cultivate the sciences, to appreciate and enjoy the highest culture, and to maintain and develop their noblest ideals of citizenship and richest conceptions of statehood. Having these objects in mind they endeavored to establish schools of instruction and training along every legitimate line. Beginning with the most essential they worked unceasingly, providing additional worthy kinds of instruction as rapidly as possible, until their efforts resulted in their present school system.
It was recognized early on by the Norwegians that through education, better than any other method, they could develop a society capable of pursuing the arts, cultivating the sciences, appreciating and enjoying high culture, and upholding and evolving their noblest ideals of citizenship and most profound concepts of statehood. With these goals in mind, they worked hard to establish schools for instruction and training across every valid area. Starting with the basics, they tirelessly provided more valuable forms of education as quickly as possible, until their efforts led to the current school system.
Perhaps the most important feature of their work was the establishment of primary schools, which furnish general education. These schools provide seven years of elementary instruction for children between the ages of seven and fourteen years, and are literally the people's schools (Folkeskoler). The law requires that pupils must be regular in attendance, and that parents, who fail to have their children in school in harmony with the provisions of the law, be fined according to the seriousness and extent of the offense. It is further provided that these schools shall be in operation for at least twelve weeks in the year, and that this time may be extended according to local demands or needs. As a matter of fact, nearly all of them in the cities and many of them in the country operate forty weeks per year. As a consequence of liberal[Pg 29] provisions and enforced regulations, Norway has achieved an eminent place educationally among the nations of the world.
Perhaps the most important aspect of their work was establishing primary schools, which provide general education. These schools offer seven years of elementary instruction for children aged seven to fourteen and are truly the people's schools (Folkeskoler). The law requires that students attend regularly, and parents who fail to ensure their children's attendance in line with legal requirements can be fined based on the seriousness and extent of the offense. It is also stipulated that these schools must operate for at least twelve weeks each year, with the possibility of extending this duration according to local needs. In fact, nearly all urban schools and many rural ones operate for forty weeks each year. Thanks to generous provisions and strict regulations, Norway has achieved a prominent position in education among the countries of the world.
In the rural sections primary schools are held in comfortable, well equipped, and conveniently located schoolhouses and are taught by competent teachers who live near by in homes provided for them. In a few remote, rugged sections of the country, where children are few and scattering or where locations accessible to all cannot be found, they have no fixed schools, but instead what are termed ambulatory schools (Omgangskoler). There are no schoolhouses in these districts but the officials designate certain houses[3] as the places where children go at stated times to receive instruction. The teacher meets the children of the neighborhood in a given home and teaches them for a specified time, passes to the next designated place, and continues until his rounds are completed. Formerly, a very large number of these schools existed, but as roadways were extended or improved and the people became able to erect and maintain schoolhouses, the demand for ambulatory schools decreased until now nearly all of them are supplanted by fixed schools. In 1837, ninety-two per cent of the children attending school in the country were taught in ambulatory schools, while in 1907 this was the case with less than one per cent of them.
In the rural sections primary schools are held in comfortable, well equipped, and conveniently located schoolhouses and are taught by competent teachers who live near by in homes provided for them. In a few remote, rugged sections of the country, where children are few and scattering or where locations accessible to all cannot be found, they have no fixed schools, but instead what are termed ambulatory schools (Omgangskoler). There are no schoolhouses in these districts but the officials designate certain houses[3] as the places where children go at stated times to receive instruction. The teacher meets the children of the neighborhood in a given home and teaches them for a specified time, passes to the next designated place, and continues until his rounds are completed. Formerly, a very large number of these schools existed, but as roadways were extended or improved and the people became able to erect and maintain schoolhouses, the demand for ambulatory schools decreased until now nearly all of them are supplanted by fixed schools. In 1837, ninety-two per cent of the children attending school in the country were taught in ambulatory schools, while in 1907 this was the case with less than one per cent of them.
In all the cities and towns excellent educational advantages[Pg 30] are provided. Usually their school year consists of forty weeks of six days each. Every provision is made for the welfare of the children; excellent instructors are secured, and the equipment for teaching purposes is of the best procurable. Furthermore, no pains are spared in guarding the children from physical discomfort and immoral conditions or associations.
In all the cities and towns, there are great educational opportunities[Pg 30]. Typically, the school year lasts for forty weeks, with classes held six days a week. Everything is arranged for the well-being of the children; top-notch teachers are hired, and the teaching equipment is of the highest quality. Additionally, every effort is made to protect the children from physical discomfort and from any immoral situations or influences.
Simultaneously with the development of the elementary schools secondary education moved along advance lines. In 1814, when Norway became an independent state there were but four of the higher classical (laerde) schools within her borders. These were the historic cathedral schools (Kathedralskoler) which had been established for centuries. As time passed, other secondary schools were organized. Higher education was reorganized in 1869 and again in 1896, when by act of the Storthing secondary education was made to include the middle school and the gymnasium. The enactment defines these schools and states their aim as follows: "The middle school is a school for children, which, in union with the primary school, gives its pupils a complete, thorough, general education, adapted to the receptivity of childhood. The gymnasium is a school for young people, which on the foundation of the middle school, leads on to a complete, higher, general education, which may also serve as a basis for scientific studies. Both middle school and gymnasium shall contribute to the religions and moral training of the pupils, and it should also be their common aim to develop the pupils both mentally and physically into[Pg 31] competent young people."[4] The act requires that the middle school shall be no longer than four years, and that the gymnasial courses shall be of three years' duration.
Simultaneously with the development of the elementary schools secondary education moved along advance lines. In 1814, when Norway became an independent state there were but four of the higher classical (laerde) schools within her borders. These were the historic cathedral schools (Kathedralskoler) which had been established for centuries. As time passed, other secondary schools were organized. Higher education was reorganized in 1869 and again in 1896, when by act of the Storthing secondary education was made to include the middle school and the gymnasium. The enactment defines these schools and states their aim as follows: "The middle school is a school for children, which, in union with the primary school, gives its pupils a complete, thorough, general education, adapted to the receptivity of childhood. The gymnasium is a school for young people, which on the foundation of the middle school, leads on to a complete, higher, general education, which may also serve as a basis for scientific studies. Both middle school and gymnasium shall contribute to the religions and moral training of the pupils, and it should also be their common aim to develop the pupils both mentally and physically into[Pg 31] competent young people."[4] The act requires that the middle school shall be no longer than four years, and that the gymnasial courses shall be of three years' duration.
The gymnasia of Norway take up the work where the middle schools leave off, and provide three years of instruction which concludes with the examen artium. The passing of this examination entitles the individual to become a student in the university. Previous to the time of entering the gymnasium the subjects of instruction are uniform for all; here they branch into two or three lines, any one of which may be selected by the pupil and followed to its completion. The main divisions of the work are represented in the names of the courses—the Real and the Linguistic-Historical. The latter of these is again divided in some schools, one of its two lines including Latin. The Real course of instruction is largely scientific while the Linguistic-Historical, true to its name, embodies a large amount of language and history. In case the course including Latin is offered, Latin replaces some of the work in modern languages and history.
The gymnasiums in Norway pick up where middle schools leave off, offering three years of instruction that ends with the examen artium. Passing this exam allows a person to become a university student. Before entering the gymnasium, the subjects are the same for everyone; however, here they split into two or three tracks, any of which students can choose and complete. The main areas of study are reflected in the names of the courses—the Real and the Linguistic-Historical. The latter may be further divided in some schools, with one path including Latin. The Real course focuses mostly on science, while the Linguistic-Historical track, as its name suggests, includes a lot of language and history. If the Latin option is available, it takes the place of some modern language and history coursework.
The middle school, then, is the second step in the educational ladder and builds upon the work previously done in the primary school. No middle school is privileged to include work lower down than the sixth grade. In other words, the primary schools are the only ones which are authorized to present the work of the first five grades or years of school instruction. The courses of study are so arranged that a child may[Pg 32] pass from the primary school after completing the fifth grade and enter directly upon the studies in the regular four year course of the middle school. On the other hand a pupil may continue in the primary school until its completion—seven years—and then enter a middle school and finish its requirements in three years. While nearly all middle schools present a four year course there are a few which offer only three years of instruction. In order to enter these latter schools the child must have finished the seven years of instruction in the primary schools. Middle schools are under the inspection of state officials and a uniform standard of work is required of all of them. The middle school examination which marks the completion of the middle school course is exactly the same for all pupils in the state. In any given year all who take the examinations write on exactly the same questions on a specified hour of a certain day.
The middle school is the second step in the educational journey and builds on what was learned in primary school. No middle school is allowed to cover material below the sixth grade. In other words, primary schools are the only ones that can teach the first five grades of schooling. The curriculum is set up so that a child can[Pg 32]finish the fifth grade in primary school and then move straight into the regular four-year program at middle school. Alternatively, a student can stay in primary school until it’s completed—over seven years—before entering middle school and finishing its requirements in three years. Although almost all middle schools offer a four-year program, a few provide only three years of instruction. To attend these schools, a child must have completed the seven years of primary school. Middle schools are monitored by state officials, and all of them must adhere to a uniform standard of education. The middle school exam that signifies the end of the middle school program is the same for every student in the state. Each year, all students taking the exam answer the exact same questions at the same time on a designated day.
The Royal Frederik University, established by King Frederik in 1811, furnishes the summit of educational endeavor. Its five faculties—(1) theology, (2) law, (3) medicine, (4) mathematics and science, and (5) history and philosophy—represent the best products of the country and maintain standards of efficiency paralleling the achievements of the day. Besides the five faculties already mentioned there are (1) The Practical Theological Seminary for the training of ministers and (2) The Pedagogical Seminary (affiliated) for special training of teachers. Through the endeavors of the faculties and seminaries enumerated, the necessary professions, scientific organizations, and philosophic[Pg 33] societies are supplied with men of eminent qualifications. The state also is supplied from the same source with individuals capable of attending to the affairs of state in a dignified and competent manner.
The Royal Frederik University, founded by King Frederik in 1811, represents the pinnacle of educational achievement. Its five faculties—(1) theology, (2) law, (3) medicine, (4) mathematics and science, and (5) history and philosophy—showcase the country's finest talent and uphold standards of efficiency that match current accomplishments. In addition to the five faculties already mentioned, there are (1) The Practical Theological Seminary for training ministers and (2) The Pedagogical Seminary (affiliated) for specialized teacher training. Through the work of these faculties and seminaries, the necessary professions, scientific organizations, and philosophical[Pg 33] societies are provided with highly qualified individuals. The state also benefits from these institutions by gaining individuals who can handle state affairs in a dignified and capable manner.
To aid prospective teachers and to maintain high professional standards, Norway early established a Teachers' Seminary in each of its six dioceses (Stifter). Having made this ample provision for the training of teachers, they were in a position to require a certain amount of professional preparation of all candidates for appointment to teaching positions. Adherence to this laudable principle has saved the state from an overflow of incompetent instructors. While requirements were very low for a long time, the increasing supply of qualified candidates for positions warranted successive shiftings of them to higher and higher standards. At present, the teachers of Norway, as a body, rank among the best in educational equipment, professional training, and morality.
To support future teachers and uphold high professional standards, Norway established a Teachers' Seminary in each of its six dioceses. With this significant investment in teacher training, they were able to require a certain level of professional preparation from all candidates applying for teaching positions. Sticking to this commendable principle has helped the state avoid an influx of unqualified instructors. While requirements were quite low for a long time, the growing number of qualified candidates for these roles justified moving to higher and higher standards. Today, teachers in Norway are considered among the best in terms of educational background, professional training, and ethics.
Technical, agricultural, military, and naval schools have been established in order to keep pace with the world's developments along these lines. The technical school in Trondhjem opened in 1910, sets the requirements for admission as high as those at the university. Its work promises to be of unquestioned quality and its prospects are very bright. The students at this school come chiefly from the scientific course offered in the gymnasia or from the several preparatory technical schools of Norway. There are many of these lower technical schools doing excellent work and some of them are modeled after American schools. The work[Pg 34] of the agricultural college and of the military and naval schools is more or less technical along their respective lines and meets certain requirements not elsewhere provided for. When one notes the variety of schools maintained by the Norwegian state, it is evident that it is the intent to provide for its citizens a very wide range of educational advantages, and at the same time to develop the capacities of young people until they are able to perform the offices of state and nation.
Technical, agricultural, military, and naval schools have been established to keep up with global developments in these areas. The technical school in Trondhjem, which opened in 1910, has admission requirements that are as high as those at the university level. Its work promises to be of unquestionable quality, and its future looks very promising. The students at this school mainly come from the scientific course offered in high schools or from various preparatory technical schools across Norway. There are many of these lower technical schools doing excellent work, some modeled after American institutions. The work of the agricultural college and the military and naval schools is somewhat technical in their respective fields and meets certain requirements not addressed elsewhere. When observing the range of schools supported by the Norwegian state, it’s clear that the intention is to provide citizens with a broad array of educational opportunities while also developing young people's abilities to fulfill the roles needed in the state and nation.
III. DISTRIBUTION OF SCHOOLS AND PUPILS
The laws of Norway are specific in their requirements regarding education, and the people are at hand to provide the essential means for carrying out the demands. It is required that in each city or district in the entire realm there shall be the necessary number of schools to provide instruction for all children of school age. This is in answer to the law which makes a requirement of a certain minimum amount of education of all such children.
The laws in Norway clearly state the requirements for education, and the community is ready to provide the necessary resources to meet these demands. Each city or district across the country must have enough schools to educate all children of school age. This is in response to the law that mandates a minimum level of education for all these children.
The primary schools are distributed in the cities, villages, and rural communes to suit the convenience of pupils attending. Other and higher schools are provided where most needed. As is true everywhere the bulk of work is done in the primary schools. Rural and city schools have their own laws and government, and are admirably adapted to the needs of their respective constituencies. As would be expected, the rural schools and the pupils attending them far outnumber those in the cities and towns. There are in the country[Pg 35] five thousand, nine hundred and seventy schools attended by two hundred seventy-five thousand, one hundred and fifty-five pupils, while there are but sixty-one city school systems having an enrollment of ninety thousand, one hundred and twenty-nine pupils.[5] It is seen that there are about three times as many pupils in the rural primary schools as are found in the city primary schools. The distribution and care of the city school pupils are, however, much larger tasks than providing for those in the rural sections. In order to show conditions in a given city we insert Table I which indicates the number of classes and pupils in the several grades in the nineteen primary schools of Christiania, and also gives the totals for the entire city. Boys and girls attend the same school, but in this particular city they are generally separated into different rooms where they are taught by themselves. The schools are co-educational but not generally coinstructional. As the table will show, some of them are coinstructional through a part of the course while only one follows this plan throughout its work.
The primary schools are distributed in the cities, villages, and rural communes to suit the convenience of pupils attending. Other and higher schools are provided where most needed. As is true everywhere the bulk of work is done in the primary schools. Rural and city schools have their own laws and government, and are admirably adapted to the needs of their respective constituencies. As would be expected, the rural schools and the pupils attending them far outnumber those in the cities and towns. There are in the country[Pg 35] five thousand, nine hundred and seventy schools attended by two hundred seventy-five thousand, one hundred and fifty-five pupils, while there are but sixty-one city school systems having an enrollment of ninety thousand, one hundred and twenty-nine pupils.[5] It is seen that there are about three times as many pupils in the rural primary schools as are found in the city primary schools. The distribution and care of the city school pupils are, however, much larger tasks than providing for those in the rural sections. In order to show conditions in a given city we insert Table I which indicates the number of classes and pupils in the several grades in the nineteen primary schools of Christiania, and also gives the totals for the entire city. Boys and girls attend the same school, but in this particular city they are generally separated into different rooms where they are taught by themselves. The schools are co-educational but not generally coinstructional. As the table will show, some of them are coinstructional through a part of the course while only one follows this plan throughout its work.
TABLE I
Pupils in the Primary Schools of Christiania in the month of April, 1908
NUMBER OF CLASSES AND PUPILS IN THEM
1st Grade | 2nd | 3rd | 4th | 5th | 6th | 7th | ||||||||||
Schools | Cl. | Pu. | Cl. | Pu. | Cl. | Pu. | Cl. | Pu. | Cl. | Pu. | Cl. | Pu. | Cl. | Pu. | ||
A. | {Boys | 3 | 112 | 3 | 99 | 3 | 114 | 4 | 136 | 3 | 115 | 3 | 96 | 3 | 95 | |
{Girls | 3 | 107 | 3 | 113 | 3 | 116 | 3 | 105 | 3 | 111 | 3 | 191 | 2 | 83 | ||
B. | {Boys | 5 | 183 | 5 | 194 | 4 | 157 | 4 | 160 | 5 | 199 | 5 | 177 | 4 | 144 | |
{Girls | 5 | 178 | 5 | 184 | 5 | 196 | 4 | 140 | 5 | 188 | 4 | 151 | 4 | 149 | ||
C. | {Boys | 2 | 89 | 2 | 90 | 2 | 100 | 2 | 98 | 2 | 98 | 2 | 79 | 2 | 64 | |
{Girls | 2+1 | 99 | 2+1 | 96 | 2+1 | 101 | 2+1 | 95 | 2+1 | 97 | 2+1 | 89 | 2 | 77 | ||
D. | {Boys | 3 | 139 | 3 | 123 | 4 | 140 | 3 | 127 | 3 | 108 | 3 | 103 | 3 | 93 | |
{Girls | 3+1 | 119 | 3+1 | 132 | 3 | 117 | 3+1 | 139 | 3 | 028 | 3 | 110 | 3 | 101 | ||
E. | {Boys | 3 | 121 | 4 | 149 | 3 | 113 | 2 | 77 | 2 | 74 | 2 | 72 | 2 | 65 | |
{Girls | 3 | 115 | 4 | 152 | 3 | 101 | 3 | 116 | 3 | 115 | 2 | 77 | 2 | 60 | ||
F. | {Boys | 3 | 138 | 2 | 93 | 2 | 83 | 2 | 67 | 3 | 98 | 3 | 107 | 1 | 37 | |
{Girls | 3+1 | 122 | 2+1 | 102 | 2+1 | 104 | 3 | 104 | 2 | 77 | 2 | 79 | 2 | 65 | ||
G. | {Boys | 4 | 151 | 3 | 140 | 2 | 119 | 4 | 138 | 3 | 121 | 3 | 99 | 3 | 105 | |
{Girls | 4 | 147 | 4+1 | 157 | 4+1 | 148 | 4 | 134 | 3 | 106 | 2 | 80 | 3 | 93 | ||
H. | {Boys | 4 | 142 | 4 | 136 | 3 | 119 | 3 | 115 | 4 | 139 | 3 | 109 | 2 | 66 | |
{Girls | 3 | 131 | 3 | 136 | 4 | 131 | 4 | 142 | 3 | 102 | 2 | 80 | 2 | 69 | ||
I. | {Boys | 3 | 96 | 3 | 96 | 3 | 86 | 2 | 73 | 2 | 77 | 2 | 68 | 3 | 102 | |
{Girls | 2 | 79 | 2 | 68 | 2 | 82 | 2 | 79 | 2 | 68 | 2 | 71 | 3 | 102 | ||
J. | {Boys | 2 | 95 | 2 | 91 | 2 | 90 | 2 | 80 | 2 | 81 | 2 | 70 | 2 | 641 | |
{Girls | 2+1 | 87 | 2+1 | 109 | 2+1 | 98 | 3 | 93 | 2 | 66 | 2 | 68 | 2 | 661 | ||
K. | {Boys | 4 | 153 | 4 | 145 | 4 | 143 | 3 | 118 | 3 | 120 | 3 | 121 | 3 | 84 | |
{Girls | 5 | 170 | 4+1 | 153 | 4 | 139 | 4 | 154 | 3 | 123 | 3 | 103 | 3 | 93 | ||
L. | {Boys | 4 | 143 | 4 | 145 | 4 | 134 | 4 | 144 | 4 | 129 | 4 | 132 | 2 | 75 | |
{Girls | 4 | 158 | 4 | 148 | 4 | 141 | 4 | 132 | 4 | 136 | 4 | 157 | 4 | 131 | ||
M. | {Boys | 7 | 133 | 6 | 111 | 5 | 91 | 2 | 99 | 2 | 102 | 2 | 70 | 2 | 74 | |
{Girls | 136 | 108 | 115 | 2+2 | 124 | 2+2 | 115 | 3 | 97 | 2 | 72 | |||||
N. | {Boys | 4 | 151 | 1 | 106 | 1 | 108 | 2 | 113 | 2 | 85 | 2 | 105 | 2 | 72 | |
{Girls | 3 | 109 | 1+4 | 125 | 1+3 | 127 | 2+2 | 108 | 2+1 | 100 | 2+2 | 106 | 2 | 64 | ||
O. | {Boys | 111 | 98 | 128 | 118 | 102 | 95 | 57 | ||||||||
{Girls | 5 | 90 | 5 | 98 | 7 | 126 | 6 | 104 | 5 | 88 | 5 | 98 | 4 | 73 | ||
P. | {Boys | 3 | 126 | 2 | 83 | 3 | 116 | 3 | 103 | 3 | 103 | 2 | 68 | 3 | 96 | |
{Girls | 3 | 113 | 3 | 117 | 3 | 105 | 3 | 113 | 3 | 99 | 2 | 80 | 3 | 100 | ||
Q. | {Boys | 4 | 155 | 5 | 192 | 5 | 168 | 4 | 158 | 4 | 155 | 4 | 149 | 3 | 116 | |
{Girls | 4 | 154 | 5+1 | 189 | 4 | 163 | 5 | 171 | 4 | 144 | 3 | 118 | 2 | 111 | ||
R. | {Boys | 154 | 159 | 131 | 112 | 3 | 107 | 2 | 83 | 3 | 104 | |||||
{Girls | 186 | 128 | 141 | 115 | 3 | 110 | 3+1 | 131 | 2 | 77 | ||||||
S. | {Boys | 5 | 185 | 4 | 151 | 4 | 139 | 4 | 135 | 3 | 111 | 2 | 75 | |||
{Girls | 4 | 159 | 5 | 172 | 4 | 146 | 3 | 108 | 4 | 148 | 2 | 79 | ||||
Total | (Classes) | 134 | 131 | 126 | 122 | 115 | 104 | 91 | 2 | |||||||
—— | —— | —— | —— | —— | —— | —— | — | |||||||||
(Pupils) | 5036 | 4878 | 4676 | 4458 | 4235 | 3753 | 3099 | 43 | ||||||||
Average number of pupils per class | 37.6 | 37.3 | 37.1 | 36.5 | 36.8 | 36.1 | 34.1 | |||||||||
Schools for Abnormals | ||||||||||||||||
{Boys | 4+1 | 47 | 7 | 54 | 5+1 | 57 | 46 | 66 | 6+1 | 65 | 30 | 2 | 19 | |||
{Girls | 18 | 53 | 41 | 37 | 47 | 33 | 18 | 9 |
Cl.—Class.
Pu.—Pupils.
1.—Classes made up of children requiring individual attention.
Cl.—Class.
Pu.—Pupils.
1.—Classes consisting of children who need individual attention.
Total Classes | Total Pupils | Condensed table of all groups | ||||||
—————— | —————— | ———————— | ||||||
Schools | Boys' | Girls' | Coeds. | Boys | Girls | Classes | Pupils | Average for class. |
A. | 22 | 20 | 767 | 736 | 42 | 1503 | 35.8 | |
B. | 32 | 32 | 1214 | 1195 | 64 | 2409 | 37.6 | |
C. | 14 | 14 | 6 | 618 | 644 | 34 | 1262 | 37.1 |
D. | 22 | 21 | 3 | 833 | 840 | 46 | 1679 | 36.5 |
E. | 18 | 20 | 671 | 736 | 38 | 1407 | 37.0 | |
F. | 16 | 16 | 3 | 623 | 653 | 35 | 1276 | 36.5 |
G. | 22 | 24 | 2 | 873 | 865 | 48 | 1738 | 36.2 |
H. | 23 | 21 | 826 | 781 | 44 | 1607 | 36.5 | |
I. | 18 | 15 | 598 | 549 | 33 | 1147 | 34.8 | |
J. | 15 | 16 | 3 | 595 | 606 | 34 | 1201 | 35.3 |
K. | 24 | 26 | 884 | 935 | 50 | 1810 | 36.4 | |
L. | 26 | 28 | 902 | 1003 | 54 | 1905 | 35.3 | |
M. | 8 | 9 | 22 | 680 | 767 | 39 | 1447 | 37.1 |
N. | 14 | 13 | 13 | 740 | 789 | 40 | 1479 | 37.0 |
O. | 37 | 709 | 677 | 37 | 1380 | 37.5 | ||
P. | 19 | 20 | 695 | 727 | 39 | 1422 | 36.5 | |
Q. | 29 | 28 | 1093 | 1050 | 57 | 2143 | 37.6 | |
R. | 8 | 8 | 31 | 850 | 888 | 47 | 1738 | 37.0 |
S. | 22 | 22 | 796 | 812 | 44 | 1608 | 36.5 | |
—— | —— | —— | —— | —— | —— | —— | —— | |
Total number of Pupils | 352 | 353 | 120 | 14967 | 15209 | 825 | 30176 | 36.6 |
Schools for Abnormals | 3 | 39 | 384 | 256 | 42 | 640 | 15.6 |
In addition to the special features in this table, to which we have already called attention, it may be observed that the total number of boys', girls', and co-educational classes; the total number of boys and of girls in attendance at each school; and the average number of pupils per class in each school are also included.
In addition to the special features in this table, which we have already highlighted, it's worth noting that the total number of boys', girls', and co-ed classes; the total number of boys and girls attending each school; and the average number of students per class in each school are also included.
The law limits the number of pupils in a class to thirty-five, except temporarily or in case of stringency in financial conditions, and in no case must there be more than forty.[6] It is seen in the table that the average is above thirty-five in all but one school, but it has been exceedingly difficult in the rapidly growing city of Christiania to avoid congestion in the schools. In only one of the nineteen schools does the general average come within the rule. If they plead economic stringency then the averages of all fall within the limits.
The law limits the number of pupils in a class to thirty-five, except temporarily or in case of stringency in financial conditions, and in no case must there be more than forty.[6] It is seen in the table that the average is above thirty-five in all but one school, but it has been exceedingly difficult in the rapidly growing city of Christiania to avoid congestion in the schools. In only one of the nineteen schools does the general average come within the rule. If they plead economic stringency then the averages of all fall within the limits.
Now a large percentage of children continue their education after the completion of the elementary course. In 1907, there were nine thousand, eight hundred and ninety-five pupils in the accredited middle schools,[7] and one thousand, five hundred and ninety-three in the gymnasia. About eighteen thousand others attended non-accredited secondary schools and those of still lower standards—evening schools, continuation schools, and various preparatory schools. Approximately two thousand were in technical schools[Pg 41] and about one thousand in teachers' seminaries. Nearly every town of any considerable consequence has a middle school where pupils from the town and surrounding territory may receive its benefits. The larger cities have, in addition to a liberal supply of middle schools, one or more gymnasia, according to their size. The gymnasia draw from a wider territory than do the middle schools because they are fewer and farther apart.
Now a large percentage of children continue their education after the completion of the elementary course. In 1907, there were nine thousand, eight hundred and ninety-five pupils in the accredited middle schools,[7] and one thousand, five hundred and ninety-three in the gymnasia. About eighteen thousand others attended non-accredited secondary schools and those of still lower standards—evening schools, continuation schools, and various preparatory schools. Approximately two thousand were in technical schools[Pg 41] and about one thousand in teachers' seminaries. Nearly every town of any considerable consequence has a middle school where pupils from the town and surrounding territory may receive its benefits. The larger cities have, in addition to a liberal supply of middle schools, one or more gymnasia, according to their size. The gymnasia draw from a wider territory than do the middle schools because they are fewer and farther apart.
In addition to the six teachers' seminaries maintained by the state, there are four private ones—ten in all. Table II indicates the aggregate attendance at these institutions and the number of those who passed the advanced examinations during the years designated.
In addition to the six teachers' seminaries run by the state, there are four private ones—ten in total. Table II shows the overall attendance at these institutions and the number of students who passed the advanced examinations during the specified years.
The university, of course, draws its students from all over the State. It has an attendance of one thousand, three hundred or more, about five hundred and fifty of whom are annually enrolled direct from the gymnasia. These students represent the best products of the country and generally they work with earnestness and zeal.
The university attracts students from all over the state. It has an enrollment of over one thousand three hundred, with around five hundred and fifty coming straight from high schools each year. These students are some of the brightest in the country, and they typically approach their studies with seriousness and passion.
TABLE II
Table Giving Attendance at Teachers' Seminaries and the Number Passing Advanced Examinations.
Table Showing Attendance at Teacher Seminaries and the Number Who Passed Advanced Exams.
Took Examination. | ||||
Year. | Attendance. | Male. | Female. | Total. |
1901-02 | 755 | 204 | 135 | 339 |
1902-03 | 980 | 192 | 129 | 321 |
1903-04 | 953 | 216 | 184 | 400 |
1904-05 | 902 | 174 | 119 | 293 |
1905-06 | 955 | 208 | 147 | 355 |
—— | —— | ——— | ||
Totals | 994 | 714 | 1,708 | |
Annual Average | 199 | 143 | 342 |
Private schools have played an important role in Norway. They have had a long and interesting history. A number of them do part or all of the work represented by the state primary and secondary schools and teachers' seminaries. Most of them are located in the larger cities and receive recognition and patronage from some of the best homes in the land. Their influence upon education generally has been wholesome. The valuable and attractive features introduced by them have operated like spurs on those under state direction. The cooperative activity which has characterized the relationship between the two kinds of schools has resulted in the betterment of both and in the rapid advancement of educational ideals and activities throughout the state.
Private schools have played a significant role in Norway. They have a long and fascinating history. Many of them handle some or all of the responsibilities of state primary and secondary schools, as well as teachers' colleges. Most are found in larger cities and are recognized and supported by some of the finest homes in the country. Their impact on education as a whole has been positive. The valuable and appealing features they’ve introduced have acted as incentives for those in state-run institutions. The collaborative nature of the relationship between the two types of schools has led to improvements in both and has accelerated the progress of educational ideals and activities across the state.
There are, of course, some fundamental differences existing between them. The private schools charge a regular tuition in every grade of primary and secondary work. The state primary schools are free and the tuition in its secondary schools is less than that charged in the private schools. It is self-evident that private schools are dependent upon tuition receipts for both running expenses and profits, while the state and communal schools are supported largely by public taxation.[8] Paralleling so nearly the work of the state schools, yet being more expensive, the private schools have been under the necessity of offering certain inducements in order to secure pupils. They have been made attractive in location, in buildings, in equipment, in the personnel of their faculties, and in other ways, and their efforts have been richly rewarded as a rule.
There are, of course, some fundamental differences existing between them. The private schools charge a regular tuition in every grade of primary and secondary work. The state primary schools are free and the tuition in its secondary schools is less than that charged in the private schools. It is self-evident that private schools are dependent upon tuition receipts for both running expenses and profits, while the state and communal schools are supported largely by public taxation.[8] Paralleling so nearly the work of the state schools, yet being more expensive, the private schools have been under the necessity of offering certain inducements in order to secure pupils. They have been made attractive in location, in buildings, in equipment, in the personnel of their faculties, and in other ways, and their efforts have been richly rewarded as a rule.
All classes of schools are subject to state regulations and inspection. Certain definite requirements must be met before a private school may even begin to operate, and still higher standards must be maintained in order for the work to be accredited by the state. Standards of excellence are naturally set by state schools and the requirements fixed by the state inhibit the starting of inferior schools under the pretense of offering something "just as good." During recent years some of the private schools—those well-known and respected[Pg 44] because of the nature of work and high standards of excellence maintained—have been given special recognition by the state, and a few of them receive annuities. When advancement in nature or improvement in quality of school work is rewarded by increase in patronage from the state, zest is furnished in the contest for first recognition.
All types of schools have to follow state regulations and undergo inspections. Certain specific requirements must be met before a private school can even start operating, and even stricter standards must be maintained for the work to be accredited by the state. The standards of excellence are naturally set by public schools, and the state’s requirements prevent the establishment of inferior schools that claim to offer something "just as good." In recent years, some private schools—those well-known and respected[Pg 44] for their quality of work and high standards—have received special recognition from the state, and a few of them even receive funding. When advancements or improvements in school quality are rewarded with increased support from the state, it adds excitement to the competition for top recognition.
Though the history of the rise, development and influence of the private schools of Norway, together with a discussion of their present status and worth, might furnish an interesting chapter, it becomes necessary to let this slight mention suffice and to confine this work to a treatise of the schools instituted and directed by the state. It may be added, however, that the work of the accredited private schools equals in quality and receives the same recognition as that done in state schools. For example, all graduates from the private gymnasia pass the same examinations for artium as those who complete the work of the state gymnasia and enter the university on exactly the same footing.
Though the history of the rise, development, and influence of private schools in Norway, along with a discussion of their current status and value, might make for an interesting chapter, we will only briefly mention it and focus this work on the schools established and run by the state. However, it's worth noting that the quality of work at accredited private schools is on par with that of state schools and receives equal recognition. For instance, all graduates from private gymnasia take the same examinations for artium as those who finish at state gymnasia and enter university on exactly the same terms.
IV. PUPILS
The compulsory school laws which operate in Norway determine the age (seven years) at which children shall enter school and the regularity of their attendance. With this in mind, it is readily understood that as a rule each class marches steadily forward, one grade each year, until the completion of the school life. As a consequence there is but little variation in the ages of pupils doing the work of any certain grade, and the proportion of pupils of normal age in the several grades is very large. In order to illustrate definitely, a concrete situation is presented in Table III, which shows the exact conditions existing at a certain time in one of their representative cities.
The mandatory school laws in Norway set the age (seven years) at which children must start school and regulate their attendance. With this in mind, it’s clear that, as a rule, each class progresses steadily, advancing one grade each year until they finish school. As a result, there’s very little variation in the ages of students in any given grade, and the number of students of typical age in each grade is quite high. To provide a clear example, Table III presents a specific situation that demonstrates the exact conditions in one of their representative cities at a certain time.
TABLE III [Transcriber note: table split to fit]
Table showing the age of pupils on April 30, 1908, in the several grades, also the number in each Grade and relation to normal age.
Table showing the age of students on April 30, 1908, in the various grades, along with the number in each grade and their relation to the standard age.
Age and year of birth. | |||||||||||||
6-7 | 7-8 | 8-9 | 9-10 | 10-11 | 11-12 | 12-13 | 13-14 | 14-15 | 15-16 | 16-17 | |||
Grade | No. of Classes | 1902 | 1901 | 1900 | 1899 | 1898 | 1897 | 1896 | 1895 | 1894 | 1893 | 1892 | Total |
1 | 134 | 27 | 3047 | 1790 | 164 | 10 | 5038 | ||||||
2 | 130 | 33 | 2730 | 1795 | 263 | 18 | 4839 | ||||||
3 | 126 | 22 | 2564 | 1730 | 319 | 36 | 5 | 2 | 4678 | ||||
4 | 122 | 33 | 2287 | 1620 | 393 | 77 | 14 | 1 | 4425 | ||||
5 | 115 | 32 | 2009 | 1528 | 511 | 136 | 6 | 4222 | |||||
6 | 105 | 1 | 39 | 1856 | 1342 | 569 | 80 | 3878 | |||||
7 | 90 | 28 | 1582 | 1129 | 231 | 3 | 3003 | ||||||
X[2] | 2 | 20 | 22 | 1 | 43 | ||||||||
T[1] | 824 | 27 | 3080 | 4542 | 4556 | 4323 | 3996 | 3841 | 3537 | 1962 | 139 | 3 | 30186 |
Per ct. | 1908 | 0.1 | 10.2 | 15.1 | 15.1 | 14.3 | 13.2 | 12.7 | 11.7 | 6.5 | 1.1 | — | —— |
1907 | 0.1 | 11.3 | 15.3 | 15.0 | 13.5 | 13.1 | 12.6 | 11.9 | 6.2 | 1.0 | — | — | |
1906 | 0.1 | 10.9 | 15.5 | 14.6 | 14.0 | 13.4 | 12.5 | 11.6 | 6.6 | 0.8 | — | — | |
1905 | 0.1 | 11.2 | 15.3 | 14.7 | 14.0 | 13.6 | 12.7 | 11.9 | 6.4 | 0.1 | — | — |
No. of Pupils of Normal Age. | Per Cent. of Normal Age. | |||||
Grade | Under | Norm. | Over | Under | Norm. | Over |
1 | 27 | 4837 | 174 | 0.5 | 96.0 | 3.5 |
2 | 33 | 4525 | 281 | 0.7 | 93.5 | 5.8 |
3 | 22 | 4294 | 362 | 0.5 | 91.9 | 7.6 |
4 | 33 | 3907 | 485 | 0.8 | 88.3 | 10.9 |
5 | 32 | 3537 | 653 | 0.8 | 83.8 | 15.4 |
6 | 31 | 3198 | 649 | 0.8 | 82.2 | 17.0 |
7 | 28 | 2801 | 234 | 0.9 | 91.1 | 8.0 |
X[2]. | 42 | 1 | — | 97.7 | 2.3 | |
T[1]. | 206 | 27141 | 2839 | |||
Per ct.1908 | —— | —— | —— | 0.7 | 89.9 | 9.4 |
1907 | —— | —— | —— | 0.8 | 90.9 | 8.3 |
1906 | —— | —— | —— | 0.9 | 91.8 | 7.3 |
1905 | —— | —— | —— | 1.1 | 91.7 | 7.2 |
1. Primary schools of Kristiana exclusive of schools for abnormal children.
2. Classes requiring special individual attention.
1. Primary schools in Kristiana, excluding schools for children with special needs.
2. Classes that need individual attention.
This table speaks for itself and needs no explanation. It is worthy of note, however, that in comparatively few instances do the ages vary more than two or three years, and that six years is the widest difference in age to be found among all the pupils of any given grade of work. Furthermore, we call attention to the fact that those above normal age in no year aggregated as much as ten per cent of the entire number in attendance. 10.1 per cent represents the entire number outside the normal age—those above plus those below—for the year 1908. During the three former years the percentage was still smaller. The reduction in numbers of pupils in the sixth and seventh grades is due in large part to the fact that so many pass from the fifth grade into the middle school.
This table speaks for itself and needs no explanation. However, it's worth mentioning that in relatively few cases do the ages differ by more than two or three years, and that six years is the largest age difference found among all the students in any given grade level. Additionally, we note that those above the normal age never made up more than ten percent of the total number of attendees in any year. In 1908, 10.1 percent represented the entire number outside the normal age—both those above and those below. In the previous three years, this percentage was even lower. The drop in the number of students in the sixth and seventh grades is largely due to many students moving from the fifth grade into middle school.
The same conditions of uniformity exist in the secondary schools. Having entered at the age of seven and having spent five or more years in the primary school, the pupils upon entrance to the middle school are generally twelve or more years old. In some middle schools the average age of those entering will at times be less than twelve years. This latter condition is usually due to some local situation or rule regarding age at entrance upon school work. In order to follow the age question to nearer its limits we will present Table IV.
The same conditions of uniformity exist in secondary schools. Students generally start at age seven and after spending five or more years in primary school, they usually enter middle school at around twelve or older. In some middle schools, the average age of new students may occasionally be less than twelve. This is typically due to local circumstances or rules about the age for starting school. To explore the age issue further, we will present Table IV.
TABLE IV
Table showing the ages of pupils in State and Communal Secondary Schools.
Table showing the ages of students in State and Community Secondary Schools.
Middle School | Gymnasium | |||||||
I. | II. | III. | IV. | I. | II. | III. | Date | |
Trondhjem(A) | 12-1(C) | 13-3 | 14-2 | 15-6 | 16-10 | 17-18 | 18-1 | 9-1-06 |
Kristiansand(A) | 12 | 13-5 | 14-2 | 15-2 | 16-3 | 17-7 | 18-3 | 10-1-00 |
Kristiansund(B) | 12-7 | 13-5 | 14-8 | 15-5 | 16-2 | 16-9 | 18-4 | 9-1-09 |
Fredrikkstad(B) | 12-7 | 13-4 | 14-2 | 15-2 | 15-10 | 16-10 | 17-8 | 7-1-08 |
Lillihammer(B) | 12-2 | 13-2 | 14 | 15-3 | 16 | 16-6 | 18-1 | 7-1-06 |
Larvik(B) | 12-2 | 13-3 | 14-2 | 15-1 | 15-10 | 16-10 | 18-2 | 8-1-03 |
[Note A: State secondary school.]
[Note A: State high school.]
[Note B: Communal secondary schools.]
[Note B: Community high schools.]
[Note C: Age in years and months.]
[Note C: Age in years and months.]
Attention is called to the step from the last year in the middle school to the first year in the gymnasium. In several instances there is considerably less than a year of difference in age. This is but another illustration of the tendencies of the sifting that goes on in the natural process of selecting the fittest. Those of keenest intellect are the ones who reach a specific requirement in least time and then proceed in the pursuit of advance education. The ones sifted out are more generally those whose advance has been more difficult, or those who have lagged behind others of their own age. The absence of these tends to lower the average age in the succeeding grade. Similar conditions in emphasized form are in evidence when we study the ages of those who enter the university from year to year. While the ages of those just entering the third and final year of the gymnasium are on the average more than eighteen, the ones who enter the university the following year in September average nineteen years of age or a little less.
Attention is drawn to the transition from the last year of middle school to the first year of high school. In many cases, there's often less than a year difference in age. This is just another example of the natural selection process where the most capable students stand out. Those with the sharpest minds are the ones who meet certain requirements in the shortest time and then continue to pursue higher education. The students who don't make the cut are usually those who have faced more challenges or have fallen behind their peers. Their absence tends to lower the average age in the next grade. Similar patterns are clearly seen when we look at the ages of students entering university each year. While the average age of those just starting their third and final year of high school is over eighteen, the average age of those entering university the following September is around nineteen or slightly younger.
In addition to the tables showing the ages of pupils throughout the several grades of preparatory and secondary education, the following one is inserted to show the average age of those in attendance at four of the teachers' seminaries. The advance in age with advance of grade is not as regular here as in the other schools.
In addition to the tables showing the ages of students across the various grades of preparatory and secondary education, the following one is included to show the average age of those attending four of the teachers' seminaries. The increase in age with each grade is not as consistent here as in the other schools.
TABLE V
Table Showing Age of Pupils in the Teachers' Seminaries at the Beginning of the Year, 1906-7.
Table Showing Age of Students in the Teacher Training Programs at the Start of the Year, 1906-7.
Average age[A] in grades. | |||
I. | II. | III. | |
Holmestrand | 19-7 | 21-3 | 22-1 |
Levanger | 20 | 19-8 | 21-4 |
Hamar | 19-2 | 20-2 | 21-7 |
Stord | 19-6 | 19-11 | 21 |
[Note A: Age in years and months.]
[Note A: Age in years and months.]
There is not as close correspondence between age or grade and scholarship in the seminaries as we find in the other schools. The greater variation is due to several causes, among them are the following: (1) The law requires that a teacher must be at least twenty years of age.[9] (2) The previous education of those in attendance varies greatly. Many are desirous of getting as thorough and complete preparation as their circumstances admit, while others are seemingly anxious to enter on the lowest standard admissible. (3) Teachers who are eager to improve their qualifications frequently return to the seminary after a few years of teaching experience in order to complete the course and prepare for the better class of positions.
There is not as close correspondence between age or grade and scholarship in the seminaries as we find in the other schools. The greater variation is due to several causes, among them are the following: (1) The law requires that a teacher must be at least twenty years of age.[9] (2) The previous education of those in attendance varies greatly. Many are desirous of getting as thorough and complete preparation as their circumstances admit, while others are seemingly anxious to enter on the lowest standard admissible. (3) Teachers who are eager to improve their qualifications frequently return to the seminary after a few years of teaching experience in order to complete the course and prepare for the better class of positions.
Comparisons between the educational equipment of the American youth and that of his Norwegian cousin[Pg 50] at any given age are exceedingly difficult to make. We have not yet established any specific units or norms by which education may be measured. We can make neither definite nor satisfactory quantitative or qualitative measurements of accomplishment. However, a careful analysis of the respective courses of study, the qualification of teachers, and plans of work, supported by the testimony of those who have been teachers in both countries, seems to warrant the statement that the completion of the gymnasial course of study in Norway is comparable to the completion of the sophomore year of work in our American colleges and universities. The average age of students is about the same in both instances.
Making comparisons between the educational resources of American youth and those of their Norwegian counterparts at any age is quite challenging. We haven't established specific units or standards for measuring education. Therefore, we can't provide clear or satisfactory quantitative or qualitative assessments of achievement. However, a careful examination of the respective curricula, teacher qualifications, and work plans, backed by feedback from individuals who have taught in both countries, suggests that finishing the gymnasial program in Norway is roughly equivalent to completing the sophomore year at American colleges and universities. The average age of students in both cases is about the same.
The American children spend a less portion of the year in school than do the children in Norway. While in our schools we generally have but thirty-six weeks of five days each in a year, inclusive of all regular and special holidays, the schools of Norway are in operation forty weeks of six days each, exclusive of holidays. Leaving out any consideration of holidays, the American school year usually amounts to one hundred eighty days, while in Norway they have two hundred and forty days of school. In other words, eight years of primary school and four years of high school in America represent only three-fourths as many days of instruction and study as are included in five years of primary school, four years of middle school, and three years of gymnasium in Norway. That is to say, to provide the same number of days of instruction it would take sixteen school years in America to equal twelve in Norway.
The American kids spend less time in school each year compared to kids in Norway. In the U.S., we typically have just thirty-six weeks of five days each, including all regular and special holidays, while Norway's schools are open for forty weeks of six days each, not counting holidays. Excluding holidays, the American school year usually totals one hundred eighty days, while in Norway, it’s two hundred forty days of school. In simpler terms, eight years of elementary school and four years of high school in America equal only three-fourths the number of instructional days compared to five years of elementary school, four years of middle school, and three years of gymnasium in Norway. In other words, to match the same number of instructional days, it would take sixteen school years in America to equal just twelve years in Norway.
The specialization which characterizes the work of the students upon entrance to the Norwegian university brings their study within much narrower limits than that of our ordinary juniors in college. Their general cultural education concludes with the taking of artium while ours usually continues throughout the liberal arts course in college or until the degree of Bachelor of Arts has been received. A certain amount of specialization is common among our students during the later years of their college education, but it covers a wider range than in Norway and the greater portion of it is reserved for post graduate courses. In Norway the professional studies are taken up without any preliminaries immediately upon entrance to the university. In the better professional schools of America, one, two, or three years of collegiate work is required as a preparation for entrance.
The specialization that defines the students' work when they enter a Norwegian university keeps their studies within much narrower limits compared to our typical college juniors. Their general cultural education ends with the completion of artium, while ours usually continues throughout the liberal arts program in college or until they earn a Bachelor of Arts degree. Some specialization is common among our students during the later years of their college education, but it covers a broader range than in Norway, with most of it reserved for postgraduate courses. In Norway, professional studies begin immediately upon entering the university without any prior requirements. In better professional schools in America, one, two, or three years of college coursework is necessary as preparation for admission.
I. ORGANIZATION—RELATION TO STATE, COMMUNE, AND CITY
The highest educational authority of Norway is vested in the Department of Ecclesiastical and Educational Affairs (Kirke-og Undervisnings-Departmentet), and the chief functionary in this department of government is a member of the King's cabinet (Statsraad). The work of the department is separated into two divisions, one of which supervises the ecclesiastical activities and the other the educational work of the country. This latter division is again separated into two bureaus, one having charge of primary education and[Pg 52] the other being in control of secondary educational affairs. These bureaus perform the functions usually devolving upon such offices, the work being largely clerical. In addition there are the diocesan directors (Stift Direktorer) bearing the immediate responsibilities in primary education, and a state educational commission (Undervisningsraad) having large authority in secondary education.
The top educational authority in Norway is held by the Department of Ecclesiastical and Educational Affairs (Kirke-og Undervisnings-Departmentet), and the main official in this government department is a member of the King's cabinet (Statsraad). The department's work is divided into two divisions, one overseeing ecclesiastical activities and the other managing the country's educational work. The educational division is further split into two bureaus: one responsible for primary education and[Pg 52] the other handling secondary educational affairs. These bureaus carry out the usual functions associated with such offices, and their work is mostly clerical. Additionally, there are diocesan directors (Stift Direktorer) who hold immediate responsibilities for primary education, and a state educational commission (Undervisningsraad) that has significant authority in secondary education.
Next to the department itself the school directors have authority over primary education. In fact the director has all but complete control in his territory even though the department is recognized as having the higher authority or powers. The King's cabinet appoints seven directors for the six dioceses into which the state is divided; two for the most northern, because of its greater extent, and one for each of the other five. The directors are paid by the state and are amenable only to the state, hence they exercise their powers in an endeavor to effect the best possible results educationally without fear or favor of local influences. They act independently in their respective territories and do not constitute a committee in any sense whatever.
Next to the department itself, the school directors hold authority over primary education. In fact, the director has almost complete control in their area, even though the department is recognized as having higher authority. The King's cabinet appoints seven directors for the six dioceses that the state is divided into—two for the northernmost area due to its larger size, and one for each of the other five. The directors are paid by the state and are accountable only to the state, allowing them to exercise their powers to achieve the best educational outcomes without fear or favor from local influences. They operate independently in their areas and do not form a committee in any way.
The commission having chief oversight of secondary education consists of seven men appointed by the King's cabinet. They are chosen because of their efficiency in educational affairs without regard to the part of the country to which they belong.[10] They work always as a committee, and as experts serve the state[Pg 53] for the general welfare of secondary education. The many privileges and duties exercised by this commission may be grouped together under the heads of inspection and supervision of secondary schools, and arrangements for having examinations. Several of the men constituting this commission are at the same time rectors of leading secondary schools in the country. In fact they are chosen because of their familiarity with and expertness in just such kind of work. When it becomes necessary to seek advice in hygienic questions a physician of recognized ability is added to the commission. His judgment and instruction are respected and adhered to very closely.
The commission having chief oversight of secondary education consists of seven men appointed by the King's cabinet. They are chosen because of their efficiency in educational affairs without regard to the part of the country to which they belong.[10] They work always as a committee, and as experts serve the state[Pg 53] for the general welfare of secondary education. The many privileges and duties exercised by this commission may be grouped together under the heads of inspection and supervision of secondary schools, and arrangements for having examinations. Several of the men constituting this commission are at the same time rectors of leading secondary schools in the country. In fact they are chosen because of their familiarity with and expertness in just such kind of work. When it becomes necessary to seek advice in hygienic questions a physician of recognized ability is added to the commission. His judgment and instruction are respected and adhered to very closely.
The rural communes are divided into school districts or circles (Skolekredser). Each district supports and maintains a primary school with at least two divisions—an infant school (Smaaskole) for children from seven to ten years of age, and a higher one designed for children from ten to fourteen years of age. In districts where distances are great or roadways difficult, two or more infant schools are provided.
The rural communities are divided into school districts or circles (Skolekredser). Each district supports and maintains a primary school with at least two divisions—an elementary school (Smaaskole) for kids aged seven to ten, and a higher one for kids aged ten to fourteen. In areas where distances are far or roads are tough, there are two or more elementary schools available.
Companies operating one or more manufacturing establishments or industrial concerns, and generally employing thirty or more laborers, are required to provide a primary school for the children of the men in their employ. When once started these schools are to be kept up unless the number of the employed is reduced below twenty. In case there are other children who desire to attend such school, they shall have the right to do so providing it does not interfere with the instruction of those for whom the school was established.[Pg 54] In return for this the school treasury receives from the communal treasury a yearly amount proportioned to the total cost for all pupils in the school.[11]
Companies operating one or more manufacturing establishments or industrial concerns, and generally employing thirty or more laborers, are required to provide a primary school for the children of the men in their employ. When once started these schools are to be kept up unless the number of the employed is reduced below twenty. In case there are other children who desire to attend such school, they shall have the right to do so providing it does not interfere with the instruction of those for whom the school was established.[Pg 54] In return for this the school treasury receives from the communal treasury a yearly amount proportioned to the total cost for all pupils in the school.[11]
While the law requires that instruction shall be provided six days in the week for at least twelve weeks each year, it also grants to the communes the privilege of extending the time to fifteen weeks.[B] It further provides the right to maintain six weeks additional, voluntary instruction each year.[12] These privileges are generally taken advantage of by both communes and pupils. The communes desire the extension of time for school, and the pupils are very glad of the opportunity to attend the extra time, even though their presence is not compulsory. In fact the compulsory education law has been so rigidly enforced for so long a time that regular attendance has become habitual, and the exact provisions and requirements of the law are rarely thought of by the pupils. There is, in reality, no law requiring children to attend the schools provided by the state, but a certain amount of education is obligatory. It is mandatory that schools be maintained in all of the districts, but individual children may receive their instruction in private schools if they choose, so long as educational requirements are met from year to year. Pupils who belong to the schools are required to be in attendance regularly, and children who receive instruction elsewhere than in the state schools must meet the requirements calculated to bring them to a certain educational standard by the time they are fifteen[Pg 55] years of age. Failure in this subjects parents, guardians, and those providing schools for children of laborers in their employ to fine or imprisonment.[13]
While the law requires that instruction shall be provided six days in the week for at least twelve weeks each year, it also grants to the communes the privilege of extending the time to fifteen weeks.[B] It further provides the right to maintain six weeks additional, voluntary instruction each year.[12] These privileges are generally taken advantage of by both communes and pupils. The communes desire the extension of time for school, and the pupils are very glad of the opportunity to attend the extra time, even though their presence is not compulsory. In fact the compulsory education law has been so rigidly enforced for so long a time that regular attendance has become habitual, and the exact provisions and requirements of the law are rarely thought of by the pupils. There is, in reality, no law requiring children to attend the schools provided by the state, but a certain amount of education is obligatory. It is mandatory that schools be maintained in all of the districts, but individual children may receive their instruction in private schools if they choose, so long as educational requirements are met from year to year. Pupils who belong to the schools are required to be in attendance regularly, and children who receive instruction elsewhere than in the state schools must meet the requirements calculated to bring them to a certain educational standard by the time they are fifteen[Pg 55] years of age. Failure in this subjects parents, guardians, and those providing schools for children of laborers in their employ to fine or imprisonment.[13]
The work in the infant school includes or amounts to thirty lessons per week while in the higher one there are thirty-six lessons. Accordingly, the pupils in the lower grades receive a minimum of three hundred sixty lessons a year, and this number may be increased to four hundred fifty or six hundred thirty. In the higher grades they have at least four hundred thirty-two lessons a year, and if the time is extended they have five hundred forty or seven hundred fifty-six lessons a year.
The work in the preschool includes about thirty lessons a week, while in the higher grades there are thirty-six lessons. As a result, students in the lower grades get a minimum of three hundred sixty lessons a year, and this number can go up to four hundred fifty or six hundred thirty. In the higher grades, they have at least four hundred thirty-two lessons a year, and if the schedule is extended, they can have five hundred forty or seven hundred fifty-six lessons a year.
Each rural commune has its own school board (Skolestyret) consisting of a priest; the chairman of the municipal council; one or two teachers[14] chosen by the body of teachers; as many other members (men or women) as the communal council deems it advisable to select; and the rectors of higher schools, if there be any,[Pg 56] under the supervision and inspection of the school board.
Each rural commune has its own school board (Skolestyret) consisting of a priest; the chairman of the municipal council; one or two teachers[14] chosen by the body of teachers; as many other members (men or women) as the communal council deems it advisable to select; and the rectors of higher schools, if there be any,[Pg 56] under the supervision and inspection of the school board.
In the towns and cities the school board consists of at least one priest[15]; a member of the city's executive council;[16] as many other members chosen for three years as the municipal council deems it advisable to select, at least half of whom must be chosen from among parents who at the time of election have children in the city primary schools; one or two teachers;[17] and, wherever the school board controls higher schools, the rectors of such schools.
In the towns and cities the school board consists of at least one priest[15]; a member of the city's executive council;[16] as many other members chosen for three years as the municipal council deems it advisable to select, at least half of whom must be chosen from among parents who at the time of election have children in the city primary schools; one or two teachers;[17] and, wherever the school board controls higher schools, the rectors of such schools.
The members of the school board select their own chairman and act together as a committee or board. Among its more important duties are appointment of teachers and special committees, provision of course of study with specific instructions regarding its presentation, and the estimation of sums of money necessary to meet demands in the maintenance of the schools for the[Pg 57] year. This estimate of expenses is sent by the board each year to the communal council which has charge of the dispensing of finances for the commune.
The members of the school board choose their own chairperson and operate together as a committee or board. Some of their key responsibilities include hiring teachers and special committees, providing the course curriculum with detailed instructions on how to present it, and estimating the funds needed to support the schools for the[Pg 57] year. This budget estimate is submitted by the board each year to the communal council, which manages the distribution of finances for the community.
The course of study, including the plan of instruction and directions regarding the supervision of the schools as given by the board, is minutely detailed and specifically stated. It includes a list of studies to be pursued, the manner and order of their presentation, and the number of hours per week to be devoted to each subject; an outline of arrangements for entrance, promotion, and leaving examinations, with provisions for exemption therefrom wherever such is deemed advisable; all necessary arrangements for vacations; and other matters considered essential in the maintenance and carrying on of a school.
The curriculum, including the teaching plan and guidelines for school supervision as provided by the board, is thoroughly detailed and clearly laid out. It includes a list of subjects to be studied, the method and sequence for teaching them, and the number of hours each week dedicated to each subject; an outline of the procedures for entrance, promotion, and exit exams, including options for exemptions when deemed appropriate; all necessary planning for vacations; and other important aspects needed for the functioning and operation of a school.
For each primary school, or for the several schools, using the same building, the board appoints a committee of inspection (Tilsynsutvalg). This committee consists of a member of the school board (chosen by the board), who is chairman of the committee, and three other members. These latter members are chosen in the city by the parents of children attending the school, and in the rural districts by such parents and other taxpayers. A priest appointed by church authority is added to committees serving town or city schools.
For each elementary school, or for the multiple schools sharing the same building, the board appoints an inspection committee (Tilsynsutvalg). This committee is made up of a member of the school board (selected by the board), who acts as the chairman, and three additional members. These extra members are chosen in the city by the parents of students attending the school, and in rural areas by those parents and other taxpayers. A priest appointed by church authority is included in committees for town or city schools.
This committee of inspection exercises constant oversight of the school, keeping the board informed with reference to all matters requiring attention by that body. By the consent of the communal council this committee may have an amount provided from the school funds for its use in carrying out its work. The[Pg 58] inspection is with special reference to the physical and moral well-being of those connected with the institution. Among the special objects of its endeavors may be enumerated the solving of all hygienic questions, regular attendance, good discipline, and proper moral conduct. The committee must also see to it that children of school age, not in attendance at the state primary schools, receive instruction in such quantity and of such quality as to meet all state requirements. In general it is an outstretched arm of the school board, feeling after the betterment of the common schools in every possible direction.
This inspection committee constantly oversees the school, keeping the board updated on any matters that need their attention. With the approval of the community council, this committee may use a portion of the school funds to carry out its work. The[Pg 58] inspection focuses specifically on the physical and moral well-being of everyone connected to the institution. Some of its main goals include addressing hygiene issues, ensuring regular attendance, maintaining good discipline, and promoting proper moral conduct. The committee also needs to ensure that children of school age who are not attending state primary schools receive enough quality education to meet all state requirements. Overall, it acts as an extension of the school board, striving to improve public schools in every possible way.
Another committee (called the school committee—Skoleraad) is appointed by the school board for each of the primary schools in the city. The duties of the two committees are in a way complementary. While the committee of inspection is occupied in matters external in large measure, the school committee exercises functions more pedagogical in nature, though it also has general watch care over the affairs of the school. If there be a superintendent of schools (Skoleinspektor), he is a member ex officio of the school committee, and its chairman. Under other conditions the school board designates which of the appointed members of the committee shall be its chairman. In towns where the number of teachers exceeds sixty, the school board may direct that the school committee shall consist of the superintendent and the principals of the several schools as ex officio members and any determined number of other teachers selected by the body of teachers. The elected members are to be male and female in proportion[Pg 59] to their respective numbers on the teaching staff, exclusive of those who are ex officio members of the committee. The sexes separate into special meetings for the purpose of election, each choosing its allotted number of representatives. Election is for two years, one-half retiring each year, the first time according to lot. Members whose terms expire are required to serve longer in case of re-election. This school committee holds regular meetings, according to its own appointment, at which the members are required to be present. Furthermore, the chairman may call additional meetings in cases of necessity, and he is required to call special meetings when requested by the school board to do so. A majority vote of the members is sufficient for the passage of any proposition. While the duties of this committee are not specifically outlined, it is intended that its work shall concern chiefly the internal workings of the schools. Its functions are mainly pedagogical in character as already stated and as evidenced in the following provisions in the law. "The school board shall permit the school committee to voice its opinions in every affair which concerns: (1) the general supervision of primary schools, (2) general provisions concerning regulations and discipline, and (3) text books and outlines of instruction." In addition the committee is required to express itself regarding any matter relating to the good of the school when asked by the board for advice.
Another committee (called the school committee—Skoleraad) is appointed by the school board for each primary school in the city. The duties of the two committees complement each other. While the inspection committee focuses mainly on external matters, the school committee handles more educational functions, though it also oversees the general affairs of the school. If there's a superintendent of schools (Skoleinspektor), they are a member ex officio of the school committee and its chairman. In other cases, the school board decides which appointed member will be the chairman. In towns where the number of teachers is over sixty, the school board may require the school committee to consist of the superintendent and the principals of the various schools as ex officio members, along with a set number of other teachers chosen by the teaching body. The elected members must include both men and women in proportion to their numbers on the teaching staff, not counting those who are ex officio members of the committee. The sexes hold separate meetings for elections, each selecting their allotted number of representatives. Elections are held for two years, with half of the members rotating out each year, the first time determined by lot. Members whose terms end must continue serving if re-elected. This school committee meets regularly, as scheduled, requiring all members to be present. Additionally, the chairman may call extra meetings when necessary, and must call special meetings if requested by the school board. A majority vote from the members is enough to pass any proposal. While the committee’s duties aren't specifically defined, its work mainly focuses on the internal operations of the schools. Its functions are primarily educational, as noted in the following legal provisions. "The school board shall allow the school committee to express its opinions on all matters concerning: (1) the general supervision of primary schools, (2) overall regulations and discipline, and (3) textbooks and instructional outlines." Furthermore, the committee must provide input on any issues related to the school’s well-being when asked for advice by the board.
The school board may also order that there be a teachers' commission (Laererraad) for each school or for the several schools using the same buildings, consisting[Pg 60] of the teachers in the school. The chairman of this committee is the superintendent of schools, a school principal, or other member, according to the determination of the board. The duties devolving upon this commission are in each case outlined by the board.
The school board can also require that there be a teachers' committee (Laererraad) for each school or for multiple schools sharing the same buildings, made up of the teachers at the school. The chairperson of this committee is the superintendent of schools, a school principal, or another member, as decided by the board. The responsibilities assigned to this committee are specified by the board in each instance.
The superintendent of schools (Skoleinspektor) has general direction of all the primary schools in the city system. His duties are similar to those of the superintendent in American towns and cities. He takes the lead in directing the policies of the schools and exercises large powers in making them efficient. He is provided with well-equipped offices, generally in one of the school buildings, where he and his clerks, supplied by the school board, do the greater portion of their work.
The school superintendent (Skoleinspektor) oversees all the primary schools in the city system. His responsibilities are similar to those of superintendents in American towns and cities. He leads the direction of school policies and has significant authority to ensure they run efficiently. He has a well-equipped office, usually located in one of the school buildings, where he and the clerks provided by the school board handle most of their work.
A principal or headmaster (Overlaerer) is generally placed in charge of each school. His duties are comparable to those performed by ward principals in the United States. While the superintendent is the superior officer and exercises general control and authority, the principal has immediate charge of the work of the school. He controls its activities in harmony with and under the direction of the superintendent, consulting the wishes of the higher official and respecting his opinions. The superintendent recognizes that for the one in immediate charge of a school to have his hands tied or his liberties too circumscribed means the hampering of the work; hence, he gives to the principals working under him wide latitude in carrying out their ideas. For example, if the principal is a believer in[Pg 61] coeducation or, on the other hand, a staunch advocate of segregation of the sexes for instructional purposes, he is usually privileged to carry his policy into execution in his school, even though the views of the superintendent are not wholly in accord therewith. Throughout their work they seek each other's counsel and advice, and cooperate successfully.
A principal or headmaster (Overlaerer) is typically responsible for each school. Their duties are similar to those of ward principals in the United States. While the superintendent is the higher authority and holds overall control, the principal is directly in charge of the school's operations. The principal manages activities in alignment with and under the guidance of the superintendent, considering the higher official's preferences and valuing their opinions. The superintendent understands that if the person in direct control of a school feels restricted or has limited freedom, it hampers the work; therefore, they grant principals significant freedom to implement their ideas. For instance, if the principal supports coeducation or, conversely, strongly favors separating the sexes for teaching purposes, they are generally allowed to implement their policy in their school, even if the superintendent doesn't fully agree. Throughout their work, they seek each other's advice and collaborate effectively.
The private citizen in Norway plays only an indirect part in school affairs, yet his interests are conserved in various ways. The local pastor, who is a member ex officio of the school board, generally guards the interests of the masses. His influence and vote may be regarded usually as a reflection of the popular mind. The chairman of the municipal council, who also is a member of the board by virtue of his position, is indirectly the choice of the people. The teacher or teachers chosen to occupy on the school board nearly always work in harmony with the public will. The committee of inspection has a majority of its members chosen directly by vote of the people immediately concerned. The press is free and educational movements are continually discussed in the leading papers. Further than this, educational affairs are common topics of conversation, being talked of on all occasions under various circumstances and conditions. It may be said to their credit that those discussing these subjects do so intelligently and critically. The masses are alive to the educational situation, are intensely interested in their schools, and are acquainted with the provisions of the law concerning them. The people being so democratic in tendency and so very frank in[Pg 62] the expression of their feelings and opinions, naturally reflect public sentiment; which because of being understood has more weight and is correspondingly a greater factor in legislative activities.
The average citizen in Norway plays only an indirect role in school matters, but their interests are preserved in various ways. The local pastor, who serves as a member ex officio of the school board, generally looks out for the community’s interests. His influence and vote are usually seen as a reflection of public opinion. The chairman of the municipal council, who is also on the board by virtue of his position, is indirectly elected by the people. The teachers selected to serve on the school board usually work in alignment with what the public wants. The inspection committee has a majority of its members elected directly by the local community. The press is free, and educational initiatives are consistently covered in the leading newspapers. Moreover, educational issues are common topics of conversation, discussed at various events and gatherings. It's worth noting that those engaging in these discussions do so in a thoughtful and critical manner. The public is aware of the educational landscape, is highly interested in their schools, and understands the legal framework surrounding them. With the people being quite democratic and open in expressing their thoughts and feelings, they naturally reflect public sentiment, which is better understood and thus carries more weight in legislative processes.
The primary schools receive their financial support from the state, county, and commune. The state provides for city schools one-third of straight salaries, which range between twelve hundred and fourteen hundred crowns for men, and between eight hundred and nine hundred crowns for women; two-thirds of additional salary paid because of long service to the limit of eight hundred crowns per year for men and five hundred crowns per year for women; and one-third of salaries paid for positions requiring only part time, for teaching by the hour, and for teaching in continuation schools. In certain cases where the treasuries are depleted the state treasury furnishes as high as forty-five per cent of teachers' salaries within the fixed limits mentioned above. In the rural communes the grant received from the state amounts to forty-five per cent of the teachers' salaries, and where finances are low this amount may be increased to sixty per cent. The amount of this state grant is figured on the basis of salaries that do not exceed twenty-four crowns per week in the second or higher division, and nineteen crowns in the first or infant division of the primary school, except in the county of Finnmarken where the bases may be respectively twenty-eight crowns and twenty-two crowns per week.
The primary schools get their funding from the state, county, and local community. The state covers one-third of the salaries for city schools, which range from 1,200 to 1,400 crowns for men and from 800 to 900 crowns for women. Additionally, two-thirds of any extra salary for long service is covered, up to a limit of 800 crowns per year for men and 500 crowns per year for women. The state also contributes one-third of salaries for part-time positions, hourly teaching, and teaching in adult education programs. In some cases where funds are low, the state treasury can cover up to 45% of teachers' salaries within the specified limits. In rural areas, the state grant accounts for 45% of teachers' salaries, and if finances are tight, this can be increased to 60%. The state grant is calculated based on salaries that do not exceed 24 crowns per week in the second or higher division and 19 crowns in the first or infant division of primary school, except in the county of Finnmarken, where the limits can be 28 crowns and 22 crowns per week, respectively.
In each county (Amt) the county council provides funds for the following purposes: raising teachers'[Pg 63] salaries in case of long service, erecting school buildings, supplying teachers' homes, paying substitute teachers, purchasing apparatus, relieving communes and municipalities where school expenses are disproportionately high, and maintaining continuation and artisan schools. Whatever is required to defray the expenses of the primary schools, in addition to state and county grants, tuition, receipts from school lands or holdings, etc., is furnished by the commune or municipality through its council.
In each county (Amt), the county council allocates funds for various purposes: increasing teachers' salaries for long service, building school facilities, providing housing for teachers, compensating substitute teachers, buying educational equipment, assisting communities where school costs are excessively high, and running adult education and vocational schools. Any additional funding needed to cover primary school expenses, beyond state and county grants, tuition, revenues from school properties, etc., is supplied by the community or municipality through its council.
The secondary schools are either state or communal. The state schools are provided with grounds, buildings, and equipment by the communes in which they are located; the remaining expenses are met by state grants, tuition fees, etc. The expense of maintaining communal schools falls largely upon the communes. The state furnishes one-third of the salaries in both classes of schools, and all additional amounts paid to teachers because of long service. While most of the secondary schools charge regular tuition fees, all of them have funds which supply free scholarships to a number of pupils each year. In some communes they have been able already to provide free middle schools, and it appears at least possible that all state and communal schools may sometime be free. The aim in financing the school system is to equalize the burden of expense as far as possible, and to recognize, at the same time, the efforts of those directly concerned. In order to obtain the best results, authority has been strongly centralized; school boards, communal and county councils, and state officials exercise large discretionary powers.
The secondary schools are either public or community-run. The public schools receive their grounds, buildings, and equipment from the local communities; the rest of the expenses are covered by state grants, tuition fees, and so on. The cost of running community schools mainly falls on the local governments. The state covers one-third of the salaries in both types of schools, along with any extra amounts paid to teachers for their long service. While most secondary schools charge regular tuition fees, all of them have funds that provide free scholarships to a number of students each year. In some communities, they have already been able to offer free middle schools, and it seems at least possible that eventually all public and community-run schools could be free. The goal in funding the school system is to share the financial burden as evenly as possible while also acknowledging the efforts of those directly involved. To achieve the best outcomes, authority has been heavily centralized; school boards, local and county councils, and state officials have significant discretionary powers.
VI. BUILDINGS AND GROUNDS
The school buildings of Norway are justly reputed to be the most magnificent, best located, and finest edifices of the country. They are built of substantial materials according to attractive architectural designs, and are provided with liberal equipment. The larger buildings are usually constructed of stone, brick and stone, or brick and cement; while the smaller ones are built of lumber and stone. In the erection of buildings, great care is exercised to make them spacious and permanent. All materials used are selected because of their durability and suitability to purpose. In order to guarantee the best hygienic conditions, the law provides that buildings must meet the approval of experts in hygiene before they can be used for school purposes. This means that the services of these experts must be secured in getting out designs for school buildings, whether in the erection of new or the remodeling of old ones.
The school buildings in Norway are widely recognized as the most impressive, well-located, and finest structures in the country. They are constructed from strong materials with appealing architectural designs, and come with generous amenities. The larger buildings are typically made of stone, brick, and stone, or brick and cement, while the smaller ones use wood and stone. When constructing these buildings, great attention is paid to ensuring they are spacious and durable. All materials are chosen for their durability and suitability for the purpose. To ensure the best hygiene standards, the law requires that buildings receive approval from hygiene experts before they can be used as schools. This means that the expertise of these professionals must be sought when creating designs for school buildings, whether for new constructions or renovations of existing ones.
The school buildings are heated by furnaces or stoves. The newer ones are modern in every respect and, of course, have excellent heating systems. Those which have done service for several decades are usually heated by stoves.
The school buildings are heated by furnaces or stoves. The newer ones are modern in every way and, of course, have great heating systems. The ones that have been around for several decades are typically heated by stoves.
The buildings are divided into rooms in such a manner that the daylight nearly always enters from the left or the rear of the pupils when they are seated at their desks. This rule is disregarded only in rare cases. During the short days of winter it is essential to provide artificial light. In cities and large towns they use[Pg 65] electricity for lighting the school buildings; in the country or in small towns, where the municipalities do not maintain any central lighting plant, various devices are installed. Sometimes gasoline is used and again ordinary oil lamps are common. An abundance of light of the best procurable quality is generally provided.
The buildings are arranged into rooms so that daylight almost always comes from the left or the back of the students when they're sitting at their desks. This guideline is only ignored in rare situations. During the short winter days, it's necessary to use artificial light. In cities and large towns, they use[Pg 65] electricity to light the school buildings; in rural areas or small towns, where local governments don't have a central lighting facility, various alternatives are used. Sometimes gasoline is utilized, and regular oil lamps are also common. They typically ensure there is plenty of high-quality light available.
Besides admitting light the outside windows are of use in providing ventilation for the school rooms. They are opened wide during intermissions between classes, so that when the children come in from their exercise on the play grounds they enter an atmosphere nearly as pure and fresh as that out of doors. In addition, many schoolhouses, especially those built recently, have regular ventilating devices.
Besides letting in light, the outside windows also help with ventilation for the classrooms. They are opened wide during breaks between classes, so when the kids come in from playing outside, they walk into an atmosphere that’s almost as pure and fresh as the outdoors. Additionally, many school buildings, especially newer ones, have proper ventilation systems.
The class room furniture in Norway, like that used in many other European schools, is about as primitive in design and lacking in attractiveness as anything found in the whole country. Its evolution surely has been greatly retarded. In each room there is a small platform high enough to enable the instructor to see all his pupils with ease. On this platform is a desk and a high chair in which the teacher sits most of the time while giving instruction.
The classroom furniture in Norway, similar to what’s found in many other European schools, is pretty basic in design and lacks appeal, just like everything else in the country. Its development has definitely been slow. In each room, there’s a small platform high enough for the teacher to see all the students easily. On this platform, there’s a desk and a tall chair where the teacher sits most of the time while teaching.
The pupils' seats and desks are made of heavy lumber and attached to a common base. This makes them clumsy, and they appear very queer to one accustomed to the better designs now in use in some countries. Those of recent make are for but one pupil, though older ones, some of which are still in use, accommodate three or four. In construction the seat[Pg 66] is generally a solid flat bench with a low back. The desk has a slightly sloping top, a small inconvenient shelf for books, and a receptacle for pencils, pens, rulers, and other articles used by school children. The Norwegians deserve commendation for the care exercised in the arrangement of seats and desks. The distance and proportion between them are regulated according to scientific principles looking to the physical welfare of the occupants. The bodily posture of children in school determines in large measure what it will be out of school. Far too little attention has been given the physical side of education, and one of the important problems in connection therewith is the proper construction of schoolroom furniture.
The students' seats and desks are made of heavy wood and fixed to a shared base. This makes them awkward, and they look very strange to anyone used to the better designs currently in use in some countries. The newer ones are designed for just one student, while older models, some of which are still in use, can fit three or four. Typically, the seat[Pg 66] is a solid flat bench with a low backrest. The desk has a slightly sloped top, a small awkward shelf for books, and a space for pencils, pens, rulers, and other items used by students. The Norwegians deserve praise for the attention given to the arrangement of seats and desks. The distance and layout between them are set according to scientific principles aimed at the physical well-being of the users. The sitting posture of children in school significantly influences how they sit outside school. There has been far too little focus on the physical aspect of education, and one of the key issues related to this is the proper design of classroom furniture.
In the smaller buildings, classrooms have commodious cupboards for apparatus (maps, charts, globes, plates, etc.), and various things with which the children work (sewing materials, exercise books, etc.). While they have a liberal supply of excellent illustrative material and teaching apparatus and the best of facilities for storing it, mechanical appliances for its display and devices for its convenient use are woefully lacking. Maps and charts are held in the hand or hung on a nail or other fixture in the room; while globes and the like are placed on chairs or improvised stands. In general the apparatus is awkward to manipulate and as a result much of its value is lost.
In the smaller buildings, classrooms have spacious cupboards for supplies (maps, charts, globes, plates, etc.) and various materials that the students use (sewing supplies, notebooks, etc.). Although they have a generous amount of excellent teaching materials and storage facilities, they are seriously lacking in mechanical devices for displaying and using these resources effectively. Maps and charts are held in hand or hung on a nail or other fixtures in the room, while globes and similar items are placed on chairs or makeshift stands. Overall, the supplies are cumbersome to handle, and as a result, much of their potential value is lost.
Blackboards of proper size are very rare in the schools of Norway. As a rule the board is about three by five feet in size and fastened to a clumsy easel which elevates it so high that it is out of reach of the pupils.[Pg 67] To enable the children to use such a board a small platform is provided. The child mounts the platform by means of a few steps and there stands and does his blackboard work. In only one instance did the writer during his visits to the schools find what appeared to him to be an adequate amount of blackboard space. This exceptional condition was in one of the primary schools where special equipment was installed for the instruction of children below normal intelligence. The ample provision of blackboard here is proof of a recognition of its value, and the situation may also be regarded as an indictment against the prevalent neglect in this line.
Blackboards of the right size are very uncommon in schools across Norway. Typically, the board measures about three by five feet and is mounted on a bulky easel that raises it so high that students can't reach it.[Pg 67] To help children use the board, a small platform is provided. The child climbs up a few steps onto the platform and stands there to do their blackboard work. During the author's visits to the schools, he only found one instance where there seemed to be a sufficient amount of blackboard space. This exceptional case was in a primary school with specialized equipment for teaching children with below-average intelligence. The ample blackboard space here shows a recognition of its importance, and the situation also highlights the broader issue of neglect in this area.
School room decorations are not as prominent as might be expected. Despite the facts that the whole of Norway is picturesque, that her artists are quite numerous, and that the masses of her people are more than ordinarily appreciative of the finer phases of life, very few paintings or pieces of sculpture adorn her schools. True, exceptions as to this rule of scant provision of the artistic may be found; but, as in all countries, they quite generally fail to appreciate the educative values of art.
Schoolroom decorations aren't as common as one might think. Even though Norway is beautiful, has many artists, and its people generally appreciate the finer things in life, very few paintings or sculptures can be found in schools. There are some exceptions to this lack of artistic presence, but, like in many countries, they often overlook the educational benefits of art.
While, traditionally at least, the study and recitation rooms have been considered of prime and greatest importance in school buildings, there are others, accessory to them, which in their effects are productive of quite as good results. Among them may be mentioned: offices, teachers' rooms, libraries, laboratories, and other rooms for special purposes. Some of these[Pg 68] are not provided in all schools, but commonly all of them are found in the city school buildings.
While traditionally the study and recitation rooms have been viewed as the most important spaces in schools, there are other areas that can be just as beneficial. These include offices, teachers' lounges, libraries, laboratories, and various specialized rooms. Not all schools have these[Pg 68], but they are typically found in city school buildings.
The offices for rectors, inspectors, head masters, etc., are admirably arranged and handsomely appointed. They are provided with desks, cabinets, chairs, settees, tables, and other furnishings which add to convenience and comfort. The rooms for teachers are equipped and furnished in a way just as suitable to their purpose. In these they spend their vacant periods in study, reading, or in leisure, according to their choice. Here, too, officers and teachers are served with luncheons in the middle of forenoon and afternoon sessions.
The offices for rectors, inspectors, headmasters, etc., are well-organized and nicely decorated. They have desks, cabinets, chairs, sofas, tables, and other furniture that enhance convenience and comfort. The rooms for teachers are set up and furnished equally well for their needs. In these rooms, they spend their free time studying, reading, or relaxing, depending on their preference. Here, officers and teachers also receive lunch during the morning and afternoon sessions.
There are libraries in nearly all school buildings. While many of them are small some are of large consequence. The one in the Christiania Cathedral School numbers thirty thousand volumes. This is one of the oldest and perhaps the largest library in any school of the country, and it is regarded with considerable justifiable pride.
There are libraries in almost every school building. While many of them are small, some are quite significant. The one in the Christiania Cathedral School has thirty thousand volumes. This is one of the oldest and possibly the largest library in any school in the country, and it is seen with a great deal of rightful pride.
The laboratories are furnished in harmony with their traditional plan of instruction. Instead of having a supply of apparatus so that most or all of the pupils may be occupied simultaneously in laboratory experimentation, they have but one set of instruments. However, they do furnish liberal quantities of materials for laboratory experimentation. The teacher is the chief operator, one or two pupils assist in the work, and the other members of the class are onlookers.
The laboratories are set up to align with their traditional method of teaching. Instead of providing enough equipment for every student to work on experiments at the same time, they only have one set of tools. However, they do provide plenty of materials for lab experiments. The teacher acts as the main operator, one or two students help with the work, while the rest of the class observes.
Where domestic arts are taught, rooms are fitted up especially for the purpose. Stoves, cooking utensils,[Pg 69] and many other necessary articles are at hand ready for use. The efficiency of the work is in no wise hindered by lack of supplies. In many instances teachers go themselves to the markets and purchase provisions needed for the day. An earnest effort is made to combine theory and practice in proportions suitable to obtaining the best possible results.
Where domestic arts are taught, special rooms are set up for this purpose. Stoves, cooking utensils,[Pg 69] and many other necessary items are readily available for use. The effectiveness of the work is not at all affected by a lack of supplies. In many cases, teachers personally go to the markets and buy the ingredients needed for the day. A strong effort is made to balance theory and practice in ways that lead to the best possible results.
Some of the larger buildings have special rooms for the storing of apparatus and illustrative materials (Anskuelsesmidler). Racks, cupboards, cabinets, drawers, cases, and the like provide convenient means for preserving these supplies and of rendering them easily accessible. Gymnastic halls and lunch rooms will be discussed in another section.
Some of the larger buildings have special rooms for storing equipment and teaching materials (Anskuelsesmidler). Racks, cupboards, cabinets, drawers, cases, and similar items offer practical ways to keep these supplies safe and make them easily accessible. Gymnastics halls and lunchrooms will be discussed in another section.
The playgrounds are generally small, but some of the schools have, in addition to the grounds immediately surrounding the buildings, athletic parks of considerable proportions. The grounds about the school buildings are arranged with a view of securing from them maximum returns. They are enclosed by high board or wire fence, or by stone or brick and cement walls. A heavy coating of gravel is usually placed on the ground in order to avoid the growth of vegetation or an accumulation of dust. "Keep off the grass" signs are not in evidence, for rarely do they attempt to have grassy lawns.
The playgrounds are usually small, but some schools have large athletic fields in addition to the areas directly around the buildings. The grounds around the school buildings are designed to get the most use out of them. They are surrounded by tall wooden or wire fences, or by stone or brick walls. A thick layer of gravel is generally spread across the ground to prevent plants from growing or dust from building up. "Keep off the grass" signs are not needed, as they hardly ever try to have grassy lawns.
They recognize the need and value of physical exercise in the open, and provide means for it in connection with every school. It is specifically required that all pupils go on to the playgrounds during the intermissions (fri Krarterer) which come between all lessons.[Pg 70] While the children are at play one or more of the teachers are detailed to supervise the grounds, while others are to patrol the hallways. Large roofs are put up under which the children play when the weather is not favorable to being in the open. On rare occasions when the weather is bitter, pupils may be permitted to remain indoors. Children whose health is extremely delicate are dealt with in leniency, and some of them are permitted to remain inside regularly.
They recognize the importance and benefits of outdoor physical exercise and provide opportunities for it at every school. It’s specifically required that all students go to the playgrounds during the breaks (fri Krarterer) that happen between each lesson.[Pg 70] While the kids are playing, one or more teachers are assigned to supervise the area, and others are tasked with patrolling the hallways. Large roofs are constructed where the kids can play when the weather isn’t ideal for being outside. On rare occasions when the weather is extremely cold, students may be allowed to stay indoors. Children with particularly fragile health receive special consideration, and some of them are allowed to stay inside regularly.
Near to the school buildings, generally on a corner of the grounds, homes are provided for the head master or principal and the janitor (Vagtmester). Sometimes the janitor and his family live in an apartment in the school building. Generally, however, a double house is erected, one part for the principal and the other for the janitor. These homes are furnished rent free to these men.
Near the school buildings, usually at a corner of the grounds, homes are provided for the principal and the janitor (Vagtmester). Sometimes the janitor and his family live in an apartment in the school building. However, usually, a duplex is built, with one side for the principal and the other for the janitor. These homes are offered rent-free to these individuals.
Teachers in rural districts, as a rule, are supplied with a house and sufficient ground for garden and the pasturage of two or three cows. These provisions materially reduce living expenses, and, in a way, recompense for the low salaries received. In one rural school the writer found three hundred and fifty pupils taught in two divisions—forenoon and afternoon sessions—by six teachers. The principal had been in charge of the school forty-three years. One portion of the school building provided a residence for him and his family. They had a small garden; a fruit orchard; a few acres of land for pasturage and hay; and a barn and sheds for cow, pig, and chickens. There are many similar situations throughout the country. This particular[Pg 71] one lay just outside a small city, and this fact accounts in part for the large number of pupils in attendance.
Teachers in rural districts typically receive a house and enough land for a garden and to keep two or three cows. These provisions significantly lower living costs and somewhat make up for the low salaries they earn. In one rural school, the writer observed three hundred and fifty students divided into morning and afternoon sessions, taught by six teachers. The principal had managed the school for forty-three years. Part of the school building served as a home for him and his family. They had a small garden, a fruit orchard, a few acres for grazing and hay, as well as a barn and sheds for a cow, pig, and chickens. Many similar situations exist across the country. This specific[Pg 71] school was located just outside a small city, which partly explains the large number of students enrolled.
As a rule the homes for rural school teachers compare very favorably with the better class of homes in the surrounding neighborhood. They have sufficient room, are comfortable, and generally satisfy the occupants. The majority of rural teachers have such homes provided, though only a few city teachers enjoy this favor. In 1905, two thousand, eight hundred and twenty-six rural teachers had homes furnished them free of cost.
As a general rule, homes for rural school teachers are quite comparable to the better homes in the nearby area. They offer enough space, are cozy, and typically meet the needs of the residents. Most rural teachers have these homes provided for them, whereas only a small number of city teachers receive this benefit. In 1905, two thousand eight hundred twenty-six rural teachers were given furnished homes at no cost.
VII. GENERAL FEATURES OF INNER ORGANIZATION
Most of the teachers in the rural primary schools are men, while the majority of them in the city are women. During the year 1907 there were four thousand, one hundred and twenty-three male and one thousand, four hundred and seven female teachers occupying regular positions in the rural schools, and in the city their numbers were respectively eight hundred and twenty-eight and one thousand, six hundred and six. Although the law makes no requirements as to sex, except that in city schools there must be at least one master and one governess, there are certain forces operative which almost equal edicts of law. Traditionally, teachers in the rural schools are men and, as previously stated, homes are provided for them and their families. Appointments to teaching positions are permanent. Teachers remain in their places until death removes[Pg 72] them or until they choose to retire on pension, which is, all too often, long after they pass the time of their efficiency. It is difficult to break with the old customs and hence the entrance of women teachers into the rural school positions has been slow. In the cities the conditions are different. There only a small percentage of the teachers have homes furnished them, the number of teaching positions without supervising responsibility is large, and the salaries paid to women are lower than those paid to men. As a consequence the female teachers have found easy entrance into the city schools, and at present they outnumber the men two to one. Women have been teaching since 1869, and the people are convinced that their ability as teachers is equal to that of the sterner sex.
Most teachers in rural primary schools are men, while most in the city are women. In 1907, there were four thousand, one hundred and twenty-three male teachers and one thousand, four hundred and seven female teachers in regular positions at rural schools. In the city, the numbers were eight hundred and twenty-eight male teachers and one thousand, six hundred and six female teachers. Although the law doesn’t require a specific gender, except that city schools must have at least one male and one female teacher, there are certain influences that enforce this nearly as strongly as law. Traditionally, rural school teachers are men, and, as mentioned before, homes are provided for them and their families. Teaching positions are permanent. Teachers stay in their roles until they die or choose to retire with a pension, which often happens well after their effectiveness has declined. Changing these old customs has been challenging, so the entry of women into rural teaching positions has been slow. In cities, the situation is different. Only a small percentage of teachers have provided housing, many teaching positions don’t have supervisory responsibilities, and women are typically paid less than men. As a result, female teachers have found it easier to enter city schools, and now they outnumber male teachers two to one. Women have been teaching since 1869, and people believe their teaching abilities are just as good as those of men.
In the secondary schools, also, the majority of the instructors are men. In the gymnasia practically all of them are men, but in the middle schools there are many women teachers. Even though the Norwegians recognize woman's ingenuity and efficiency in teaching small children, they have not yet become converted to the idea that she is man's equal in the more advanced educational fields. It seems probable that tradition is the chief hindrance to the entrance of women into teaching positions in the gymnasia.
In secondary schools, most of the teachers are men. In gyms, almost all of them are men, but there are many female teachers in middle schools. Even though Norwegians acknowledge women's creativity and effectiveness in teaching young kids, they haven't fully accepted the idea that women are equal to men in higher education fields. It seems likely that tradition is the main barrier keeping women from teaching positions in gyms.
In their plan of instruction there is much to commend and some things to criticise. The teachers do a large amount of teaching, but they also provide opportunity for the children to do a great deal on their own initiative, so that they too may know the joy of discovery and feel the triumph of mastery. The Norwegian[Pg 73] pedagogue uses the recitation period, nearly always fifty minutes, in an endeavor to impart information, both directly and indirectly; directly by straightforward giving, and indirectly through cooperative mental activities. While they feel the importance of direct instruction, they see, also, the advantage in shifting a part of the responsibility to the pupils. They recognize the fact that the child has ability, and that by himself he is capable of finding and recognizing problems, and of working them out to satisfying conclusions. They appreciate that even a small child is able to carry out many educative activities with a minimum of direction from the teacher, and that the development which comes from this self-direction and initiative is one of the most valuable ends of education. The intent is that the class period shall be devoted to exercises which will furnish information and, at the same time, make the children independent and able to direct themselves.
In their teaching plan, there’s a lot to praise and some things to critique. The teachers do a significant amount of teaching, but they also create opportunities for the kids to explore on their own, so they can experience the joy of discovery and feel the accomplishment of mastering new skills. The Norwegian[Pg 73] educators use the recitation period, usually fifty minutes, to share information both directly and indirectly; directly by straightforward teaching and indirectly through collaborative mental activities. While they recognize the importance of direct teaching, they also see the benefits of shifting some responsibility to the students. They understand that children have the ability to identify and solve problems on their own, reaching satisfying conclusions. They realize that even young children can engage in many learning activities with minimal guidance from the teacher, and that the growth that comes from this self-direction and initiative is one of the most valuable goals of education. The aim is for the class period to focus on activities that provide information while also fostering independence and self-direction in the students.
Though the ideals and aims are excellent, the means for attaining them are not the best. There is a certain inherited aloofness on the part of the instructor which robs both teacher and pupils of some of the values which come from closer association. During the recitation hour the teacher nearly always occupies the high chair on the elevated platform, except while using the blackboard or doing other demonstrational work. My observations convince me that the teachers, especially the men, do not get down and work among and with the children as much as seems essential to the accomplishment of the greatest good.
Though the ideals and goals are great, the ways of achieving them aren’t the best. The instructor has a certain inherited distance that takes away some of the benefits of closer interaction for both teacher and students. During class discussions, the teacher almost always sits in the high chair on the raised platform, except when using the blackboard or doing other demonstration work. My observations show me that the teachers, particularly the men, don’t engage and work with the kids as much as seems necessary for achieving the best results.
Now the discipline and character of recitations also deserve attention. When a pupil is called upon to recite, he is expected to pass to the aisle and there stand erect until the recitation is completed. Only in rare cases are children allowed to sit while reciting. I have seen children only eleven or twelve years of age called to the front of the room to analyze and develop a problem. The smallest children are required to give only short answers to questions, but responses rapidly increase in length, as age advances, until they amount to minute and extended discussions of topics. Recitations lasting ten to fifteen minutes are not uncommon, and the children become quite expert in the relation of facts and in the development of problems presented. This method of procedure is perhaps all right for a certain class of children, but timid boys and girls are sometimes embarrassed to the extent that they are unable to do credit to themselves, their teachers, or the lessons. On one occasion I saw a boy who was so frightened in an attempt to stand and recite, being required at the same time to look into the face of a complaining teacher, that he was unable to say anything whatever. The teacher, a man of advanced age, finally awoke to the situation, and placing his hand on the boy's head, talked to him about the lesson until he calmed the lad's fears and obtained a very satisfactory response from him.
Now the discipline and character of recitations also deserve attention. When a student is called to recite, they are expected to walk to the aisle and stand straight until they finish. Only in rare cases are students allowed to sit while reciting. I have seen kids as young as eleven or twelve called to the front of the room to analyze and develop a problem. The youngest students only need to give short answers to questions, but the length of responses increases with age, leading to detailed discussions on topics. Recitations lasting ten to fifteen minutes are quite common, and students become quite skilled in relating facts and tackling presented problems. This approach might work well for some students, but shy boys and girls can become so embarrassed that they struggle to perform well or reflect their true abilities, their teachers, or the lessons. Once, I saw a boy who was so scared while trying to stand and recite, especially because he had to look at a frustrated teacher, that he couldn't say anything at all. The teacher, an older man, finally noticed the situation, placed his hand on the boy's head, and spoke to him about the lesson until he calmed the boy's nerves and got a very satisfactory response from him.
In addition to classroom activities connected with mental growth, considerable work is done looking to physical development. Gymnastic exercise is required of all children in primary and secondary schools, excepting[Pg 75] those in first and second grades and a few who are physically disqualified for it. To provide for this work, the city schools furnish large halls with excellent equipment, and special teachers to give instruction. A Swedish system of gymnastics is in vogue throughout the country. There seems to be no criticism against the system, and the benefits testify emphatically to its efficiency. The apparatus is simple and inexpensive, but the variety of movements and the numberless combinations of them seem to answer every demand.
In addition to classroom activities aimed at mental growth, a significant effort is devoted to physical development. Gymnastics are mandatory for all children in primary and secondary schools, except for those in first and second grades and a few who are physically unable to participate. To support this effort, the city schools provide large halls with excellent equipment and special teachers for instruction. A Swedish gymnastics system is popular across the country. There appears to be no criticism of the system, and the benefits clearly demonstrate its effectiveness. The equipment is simple and affordable, but the variety of movements and countless combinations seem to meet every need.
Certain conditions and customs prevailing in Norway make it necessary to serve lunches at the school buildings. The morning sessions are long and the dinner hour is far later than noon—generally two or three o'clock. Furthermore, many children of poor parentage come to school underfed. Opportunity to obtain a light lunch of nourishing food and a warm drink at about 10:30 or 11 o'clock is an appreciated necessity. Hence most buildings have lunch rooms arranged and equipped according to local demands. Here, in the secondary schools, the family of the janitor furnishes rolls, buns, cakes, cocoa, coffee, milk, etc., at a reasonable rate. As stated before, the teachers have lunches served in their own rooms. Some cities provide children in the primary schools with one meal of wholesome food each day of school during the winter months—generally from the middle of October until the first of May. This is free to the needy children, and others obtain it at first cost.
Certain conditions and customs in Norway make it necessary to serve lunches in school buildings. The morning sessions are long, and the lunch hour is much later than noon—usually around two or three o'clock. Additionally, many children from low-income families arrive at school underfed. The chance to grab a light lunch with nourishing food and a warm drink around 10:30 or 11 o'clock is a much-appreciated necessity. As a result, most schools have lunchrooms set up and equipped according to local needs. In secondary schools, the janitor's family provides rolls, buns, cakes, cocoa, coffee, milk, and more at reasonable prices. As mentioned earlier, teachers have lunches served in their own rooms. Some cities offer primary school children one meal of healthy food each day during the winter months—typically from mid-October to the start of May. This meal is free for children in need, while others pay a small fee.
In Christiania they have a central kitchen from which the city primary schools receive supplies. This[Pg 76] kitchen has a capacity for steam cooking, ten thousand liters at a time. Only the best food is purchased. This is carefully prepared and delivered every day in tightly sealed cans to the several schools where it is served hot. The maintenance of this kitchen is in answer to recommendations made by a committee, appointed by the school board, after visiting various similar European institutions and studying carefully into their operations. In equipment, management, and good results it is not surpassed in any city in Europe or America. In some of the schools, hundreds of free meals are dispensed every day throughout the long winter. During the year 1908-1909, from October 19, 1908, to April 30, 1909, (one hundred and thirty-two days), the Christiania central kitchen furnished 616,821 free meals and 77,733 meals which were paid for by children in the schools. This work stands as a testimonial to the beneficence of the people whose circumstances enable them to maintain it.
In Christiania, there's a central kitchen that provides supplies for the city's primary schools. This[Pg 76] kitchen can steam-cook up to ten thousand liters at a time. Only the best food is bought. It’s carefully prepared and delivered daily in tightly sealed cans to the schools where it’s served hot. The kitchen is maintained based on recommendations from a committee appointed by the school board, which visited similar European institutions and studied their operations closely. In terms of equipment, management, and results, it’s unmatched in any city in Europe or America. In some schools, hundreds of free meals are served every day throughout the long winter. During the 1908-1909 school year, from October 19, 1908, to April 30, 1909 (one hundred and thirty-two days), the Christiania central kitchen provided 616,821 free meals and 77,733 meals paid for by the children in the schools. This effort highlights the generosity of the people who can support it.
The discipline of the school borders on the military order. The pupils form in line and march in passing to and from classrooms and playgrounds. While the work of instruction proceeds strict discipline is maintained. Before entering a classroom where a recitation is in progress, one invariably knocks at the door, whoever he is and whatever his errand, and by the time he enters teacher and pupils are on their feet. Turning to the one entering, they bow and continue to face him until he is seated, which is a signal to them to sit. Should the visitor withdraw before the class is dismissed,[Pg 77] the pupils again rise to their feet and bow him out; but, if he remains until they are dismissed, they bow to him before taking their departure. Every activity indoors and out of doors is closely supervised, and the control exercised over the pupils is praiseworthy.
The discipline at the school is almost military in nature. The students line up and march when going to and from classrooms and playgrounds. While lessons are in session, strict discipline is enforced. Before entering a classroom where a lesson is happening, everyone always knocks on the door, no matter who they are or why they’re there, and by the time they walk in, both the teacher and students are standing. They turn to the person entering, bow, and continue facing them until they sit down, which signals to everyone else that it’s time to sit. If the visitor leaves before the class is dismissed,[Pg 77] the students stand up again and bow as they exit; however, if they stay until the end of the class, the students bow to them before leaving. Every activity, both indoors and outdoors, is closely monitored, and the control over the students is commendable.
Attendance at school is regular in all grades. When children are absent for any reason the case is inquired into without delay, and, unless satisfactory excuse or explanation is forthcoming, the truant officers are on hand to enforce regulations. Failure to comply with the laws regarding absence from school, subjects parents or guardians of children to a fine of from one to twenty-five crowns.[18] Very rarely is an enforcement of these laws necessary, for the people are generally law-abiding and peace-loving. Being eager for development, they gladly comply with educational provisions without any compulsion, and regularity in attendance is the universal practice. Sickness is perhaps the most common excuse given for absence and, since excellent health is characteristic of the people, this is infrequent.
Attendance at school is regular in all grades. When children are absent for any reason the case is inquired into without delay, and, unless satisfactory excuse or explanation is forthcoming, the truant officers are on hand to enforce regulations. Failure to comply with the laws regarding absence from school, subjects parents or guardians of children to a fine of from one to twenty-five crowns.[18] Very rarely is an enforcement of these laws necessary, for the people are generally law-abiding and peace-loving. Being eager for development, they gladly comply with educational provisions without any compulsion, and regularity in attendance is the universal practice. Sickness is perhaps the most common excuse given for absence and, since excellent health is characteristic of the people, this is infrequent.
Pupils are nearly always healthy, vigorous, and robust. One of the chief points calling attention to this is the rarity of cases where glasses are worn. In visiting schools I noticed that spectacled children were very few. I was at first inclined to criticise what I interpreted to be neglect of the eyes, but soon found that eyesight, as well as the general health of the children, was being carefully guarded. Every school has its[Pg 78] physician whose duty it is to regulate sanitation and to remedy physical defects of children. I ascertained that in some schools special examinations had been conducted for the testing of eyesight, and results showed that very few of the pupils were under the necessity of wearing glasses. Among the causes contributing to this favorable situation may be mentioned a healthful climate, regular drill in gymnastics, proper lighting of school rooms, good ventilation, physical exercise in the open between successive classes, and, in general, the maintenance of a high state of physical vigor. The Norse take justifiable pride in their physical development, and they pay considerable attention to this phase of education. Consequently the children are able to attack the strenuous activities of school life with vim, and mastery of the course of study is not a hardship.
Pupils are usually healthy, energetic, and strong. One of the main reasons for this is the rarity of cases where glasses are worn. During my visits to schools, I noticed that there were very few children wearing glasses. At first, I was inclined to criticize what I thought was neglect of eye care, but I soon discovered that both eyesight and the overall health of the children were being carefully monitored. Every school has its[Pg 78] physician whose job it is to manage sanitation and correct any physical issues in children. I found out that in some schools special eyesight examinations had been conducted, and the results showed that very few pupils needed to wear glasses. Contributing factors to this positive situation include a healthy climate, regular gymnastics drills, proper lighting in classrooms, good ventilation, physical exercise outdoors between classes, and generally maintaining a high level of physical fitness. The Norse take understandable pride in their physical development and put significant emphasis on this aspect of education. As a result, children can tackle the demanding activities of school life with enthusiasm, and mastering the curriculum isn't a struggle.
Chapter II
TEACHERS
I. QUALIFICATIONS AND CERTIFICATION
Teaching is a profession in Norway. Those following it have chosen it as their life work. The people thus engaged deserve and receive the recognition, confidence, and esteem of the masses, and they maintain the dignity of their calling. As a class they rank high educationally, morally, and professionally. With the advance in social ideals it has been necessary to raise the standards of preparation for teaching, and, as the years pass, further changes will be required. For a long time, professional training has been demanded of every appointee to a teaching position, and indications point to a rapid development of the quality of this training until every resource is operative.
Teaching is a profession in Norway. Those who pursue it have chosen it as their life’s work. The people in this field deserve and receive recognition, trust, and respect from the public, and they uphold the dignity of their profession. As a group, they rank highly in terms of education, ethics, and professionalism. With the progress of social ideals, it's become necessary to elevate the standards for teacher preparation, and more changes will be needed as time goes on. For a long time, professional training has been a requirement for anyone appointed to a teaching position, and signs indicate that the quality of this training is rapidly improving as all resources become utilized.
The law requires that to be eligible for appointment to a regular teaching position in the secondary schools (middle school and gymnasium), one must have had a course in the university and special training provided in the pedagogical seminary. This means that the candidate has completed: (1) the twelve years of work in the primary and secondary schools, where a wide[Pg 80] range of instruction and general culture are provided; (2) a course in the university (four to seven years in length), devoted to exhaustive research in the particular branches of study which are subsequently to be taught; and (3) the course of training given in the pedagogical seminary.
The law states that to be eligible for a regular teaching position in secondary schools (middle school and high school), you must have completed a university course and special training at a pedagogical seminary. This means the candidate has finished: (1) twelve years of education in primary and secondary schools, where a broad range of subjects and general knowledge are provided; (2) a university course lasting four to seven years, focused on in-depth study in the specific subjects they will teach; and (3) the training course offered at the pedagogical seminary.
It is the aim and function of this seminary to provide for the university graduates who are to become teachers the most practical and complete professional training possible within the limits of time (six months). It is readily evident that excellence in educational equipment and intelligent insight into the business of teaching are among the accomplishments of the profession. In fact, mastery of the field to be taught and professional training in its presentation are requisites.
It is the goal and purpose of this seminary to offer university graduates who will become teachers the most practical and comprehensive professional training possible within a six-month timeframe. It is clear that having excellent educational resources and a smart understanding of the teaching profession are key achievements. In fact, mastering the subject to be taught and professional training in how to present it are essential requirements.
The certificates or diplomas issued upon completion of the preparatory work just outlined are the only credentials required of the Norwegian teachers. Being issued by the state they have a standard of value which is uniform, recognized, and honored throughout the realm. Without these papers it would be folly to seek appointment to a fixed (permanent) post.
The certificates or diplomas given after finishing the preparatory work mentioned earlier are the only qualifications needed for Norwegian teachers. Since they're issued by the state, they hold a consistent, recognized, and respected value across the country. Without these documents, it would be foolish to apply for a permanent position.
Besides the regular corps of instructors occupying on full time in the general lines of instruction, there are many special teachers devoting their energies along particular lines of work, such as home economics, drawing, music, gymnastics, and manual training; and still others who teach some of the regular branches of study only part time, whose positions are not permanent. Special preparation is required in order to obtain positions in these specific lines of work.
Besides the regular group of full-time instructors focused on general education, there are many specialized teachers dedicating their efforts to specific subjects like home economics, art, music, physical education, and hands-on skills. Additionally, there are others who only teach some of the standard subjects part-time, and their positions are not permanent. Special training is needed to secure jobs in these specific areas.
II. TRAINING OF TEACHERS
Norway early recognized the value of specific training for the work of the teacher. The experiences of other nations served as object lessons illustrating the good coming from the services of properly equipped teachers and the dangers of proceeding without such. The state was eager to lay substantial foundations, to conserve and develop every resource, to build permanently and economically, and to profit by the experiences of other systems. Consequently, the people moved forward in a conservative manner and planned for the future as well as for immediate needs.
Norway recognized early on the importance of specialized training for teachers. The experiences of other countries showed how effective properly trained teachers could be and highlighted the risks of not having them. The government was determined to create a strong foundation, to make the most of every resource, to build sustainably and economically, and to learn from the experiences of other education systems. As a result, the people took a careful approach, planning for both future needs and immediate concerns.
Utilizing the strong points of other systems and adapting them to local conditions, the state established six teachers' seminaries, locating one in each of the six dioceses into which the country is divided, so that they would be within easy access of the people attending them. Besides these state seminaries, four private institutions, having almost identical functions, have been established and are flourishing. The private seminaries are located at vantage points not too close to the State Schools yet where they will be within reach of a large number of people. The favorable location of these schools makes it possible for a large number of the attendants to live in their own homes, while the large majority need be but a short distance from their homes.
By leveraging the strengths of other systems and tailoring them to local needs, the state set up six teacher training colleges, placing one in each of the six dioceses the country is divided into, ensuring easy access for attendees. In addition to these state colleges, four private institutions with nearly the same functions have been established and are thriving. The private colleges are strategically located, not too close to the state schools, but still accessible to a large number of people. The advantageous locations of these colleges allow many attendees to live at home, while the majority are only a short distance away from their residences.
The work of the teachers' seminaries is, of course, to provide special preparation for teaching in the schools throughout the nation. Their curricula are similar[Pg 82] to those used in the secondary schools. The chief point of difference between them is the attitude taken toward the subjects of instruction. In the secondary schools the aim is general and in a large measure cultural, while in the seminaries the attempt is always to present the lesson or subjects of instruction in such a manner that the pupils shall get both intellectual development and the correct method of presentation. It is the intent that this experience shall help to qualify for the successful teaching of the subjects studied. The work corresponds closely with that done in the normal schools of America or similar teachers' schools in other lands.
The role of teacher training colleges is to provide specialized preparation for teaching in schools across the country. Their curriculums are similar[Pg 82] to those used in secondary schools. The main difference between them is the approach to the subjects being taught. In secondary schools, the goal is generally broader and more focused on cultural education, while in teacher training colleges, the focus is always on presenting lessons or subjects in a way that promotes both intellectual growth and effective teaching methods. The aim is for this experience to help prepare students for successfully teaching the subjects they study. The work aligns closely with that done in normal schools in America or equivalent teacher training institutions in other countries.
It is everywhere true that teachers teach as they have been taught. The principle of imitation is illustrated clearly every day in every school room. Teachers, like pupils, follow example more closely than precept. Providing schools designed to fit people for the teaching profession have ideal teachers, they will be able to turn out from year to year groups of teachers, who, imitating their masters, both in the application of scientific principles of method and in the exercise of individuality, will in turn become ideal teachers. If the curriculum and teaching of the training college are rich and varied, its products will be characterized by efficiency and resourcefulness. On the contrary, should the work of the school be narrow because of a cramped curriculum, or on account of biased and shrunken ideals of the faculty, the results will be unsatisfactory. The teachers who go out from such an institution will be[Pg 83] unequal to the tasks awaiting them—they will be unable to meet the situation in the educational field.
It’s true everywhere that teachers teach the way they were taught. The principle of imitation is clearly seen every day in every classroom. Teachers, like students, follow examples more closely than instructions. If training schools have ideal teachers, they can produce groups of teachers each year who, by mirroring their mentors in applying scientific methods and expressing their individuality, will also become ideal teachers. If the curriculum and teaching at the training college are diverse and enriching, its graduates will be efficient and resourceful. Conversely, if the school's work is limited due to a narrow curriculum or because of the faculty's biased and restricted ideals, the outcomes will be disappointing. Teachers graduating from such institutions will be[Pg 83]unprepared for the challenges ahead—they won’t be able to handle the demands in the educational field.
Since it is a chief occupation of the training school to instill methods of presentation, there is great danger of becoming mechanical, machine-made, or stilted in one way or another. Quite the opposite must be the nature and work of the teacher. The teacher should be able to come down from the high platform and cooperate with the children; to find the individual child and his interests and, in a genuinely sympathetic spirit, to direct those interests; to discard set rules, hard and fast lines, and pet theories; and to open up to each child a vision of the fields before. In order to do these things the instructor must be thoroughly familiar with child life: its nature, mental and physical make-up, processes of development, conditions of growth and activity, instincts, and hopes. He must also cherish and manifest a sympathetic attitude towards youthful tendencies and aspirations, and be able to inspire the pupils to noble purposes.
Since it's a main focus of the training school to teach presentation methods, there's a real risk of becoming rigid, mechanical, or stilted in some way. The teacher's work should be just the opposite. They need to get down from the high pedestal and engage with the children; to connect with each child and their interests and, with genuine empathy, guide those interests; to set aside strict rules, rigid boundaries, and personal theories; and to show each child a vision of the possibilities ahead. To do this, the instructor must have a deep understanding of child development: their nature, mental and physical makeup, growth processes, conditions for growth and activity, instincts, and dreams. They must also care for and show a kind attitude toward young aspirations and be capable of inspiring students toward noble goals.
The seminaries of Norway, like those of other nations, fall short of some of the conditions of excellence that we yearn for. They do not include a sufficient amount of professional training nor is that which is provided always the ideal type. Nevertheless, an earnest effort is being put forth to approach these higher conditions as rapidly as possible. The course of three years, besides furnishing a valuable fund of instruction, provides a large amount of work in observation and extensive experience in teaching. The training in observation generally consists of work in connection with the state[Pg 84] schools (primary and secondary) in the immediate vicinity of the seminary. Into these state schools the seminary pupils are permitted to go and observe the teaching of the regularly employed instructors as they present the different subjects in the curriculum. After having observed teaching for some time and having carefully discussed class room procedure with their own teachers, they are required to specially prepare and present some lessons under the close, yet sympathetic scrutiny and supervision of their masters. As time passes, more and more of this practice teaching is assigned until proficiency is attained in the presentation of subjects to be taught in subsequent years. While these schools do not incorporate into their activities all things that seem important, it must be said to their credit that they have done a great service in qualifying teachers for the class of instruction which has already raised the masses to their present place of literary distinction.
The seminaries in Norway, like those in other countries, fall short of some of the standards of excellence that we desire. They don't provide enough professional training, and what is offered isn't always ideal. However, there is a serious effort to meet these higher standards as quickly as possible. The three-year program not only offers valuable instruction but also includes significant observation work and extensive teaching experience. The observation training usually involves working with local state schools (primary and secondary) near the seminary. Students are allowed to visit these state schools to watch regular teachers as they teach different subjects in the curriculum. After observing for a while and discussing classroom procedures with their own instructors, they must prepare and present some lessons under the close but supportive supervision of their mentors. As time goes on, they are given more practice teaching until they become proficient at presenting subjects that they will teach in future years. While these schools don't cover every important aspect, it should be acknowledged that they have significantly contributed to training teachers who have already elevated public education to its current level of literary achievement.
Besides the institutions providing teachers' training above referred to, there was established in 1907 the Pedagogical seminary. This seminary is affiliated with the university in Christiania but is not an organic part of it. It was founded by act of the Stortbing and is supported by the state. The function of the Pedagogical Seminary is to provide professional training of an especially practical type for graduates of the university who intend to make teaching their profession. The length of the course is six months. Instruction and training provided in this institution includes: (1) lectures in hygiene, psychology, history of education,[Pg 85] and principles of education; (2) observation of class instruction by masters, whose teaching is the highest representation of the art in the city; (3) discussions, formal and informal, general and analytic, with the headmaster of the seminary concerning methods of instruction, class conduct, and school management; and (4) practice teaching under the supervision of masters whose criticisms are given in such frank and sympathetic manner as to make them invaluable.
Besides the institutions mentioned earlier for teacher training, the Pedagogical Seminary was established in 1907. This seminary is linked to the university in Christiania but is not an official part of it. It was founded by an act of the Storting and is funded by the state. The purpose of the Pedagogical Seminary is to provide practical professional training for university graduates who want to pursue a career in teaching. The program lasts six months. Instruction and training at this institution include: (1) lectures on hygiene, psychology, history of education,[Pg 85] and educational principles; (2) observation of classroom instruction by expert teachers, whose methods represent the best in the city; (3) discussions, both formal and informal, with the headmaster about teaching methods, classroom management, and school administration; and (4) hands-on teaching practice under the guidance of experienced teachers, whose feedback is provided in a straightforward and supportive way, making it extremely valuable.
As a rule, those trained in the teachers' seminaries are employed in the primary schools. The students who avail themselves of the advantages of a university education and follow it by the training provided in the Pedagogical Seminary generally become teachers in the secondary schools. The seminary training in general is of such character that it may be put into use immediately upon entrance into the work of teaching. It also renders vital and usable for purposes of instruction the information and intellectual development gained during the long-continued and intensive schooling preceding such training.
As a general rule, those who train at teachers' seminaries end up working in primary schools. Students who take advantage of a university education and then complete the training offered at the Pedagogical Seminary usually become teachers in secondary schools. The training at the seminary is designed so that it can be applied right away when someone starts teaching. It also makes the knowledge and skills developed during the extensive schooling before this training valuable and applicable for teaching purposes.
III. TEACHERS' OFFICIAL TITLES
Throughout the school system of Norway teachers are given titles according to the nature of the positions occupied. In the primary school the man who does the supervising work (in America known as superintendent) is called the Inspektor; the head teacher or principal is termed the Overlaerer; and the other teachers, male and female, are spoken of respectively[Pg 86] as Laerer and Laererinde. In the middle school and gymnasium the titles are Rektor, Overlaerer, and Adjunkt. The Rektor has the supervisory work and some teaching to do; the Overlaerer is one of the principal teachers who has been given the title and ranking, chiefly because of fitness and long service; and the Adjunkt is a regular teacher who has served the school for five years or more and has received permanent appointment.
In Norway's school system, teachers are given titles based on their roles. In primary schools, the person in charge of supervision (known as a superintendent in the U.S.) is called the Inspektor; the head teacher or principal is referred to as the Overlaerer; and other teachers, whether male or female, are called Laerer and Laererinde, respectively. In middle schools and gymnasiums, the titles are Rektor, Overlaerer, and Adjunkt. The Rektor is responsible for supervision and some teaching; the Overlaerer is one of the main teachers recognized with this title and ranking mainly due to their qualifications and long service; and the Adjunkt is a regular teacher who has been with the school for five years or more and has received a permanent position.
Titles do not correspond strictly to educational equipment nor do they depend wholly upon term of service, though both of these may be and generally are contributory factors. For example: positions in the middle schools and gymnasia are open only to those who have certain educational fitness; the teachers with especially strong qualifications and superior ability are the ones most liable to receive early promotion to the higher class positions; and, when promotions are made, the persons who have taught for a long time enjoy some advantage over those with but slight experience. Titles correspond more definitely to classes of positions occupied than to any other thing that can be named. When an individual is appointed to a position carrying a title, that designation is invariably used in connection with his name. He is no longer John Johnson or Herr Johnson, but Rektor Johnson, Overlaerer Johnson, Inspektor Johnson, etc.
Titles do not strictly match educational qualifications, nor do they depend entirely on length of service, though both can be contributing factors. For instance, positions in middle schools and gymnasiums are only available to those with specific educational credentials; teachers with particularly strong qualifications and exceptional abilities are the ones most likely to get promoted early to higher-level positions. Additionally, when promotions occur, those with longer teaching experience tend to have an edge over those who are less experienced. Titles align more closely with the classes of positions held than with anything else. When someone is appointed to a position with a title, that title is always used alongside their name. They are no longer John Johnson or Mr. Johnson, but Rector Johnson, Overlaerer Johnson, Inspektor Johnson, etc.
IV. TEACHERS' TENURE OF OFFICE
The teacher's tenure of office in Norway is very different from what we are accustomed to in America.[Pg 87] Positions are of two kinds—permanent and temporary. Nearly all appointments in the past have been to permanent posts. This means that the individual occupies his place without molestation or any hint of insecurity until he chooses to resign or until he reaches the age of retirement.[19] Some appointments now are to temporary positions though generally they lead to permanent ones. Rarely, if ever, does a person who makes reasonable success in a temporary position fail to secure an appointment to a permanent post.
The teacher's tenure of office in Norway is very different from what we are accustomed to in America.[Pg 87] Positions are of two kinds—permanent and temporary. Nearly all appointments in the past have been to permanent posts. This means that the individual occupies his place without molestation or any hint of insecurity until he chooses to resign or until he reaches the age of retirement.[19] Some appointments now are to temporary positions though generally they lead to permanent ones. Rarely, if ever, does a person who makes reasonable success in a temporary position fail to secure an appointment to a permanent post.
Permanency in position has a number of well-recognized advantages. Security of situation gives to the teacher a release from the uncertainty which constantly harasses the minds of so many where frequent change of position is the rule. A lasting appointment enables one to get a firm grasp on the local situation, and to utilize without waste all the momentum accumulated while occupying in a particular place. Furthermore, the teacher who feels settled in a position is able to establish a home, and to become identified with the community and its interest.
Permanency in a job has several well-known advantages. Job security frees teachers from the constant uncertainty that troubles many people when frequent changes are the norm. A long-term position allows them to fully understand the local situation and make the most of the momentum they've built while working in that location. Moreover, a teacher who feels settled in their role can establish a home and connect with the community and its interests.
Since teachers continue for so long a time in a position, they and their pupils become as well acquainted with each other as with members of a common family. It is interesting to note how minutely a teacher knows the daily life and habits of his pupils. While the relations are not always the most congenial, they are known to be practically inevitable and impossible of escape so they each make the best of the situation and get the most out of it.
Since teachers stay in their roles for such a long time, they and their students get to know each other as well as family members. It's fascinating how well a teacher understands the daily lives and habits of their students. While the relationships aren’t always the friendliest, they are generally seen as unavoidable, so everyone tries to make the best of it and get the most out of the experience.
Again, when children know that it will be their lot to come under the tuition of a certain instructor who occupies a permanent post under state appointment, they work faithfully and usually eliminate any criticising attitude. In fact, long terms of service tend to inhibit the criticisms of both children and parents which sometimes attend teachers who occupy positions but for a short time. The situation conduces to a condition of harmony and cooperative activity. The children instinctively feel the authority of the teacher. They know that he has the support of local and state authorities, and that they will cooperate with him in carrying forward his projects. The teacher, in turn, recognizes his responsibilities in the premises and endeavors to occupy acceptably.
Again, when children understand that they'll be taught by a specific teacher who has a permanent position with a state appointment, they generally work diligently and tend to drop any critical attitudes. In fact, lengthy tenures often reduce the criticisms from both kids and parents that can occur with teachers in positions for only a short time. This creates an atmosphere of harmony and teamwork. The children instinctively acknowledge the teacher’s authority. They know he has the backing of local and state officials and that they will support him in implementing his plans. The teacher, in turn, recognizes his responsibilities in the role and strives to meet them effectively.
Now it is just as true that there are some disadvantages to permanency of positions. Teachers are apt to become non-progressive and in some cases, little more than fixtures. Change of environment stimulates progress and development. Variety in teaching experience broadens the capabilities and increases the usefulness of teachers. In addition, children need the touch and influence of many lives. They receive greater inspiration because of coming in contact with the personality of a large number of teachers. However, too frequent change is wasteful. It dissipates the energy of teachers and breaks the continuity of the work of the children. Where the permanency of positions is absolutely uncertain, the teaching profession is transitory and dwindling. Only a few remain for long time in the work under such conditions. Many[Pg 89] efficient school men leave the profession annually because of this discouragement.
Now, it’s also true that there are some downsides to job stability. Teachers can become stagnant and, in some cases, barely more than just fixtures. Changing environments encourages growth and development. Having a variety of teaching experiences expands teachers' skills and increases their effectiveness. Plus, children benefit from the influence of many different people. They find greater inspiration from interacting with a wide range of teachers. However, too much frequent change is wasteful. It drains teachers' energy and disrupts the continuity of students' work. When job stability is completely uncertain, the teaching profession becomes temporary and diminishing. Only a few stay in the field for a long time under these conditions. Many[Pg 89] capable educators leave the profession each year due to this discouragement.
At present, the feeling appears to be general that permanency in position should be conditioned upon improvement in efficiency. Evidently a recognition of this principle is a basic cause underlying the increase in number of appointments to temporary teaching positions. This procedure affords an excellent opportunity for weeding out the unfit. At the same time it acts as a spur inducing growth and development. Progressive tendencies, along with other qualifications, are regarded necessary to appointment even to temporary posts, and, as implied before, success in such positions is a prerequisite to appointment to permanent ones.
Right now, there's a widespread belief that holding a position should depend on how well someone performs. Clearly, acknowledging this idea is a main reason behind the rise in temporary teaching jobs. This approach provides a great chance to filter out those who aren’t suitable. At the same time, it encourages growth and development. Progressive attitudes, along with other qualifications, are seen as essential for even getting temporary roles, and, as mentioned earlier, doing well in these positions is a must for securing permanent ones.
In America, teacher's tenure of office is very short. Each year there are many changes in the personnel of teachers throughout the country. Here we have the extreme of uncertainty, while in Norway they go to the limits of certainty in teaching positions. Both these extremes are unfortunate. Could a golden mean be reached which would include proper incentives to and recognition of continuous self-improvement and a reasonable sense of security in permanent occupation, the profession would call into its ranks a large and more efficient body of men and women, and the schools would make greater and more substantial progress. In order to illustrate the permanency of positions in Norway Table VI has been arranged.
In America, teachers have a very short tenure. Each year, there are many changes in teaching staff across the country. Here, we face a lot of uncertainty, while in Norway, they have a high level of job security for teachers. Both of these situations are unfortunate. Is it possible to find a balance that would provide proper incentives for and recognition of continuous self-improvement, while also offering a reasonable sense of stability in permanent positions? If so, the profession would attract a larger and more effective group of individuals, leading to greater and more substantial progress in schools. To illustrate the stability of teaching positions in Norway, Table VI has been arranged.
TABLE VI
Table indicating Retirement from Teaching Staff and Reasons for Retirement.
Table indicating Retirement from Teaching Staff and Reasons for Retirement.
Year | 1890 | 1895 | 1900 | 1905 | |||||
Sex | Male | Female | Male | Female | Male | Female | Male | Female | |
Total number of positions | 3941 | 1187 | 4402 | 2116 | 4670 | 2613 | 4865 | 2885 | |
Total number leaving | 117 | 17 | 88 | 22 | 106 | 89 | 110 | 90 | |
Vacated after a period service from | |||||||||
1 to 10 years | 19 | 11 | 21 | 13 | 24 | 65 | 20 | 53 | |
10 to 20 years | 26 | 4 | 10 | 7 | 10 | 13 | 19 | 19 | |
20 to 30 years | 38 | 1 | 18 | 16 | 5 | 13 | 10 | ||
Over 30 years | 34 | 1 | 39 | 2 | 56 | 6 | 58 | 8 | |
Reasons for leaving | |||||||||
Death | 30 | 1 | 24 | 2 | 30 | 6 | 32 | 11 | |
Retirement on pension | 39 | 3 | 48 | 3 | 53 | 21 | 59 | 22 | |
Change in position | 9 | 3 | 2 | 4 | 4 | ||||
Marriage | 9 | 11 | 47 | 48 | |||||
Various others | 39 | 4 | 16 | 6 | 20 | 13 | 15 | 5 |
It is immediately apparent that the changes in the body of teachers are rare. It is also evident that nearly all who leave the profession do so on legitimate grounds. A few changes result from transfers in position, a large per cent of withdrawals are retirements after extended periods of service, and many vacancies are due to death. Fifty per cent or more of the women who retire do so on account of marrying, a few die at their posts, and many retire on pensions. Very few of the women teachers retire to enter other lines of work. While the table does not indicate how much longer than thirty years some teachers remain in the service, it may be added here that examples are not rare where individuals continue teaching for more than half a century. In most cases teachers occupy the same position throughout their teaching experience.
It’s clear that changes in the teaching staff are uncommon. It's also obvious that almost everyone who leaves the profession does so for valid reasons. Some leave due to transfers, a significant percentage retire after long careers, and many vacancies arise from deaths. More than half of the women who retire do so because they get married, a few pass away while still teaching, and many retire with pensions. Very few women teachers leave to pursue other careers. Although the table doesn’t show how many years beyond thirty some teachers stay in the profession, it's worth noting that there are instances of individuals teaching for more than fifty years. In most cases, teachers hold the same position throughout their careers.
V. TEACHERS' SALARIES
The salaries received by teachers do not average high in Norway. Many provisions are made, however, for the reduction of their living expenses. All those who serve the school authorities in Norway receive certain benefits appertaining to the positions they hold. For example: There is advance in salaries on promotions and after specified periods of service; teachers are exempt from expense incident to particular offices; school authorities send all official communications through the mail free of postage; teachers receive pensions on retirement from positions; the rural school teachers frequently receive, in addition to their salary, a house[Pg 92] to live in and sufficient land for the pasturage of two or three cows, and in towns and cities some of the teachers have homes provided, or are allowed a certain amount per year for living expenses. These and similar concessions and provisions are extended to the teachers according to enactments of the state, individual communes, or municipalities. Generally, a regular schedule is made out by which salaries are governed. Table VII indicates the salaries for different positions in eight cities of Norway:
The salaries earned by teachers in Norway aren't very high. However, there are many provisions to help reduce their living costs. Everyone working for the school authorities in Norway gets certain benefits related to their jobs. For example, teachers receive salary increases with promotions and after certain periods of service; they are exempt from certain office-related expenses; school authorities send all official communications through the mail with no postage cost; teachers get pensions when they retire; rural school teachers often receive a house to live in along with enough land to graze two or three cows, and in towns and cities, some teachers have their homes provided or get a yearly allowance for living expenses. These and other similar benefits are provided to teachers based on laws from the state, individual municipalities, or local governments. Typically, a regular schedule is established to determine salary levels. Table VII shows the salaries for different positions in eight cities in Norway:
The table is made up from the salary schedules of typical cities of various sizes. The values are in kroner (one krone is practically the equivalent of twenty-seven cents in United States money). We note that salaries are medium in the beginning, and that they increase at regular intervals until certain limits are reached. When we consider these limiting salaries, the long service generally rendered at the highest rate, certainty of position, and the pension to be received upon retirement, we are prone to admit that the advantages are not altogether in favor of the higher salaries paid in our American schools. True, the American teacher generally receives larger returns in dollars and cents, but the Norwegian pedagogue is less mercenary than his American cousin. He is satisfied when his wants and those of his family are liberally provided for. His life is not strenuous. It is happy and filled with the joys of service and the companionship of youthful souls. Anxieties are in large measure overcome by the assurance that the state will provide necessities when[Pg 93] the time for retirement comes. Pensions are graduated according to individual necessity as well as with reference to position, term of service, and salary at the time of retirement.
The table consists of salary schedules from typical cities of different sizes. The amounts are in kroner (one krone is roughly equivalent to twenty-seven cents in U.S. currency). We see that salaries start at a medium level and increase at regular intervals until they reach certain caps. When we think about these maximum salaries, along with the long service usually performed at the highest rate, job security, and the pension received upon retirement, we tend to agree that the benefits aren't entirely in favor of the higher salaries in our American schools. It's true that American teachers typically earn more in dollars and cents, but the Norwegian educator is less focused on money than their American counterpart. They feel fulfilled when their needs and those of their family are comfortably met. Their life is not stressful; it’s happy and filled with the joys of service and the interaction with young minds. Worries are largely alleviated by the assurance that the state will take care of necessities when[Pg 93] retirement comes. Pensions are adjusted based on individual needs, as well as considering position, length of service, and salary at the time of retirement.
TABLE VII
Schedule of Salaries paid to Teachers in the Primary Schools of eight cities in Norway.[20]
Schedule of Salaries paid to Teachers in the Primary Schools of eight cities in Norway.[20]
Salary After (in Kr.) | |||||||||
City | Position | Begin'ng Salary | 3 yrs. | 5 yrs. | 6 yrs. | 9 yrs. | 10 yrs. | 12 yrs. | 15 yrs. |
1. Christiania | Overlaerer | 3000 | 3400 | 3700 | 4000 | ||||
Laerer, h.g. | 3000 | ||||||||
Laerer, l.g. | 1600 | 1800 | 2100 | 2400 | 2700 | 3000 | |||
Laererinde, h.g. | 1700 | ||||||||
Laererinde, l.g. | 1100 | 1200 | 1300 | 1400 | 1500 | 1700 | |||
2. Fredrikshald | Laerer, h.g. | 2200 | |||||||
Laerer, l.g. | 1300 | 1450 | 1650 | 1750 | 1900 | 2000 | |||
Laererinde, h.g. | 1250 | ||||||||
Laererinde, l.g. | 950 | 1000 | 1050 | 1100 | 1150 | ||||
3. Sarpsborg | Laerer, h.g. | 1800 | 2000 | ||||||
Laerer, l.g. | 1200 | 1400 | 1600 | 1700 | 1800 | ||||
Laererinde, h.g. | 1150 | 1250 | |||||||
Laererinde, l.g. | 900 | 975 | 1050 | 1150 | |||||
4. Fredrikstad | Laerer, h.g. | 2100 | |||||||
Laerer, l.g. | 1400 | 1550 | 1700 | 1850 | 2000 | 2100 | |||
Laererinde, h.g. | 1200 | ||||||||
Laererinde, l.g. | 1000 | 1100 | 1200 | ||||||
5. Drammen | Overlaerer | 2600 | |||||||
Laerer, h.g. | 2300 | 2400 | |||||||
Laerer, lg. | 1400 | 1600 | 1800 | 2000 | 2100 | 2300 | |||
Laererinde, h.g. | 1300 | 1400 | |||||||
Laererinde, l.g. | 900 | 1000 | 1100 | 1200 | 1300 | ||||
6. Horten | Laerer, h.g. | 2000 | 2200 | ||||||
Laerer, l.g. | 1300 | 1500 | 1700 | 1850 | 2000 | ||||
Laererinde, h.g. | 1100 | 1200 | |||||||
Laererinde, l.g. | 900 | 950 | 1000 | 1050 | 1100 | ||||
7. Tonsberg | Overlaerer | 2500 | 2650 | 2800 | |||||
Laerer, h.g. | 2400 | 1600 | 1800 | 2000 | 2200 | 2400 | |||
Laerer, l.g. | 1400 | ||||||||
Laererinde, h.g. | 1300 | ||||||||
Laererinde, l.g. | 900 | 980 | 1060 | 1140 | 1220 | 1300 | |||
8. Kongsberg | Laerer, h.g. | 1800 | |||||||
Laerer, l.g. | 1300 | 1450 | 1600 | 1700 | 1800 | ||||
Laererinde, h.g. | 1100 | ||||||||
Laererinde, l.g. | 700 | 800 | 900 | 1000 | 1100 |
Chapter III
COURSES OF STUDY IN STATE SCHOOLS
I. INTRODUCTORY—RISE, DEVELOPMENT, AND PRESENT FORM OF THE CURRICULUM
We come now to a consideration of the course of study in the school system as it has evolved and is now operative. As was true throughout other parts of Europe, so in Norway, education during the middle ages issued almost exclusively from the cloister and cathedral schools (Dom-og Kathedral Skoler), and in them are found the germs of most modern courses of study. Inasmuch as the successive steps in the evolution of the recent schools of Europe from the earlier forms vary but little in the several countries, and since the subject is already familiar to nearly all students of education, we omit any technical discussion of that interesting feature of history, and refer the reader to any of the several works treating it fully. Suffice it to say, the aim of the church in maintaining these earlier schools centered in the development of a qualified clergy about whom should be gathered a loyal following, well-trained in the dogmas, doctrines, and traditions of the organization.
We now turn to a look at the curriculum in the school system as it has developed and is currently in use. Just like in other parts of Europe, education in Norway during the Middle Ages primarily came from monastic and cathedral schools (Dom-og Kathedral Skoler), which hold the roots of most modern study programs. Since the progression of the recent schools in Europe from earlier forms is quite similar across various countries, and because this topic is already well-known to most education students, we will skip any technical discussion of this fascinating aspect of history and direct readers to the numerous works that cover it in detail. It’s enough to say that the church's goal in sustaining these earlier schools was to cultivate a qualified clergy who would gather a loyal following, well-versed in the beliefs, doctrines, and traditions of the organization.
At this time the monk and a small company of disciples constituted the school. The little group studied together from day to day in and about the cloister or cathedral. Among them, very naturally, certain new thoughts and ideals sprung up. The masters saw the new developments if they were not themselves parties to them. As the newer thoughts became fixed in the youthful minds, individual interests pressed harder and harder still until provision was made for extending the work of instruction as well as for widening the scope of activities within the schools. While the aim was at first to give instruction and discipline in lines necessary to a clerical career, it changed by degrees until it included branches useful in legitimate occupations other than that of the clergy. However, the diversifying of school activities and the enrichment of the program of study did not keep pace with the changes that were taking place in other phases of the social cosmos. A spirit of unrest grew to proportions almost ungovernable until the middle age renaissance in learning removed the fetters and brought relief by effecting systems of education very fitting to the requirements. Great credit is due to the leaders in the Reformation for the part they played in placing means for instruction and education upon a more secure and permanent basis, and for the service they rendered in giving to the schools certain vitality that had rarely, if ever, been characteristic of any similar institution.
At this time, the monk and a small group of disciples made up the school. The little group studied together daily in and around the cloister or cathedral. Naturally, new thoughts and ideals began to emerge among them. The masters noticed these new developments, even if they weren't directly involved. As these fresh ideas took root in the young minds, individual interests intensified, pushing for the expansion of both teaching and the range of activities within the schools. Initially, the goal was to provide instruction and discipline necessary for a clerical career, but gradually it evolved to include subjects useful in legitimate occupations beyond the clergy. However, the diversification of school activities and the enhancement of the curriculum didn't keep up with the changes happening in other areas of society. A growing spirit of unrest became almost uncontrollable until the middle-age renaissance in learning broke the chains and provided relief by establishing educational systems that better met the needs. The leaders of the Reformation deserve significant credit for their role in securing more stable and lasting means for instruction and education, as well as for bringing to the schools a vitality that had rarely, if ever, been seen in similar institutions.
The new type of school bore a stamp of general approval which enabled it to gain a momentum which was not soon to be overcome. In fact, the schools of all the[Pg 98] more civilized countries are still largely dominated by traditions dating back to the epoch-making works of such men as Erasmus, Luther, Melanchthon, and Sturm.
The new kind of school had widespread approval that allowed it to build momentum that wasn't going to fade away quickly. In fact, the schools in all the[Pg 98] more developed countries are still mostly influenced by traditions from the groundbreaking works of figures like Erasmus, Luther, Melanchthon, and Sturm.
Now the ideas of these famous educators were less subjected to change in Norway than in the centers from whence they came. Until the union between this country and Denmark came to an end in 1814, very little thought was given to advancing educational interests in Norway. The work of her cathedral schools had been little improved during the centuries that had passed since their establishment. When at last Norway became a free constitutional state and these Norsemen breathed the air of freedom, felt the exhilaration of greater personal liberties, realized that their destiny was to be of their own making, and fully sensed their important responsibilities in the situation, they all, ecclesiasts and politicians, capitalists and laborers, combined in developing their schools in ways calculated to lift the masses to higher intellectual planes. The changes wrought were in relation to what was to be taught and to the extension of learning. An opportunity for instruction was given to every youth in the land.
Now, the ideas of these well-known educators were less likely to change in Norway than in the places they came from. Until the union between Norway and Denmark ended in 1814, very little attention was given to advancing education in Norway. The cathedral schools had not seen much improvement over the centuries since they were founded. When Norway finally became a free constitutional state and the Norwegians experienced the fresh air of freedom, felt the excitement of greater personal liberties, realized that their future was in their own hands, and fully understood their significant responsibilities, they all—clergy and politicians, business owners and workers—came together to develop their schools in ways designed to elevate the masses to higher intellectual levels. The changes were related to what would be taught and the expansion of learning. Every young person in the country was given the opportunity for an education.
For a long time the ancient languages formed the bulk of higher learning, while in the primary schools only the rudiments of a few subjects were attempted. Social tendencies soon required an increase in the number of branches to be taught, and also laid added weight upon the importance of such study as would be of benefit in vocational activities. Accordingly, mathematics, history, geography, and nature study became more[Pg 99] prominent features in all schools. One of the best characteristics of the work throughout is that the mother-tongue has been at all times a dominating factor through every grade of their schools. Later in the process a demand for the modern foreign languages was responded to favorably and they took places in the curriculum of the higher school. These changes bring us down through the last century to the recent forms in courses of study and we shall introduce the reader immediately into the present situation.
For a long time, ancient languages were the main focus of higher education, while primary schools only covered the basics of a few subjects. Social trends soon called for a broader range of subjects to be taught and emphasized the importance of studies that would help in vocational fields. As a result, subjects like math, history, geography, and science became more prominent in all schools. One of the best features of the educational system has been that the mother tongue has always played a crucial role at every grade level. Later on, there was a favorable response to the demand for modern foreign languages, which were then included in the higher school curriculum. These changes bring us through the last century to the current education formats, and we will now introduce the reader to the present situation.
Besides the institutions for higher learning there are now three distinct sections in the school system of Norway, viz.: Primary School, Middle School, and Gymnasium. The primary school is designed to provide education of an elementary type for every citizen of the country. By vital cooperation and the exercise of great care in organization, distribution, supervision, and inspection of these schools, the people have overcome illiteracy and have reduced truancy to a minimum—almost to a negligible factor. They are unitedly converted to the belief that an enlightened populace is a necessity to the continuity of desirable institutions, to the development of resources, and to the maintenance of worthy traditions. To secure for all the essentials of good and intelligent citizenship, an attempt has been made to have the curriculum for the primary schools include the branches of study which have meaning in every walk of life, and which enhance the efficiency of each citizen in his individual activities. In short, it is the intent that all the people shall have the more abundant life which comes with a thorough, general, elementary[Pg 100] education; and, at the same time, that they shall be prepared for the higher schools which build on the broad foundation of the common school.
Besides institutions for higher education, Norway's school system now has three distinct levels: Primary School, Middle School, and Gymnasium. The primary school aims to provide basic education for every citizen in the country. Through vital collaboration and careful organization, management, oversight, and inspection of these schools, the people have eliminated illiteracy and kept truancy to a minimum—almost negligible. They all believe that an informed population is essential for the continuation of valuable institutions, the development of resources, and the preservation of worthwhile traditions. To ensure everyone has the essentials for good and informed citizenship, efforts have been made to include subjects in the primary school curriculum that are relevant to every aspect of life and that improve the effectiveness of each citizen in their personal endeavors. In summary, the goal is for everyone to benefit from a rich life that comes with a solid, general elementary education while also being prepared for the higher schools that build on the strong foundation of common schooling.[Pg 100]
Following the primary schools are the middle schools which lead still farther in the pathway of intellectual development those whose situation in life enables them to proceed with school work. Besides carrying forward the lines of study begun in the lower school with added vigor and exactitude, they include a large amount of work in foreign modern languages. Thus we see that this second section in the great institution of learning fills in the elementary framework, enriches the fund of information, adds a considerable amount of culture, and paves the way for the more liberal training to follow in the next section.
Following the primary schools are the middle schools, which continue to advance the intellectual development of those who can further their education. In addition to building on the subjects started in the lower school with greater intensity and precision, they also include a significant amount of work in modern foreign languages. Thus, we see that this second part of the educational system enhances the foundational knowledge, enriches the overall understanding, adds a considerable level of culture, and prepares students for the more comprehensive education that comes next.
The Gymnasium succeeds and builds directly upon the work of the middle school. Its function is to provide a liberal culture and education suited to the needs and desires of those who become in large part the leaders in all phases of political, professional, or other social careers.
The Gymnasium builds on the work of middle school. Its purpose is to offer a broad education and culture that meets the needs and aspirations of those who will mainly become leaders in various areas of political, professional, or other social careers.
Thus we note that the succeeding steps taken in the educational ladder are in harmony with and dependent upon preceding work. While only a correspondingly small number pass to the summit, all the people enjoy the advantages of the broad fundamentals and generalizations which lie at the base of their educational system and equip very well for the common walks and vocations of life. In our discussion we shall separate the work of the three sections and consider them one at a time. It seems advisable to handle them in this way,[Pg 101] and we believe that a more adequate conception of the work as a whole will be obtained by offering first the part affecting all the people and dealing with the primary schools.
So, we see that the next steps in the education system align with and rely on the work that came before. While only a small number reach the top, everyone benefits from the foundational knowledge and general concepts that support the educational system and prepare them well for everyday life and jobs. In our discussion, we will break down the work of the three sections and look at each one separately. It seems best to approach it this way,[Pg 101] and we think that a clearer understanding of the overall work will come from starting with the aspect that affects everyone and focuses on primary schools.
II. THE PRIMARY SCHOOLS
The primary schools are of two kinds,—those specially designed for the rural sections of the country and others provided for the towns and cities, the latter being somewhat richer in curricula, more complete in organization, and more thorough in operation than the former. Considering the fact that such uniformity characterizes the courses of study in the various schools, it will be necessary to present but one outline for each class of schools. An effort has been made to select courses that are representative and which clearly set forth typical conditions. Table VIII gives the program of work offered in one of the rural communes, and shows the number of hours per week devoted to each branch of study for the seven years in the course. Just after the legislative act of 1889, the Department sent out a "normal plan" which served as a guide in arranging the time-tables for rural municipalities. As a result great uniformity exists.
The primary schools come in two types: those specifically designed for rural areas and those meant for towns and cities. The latter tend to have richer curricula, better organization, and more thorough operations than the former. Given that there is a standardization in the courses of study across the different schools, we only need to present one outline for each type of school. We've tried to select courses that are representative and reflect typical conditions. Table VIII shows the program of work offered in one of the rural communities, outlining the number of hours per week dedicated to each subject over the seven-year course. Following the legislative act of 1889, the Department distributed a "normal plan" that served as a guide for creating schedules for rural municipalities, resulting in significant uniformity.
TABLE VIII
Table Showing the Number of Hours per Week for Each Branch of Instruction in the Course of Study in Fredrikvaern Commune.[21]
Table Showing the Number of Hours per Week for Each Branch of Instruction in the Course of Study in Fredrikvaern Commune.[21]
Year | I. | II. | III. | IV. | V. | VI. | VII. | Total |
Religion | 7 | 7 | 5 | 6 | 6 | 6 | 6 | 43 |
Norwegian | 10 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 6 | 6 | 54 |
Mathematics | 6 | 5 | 4 | 6 | 4 | 6 | 6 | 37 |
Geography | 2 | 2 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 13 | ||
History | 2 | 2 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 13 | ||
Nature Study | 2 | 3 | 1 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 14 |
Writing | 5 | 5 | 4 | 4 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 24 |
Drawing | 1 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 9 | ||
Vocal Music | 2 | 1 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 11 | |
Manual Training | 2 | 2 | 4 | 6 | 6 | 20 | ||
Gymnastics | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 8 | |||
— | — | — | — | — | — | — | —— | |
Total | 30 | 30 | 30 | 38 | 38 | 40 | 40 | 246 |
The program just above is normal and typical in every respect. The schools are very uniform in their work and, as previously stated, no further tables are necessary in order to give a concise idea of the work generally presented in the rural districts of the entire country.
The program above is standard and common in every way. The schools have a consistent approach to their work, and as mentioned earlier, no additional tables are needed to provide a clear overview of the work typically done in the rural areas across the country.
The second program selected is the one used in the primary schools of Christiania.[22] The schools of this city are among the best and are taken as models for a number in other cities and towns.
The second program selected is the one used in the primary schools of Christiania.[22] The schools of this city are among the best and are taken as models for a number in other cities and towns.
TABLE IX
Course of study showing weekly hours in Christiania Primary Schools.
Course of study showing weekly hours in Christiania Primary Schools.
Division | First | Second | Third | |||||||||||||
Year | I. | II. | III. | IV. | V. | VI. | VII. | Total | ||||||||
Sex[A] | B | G | B | G | B | G | B | G | B | G | B | G | B | G | B | G |
Religion | 6-2 | 6-2 | 6-2 | 6-2 | 6-2 | 6-2 | 4 | 3 | 4 | 3 | 4 | 4 | 3 | 3 | 24 | 22 |
Norwegian | 12 | 11 | 10 | 8 | 8 | 7 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 4 | 5 | 4 | 5 | 5 | 50 | 44 |
Mathematics | 5 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 3 | 4 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 26 | 23 |
Geography | 3 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 9 | 8 | ||
History | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 2 | 2 | 8 | 8 | ||||
Nature Study | 1 | 1 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 7 | 7 | ||||||
Writing | 4 | 4 | 4 | 3 | 3 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 16 | 14 |
Drawing | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 8 | 6 | |||||||
Vocal Music | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 5 | 5 | ||||
Manual Training | 2 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 2 | 4 | 2 | 4 | 2 | 4 | 6 | 26 | ||||
Gymnastics | 2-2 | 0 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 1 | 2 | 9 | 5 | |||||
Total | 24 | 24 | 24 | 24 | 24 | 24 | 24 | 24 | 24 | 24 | 24 | 24 | 24 | 24 | 168 | 168 |
[Note: Year 1910-1911.]
[Note: Year 1910-1911.]
[Note A: B refers to boys, G to girls.]
Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.
The comparative table on page 106 clearly evidences the similarities already referred to and, at the same time, serves to indicate all variations. However, in the making of comparisons, difference in the number and distribution of hours is more a matter of method or correlation between branches than an indication of actual difference in accomplishment. For example, a large number of hours for writing may mean exclusively work in practice writing, but it is very probable that it will include a considerable amount of work in the mother-tongue or a definite correlation with nature study, history, or religion. The fundamental standard by which work is judged or measured is whether it prepares the pupil fully for work in the middle school.
The comparison table on page 106 clearly shows the similarities mentioned earlier and also highlights all the differences. However, when making comparisons, the difference in the number and distribution of hours is more about the method or connection between subjects than a real difference in achievement. For instance, a large number of hours dedicated to writing may primarily focus on practical writing, but it's likely that it will also include a considerable amount of work in the mother tongue or a clear link to subjects like nature study, history, or religion. The main standard used to judge or measure work is whether it adequately prepares the student for middle school.
TABLE X
Comparative table of Courses of Study in ten cities. [Transcriber Note: Table split]
Religion | Norwegian | Mathematics | Geography | History | Nature Study | |||||||
City Sex(A) | B | G | B | G | B | G | B | G | B | G | B | G |
Christiania | 24 | 22 | 50 | 44 | 26 | 23 | 9 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 7 | 7 |
Bergen | 21 | 21 | 55 | 53 | 29 | 28 | 8 | 8 | 9 | 9 | 7 | 10 |
Trondhjem | 23 | 22 | 57 | 51 | 31 | 27 | 12 | 11 | 11 | 11 | 8 | 8 |
Stavanger | 22 | 22 | 63 | 57 | 30 | 30 | 8 | 8 | 11 | 11 | 7 | 7 |
Drammen | 24 | 24 | 52 | 47 | 29 | 25 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 6 | 5 |
Kristiansand | 22 | 22 | 49 | 49 | 25 | 25 | 10 | 10 | 11 | 11 | 8 | 7 |
Aalesund | 27 | 27 | 46 | 44 | 26 | 22 | 6 | 6 | 11 | 11 | 6 | 5 |
Fredrikshald | 21 | 22 | 52 | 44 | 25 | 23 | 10 | 9 | 9 | 7 | 5 | 6 |
Skien | 21 | 21 | 47 | 44 | 25 | 24 | 10 | 8 | 9 | 8 | 7 | 5 |
Kristiansund | 24 | 24 | 50 | 47 | 27 | 26 | 8 | 8 | 9 | 8 | 8 | 7 |
Writing | Drawing | Vocal Music | Manual Training | Gymnastics | Total | |||||||
City Sex(A) | B | G | B | G | B | G | B | G | B | G | B | G |
Christiania | 16 | 14 | 8 | 6 | 5 | 5 | 6 | 26 | 9 | 5 | 168 | 168 |
Bergen | 10 | 8 | 9 | 8 | 5 | 5 | 8 | 24 | 10 | 7 | 172 | 178 |
Trondhjem | 18 | 15 | 7 | 4 | 4 | 5 | 8 | 29 | 9 | 7 | 188 | 190 |
Stavanger | 12 | 10 | 4 | 4 | 5 | 5 | 10 | 23 | 8 | 5 | 180 | 182 |
Drammen | 17 | 13 | 5 | 3 | 5 | 5 | 6 | 25 | 8 | 5 | 168 | 168 |
Kristiansand | 13 | 13 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 6 | 8 | 8 | 6 | 162 | 161 |
Aalesund | 16 | 15 | 4 | 3 | 5 | 5 | 6 | 21 | 9 | 5 | 162 | 164 |
Fredrikshald | 14 | 11 | 5 | 6 | 6 | 6 | 8 | 24 | 7 | 4 | 162 | 162 |
Skien | 16 | 14 | 4 | 4 | 5 | 5 | 10 | 24 | 8 | 5 | 162 | 162 |
Kristiansund | 18 | 15 | 3 | 3 | 5 | 5 | 6 | 20 | 10 | 5 | 168 | 168 |
[Note A: B refers to boys, G to girls.]
Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.
Religion Reading Reckoning Writing
The four R's in Norway's educational system form the center of their educational endeavors. Only a superficial glance at the tables presented is necessary in order to notice their prominence throughout the course of study. While the amount of time devoted to them is in itself a sufficiently strong indication of their predominance, we must also carry in mind an allowance for closest possible correlation between them as constant and additional factors along the same line. Bearing these things in mind we enter at once upon the discussion of the course of study or school plan. Though the programs presented and digest of plans following or accompanying are taken from particular schools, the discussion throughout will be general unless otherwise specified. For varied reasons, but chiefly because they are typical, specific, and concrete, the courses of study used in Christiania—primary and secondary—are chosen as illustrations. The following is not a verbatim translation of Christiania's plan of instruction but an abbreviated statement of the work as outlined in their published school plan (Skoleplan). I have endeavored to select the more vital points throughout and to represent them as exactly as a condensed version renders possible. Where inaccuracies or omissions occur they are due to a demand for economy—the things omitted not being regarded as absolute essentials to a correct representation of the intent and spirit of the work as carried on.
The four R's in Norway's education system are at the heart of their teaching efforts. A quick look at the presented tables is enough to see their importance throughout the curriculum. The time spent on them shows their significance, and we must also consider how closely related they are to other ongoing factors. With this in mind, we will jump right into the discussion about the curriculum or school plan. Although the programs and summaries of plans included come from specific schools, the overall discussion will be general unless noted otherwise. For various reasons, mainly because they are typical, specific, and concrete, the courses of study from Oslo—both primary and secondary—are used as examples. The following is not a word-for-word translation of Oslo's instruction plan but a summarized statement of the work as outlined in their published school plan (Skoleplan). I aimed to highlight the most important points and represent them as accurately as possible in this condensed version. Any inaccuracies or omissions are due to the need for brevity, and the omitted details are not seen as essential for accurately portraying the intent and spirit of the work.
OUTLINE OF SUBJECTS OF INSTRUCTION
Religion
Aim. The aims of instruction in religion are to develop the religious instincts of the children and to instill in them a recognition of Christianity, out of which may grow a healthy Christian life and a clear conception of the church.
Aim. The goals of teaching religion are to nurture the children's spiritual instincts and to help them recognize Christianity, which can lead to a vibrant Christian life and a clear understanding of the church.
To attain these, an effort is made to impart the following fund of information:
To achieve these goals, we make an effort to provide the following information:
Definite acquaintance with the more important parts of Bible history, with the chief events in church history, and with the catechism according to the Evangelical Lutheran creed.
Definite knowledge of the key aspects of Bible history, the main events in church history, and the catechism based on the Evangelical Lutheran creed.
First Division
Class I. (Six half hour periods weekly.) Instruction during the beginning weeks consists in simple stories, songs, hymns, prayers, and conversations designed to impart a knowledge of Christianity, ethics, and morals; to effect definite connections with previous home training; and to awaken and develop religious and moral attitudes in the children preparatory to the more direct instruction to follow.
Class I. (Six half-hour periods each week.) The instruction during the initial weeks includes simple stories, songs, hymns, prayers, and conversations aimed at teaching children about Christianity, ethics, and morals; creating clear links to their previous home education; and fostering religious and moral attitudes in the children in preparation for the more direct teaching that will come later.
The real instruction in Christianity or religion begins with Bible stories selected from the Old and New Testaments and specially adapted to the understanding of the children and their ability to master the same. The following stories are among the ones used: The Story[Pg 109] of Joseph, Samuel and Hannah, David and Goliath, The Birth of Jesus, The Three Wise Men, Jesus in the Temple, Jesus Feeding the Five Thousand, Jesus Raising the Widow's Son, Jesus Blessing the Children, Jesus Teaching the Disciples How to Pray. The stories are presented orally and explained and elucidated in such a way that the children may receive clear and vivid pictures of the persons and events referred to, appreciate their connections with the Holy Scriptures, and be able to rehearse the narratives in an intelligent manner. Whenever possible the religious or moral content of the conversation should be brought to a climax in a simple passage of Scripture, a response from the catechism, or a verse of some hymn, which should be memorized.
The real teaching in Christianity or religion starts with Bible stories chosen from the Old and New Testaments, specially tailored to the understanding of children and their ability to grasp them. The following stories are among those used: The Story[Pg 109] of Joseph, Samuel and Hannah, David and Goliath, The Birth of Jesus, The Three Wise Men, Jesus in the Temple, Jesus Feeding the Five Thousand, Jesus Raising the Widow's Son, Jesus Blessing the Children, and Jesus Teaching the Disciples How to Pray. The stories are told orally and explained in a way that helps children create clear and vivid images of the people and events, appreciate their connections to the Holy Scriptures, and retell the narratives intelligently. Whenever possible, the religious or moral message of the conversation should be highlighted with a simple passage from Scripture, a response from the catechism, or a verse from a hymn, which should be memorized.
Class II. (Six half hour periods weekly.) Bible stories from Old and New Testaments taken mainly from the time of the patriarchs and Moses. Among them are the following:
Class II. (Six half-hour sessions weekly.) Bible stories from the Old and New Testaments, primarily focusing on the times of the patriarchs and Moses. Among them are the following:
From Old Testament: The Creation and Eden, The Fall, Cain and Abel, The Flood, The Call of Abraham, Abraham and Lot, The Birth and Offering of Isaac, The Marriage of Isaac, Esau and Jacob, Isaac Blessing His Sons, Jacob's Flight, The Birth and Rearing of Moses, The Call of Moses, Moses Before Pharaoh, The Exodus from Egypt.
From Old Testament: The Creation and Eden, The Fall, Cain and Abel, The Flood, The Call of Abraham, Abraham and Lot, The Birth and Offering of Isaac, The Marriage of Isaac, Esau and Jacob, Isaac Blessing His Sons, Jacob's Flight, The Birth and Upbringing of Moses, The Call of Moses, Moses Before Pharaoh, The Exodus from Egypt.
From New Testament: The Birth of Jesus, Jesus' Entry into Jerusalem, Jesus Suffering in the Garden of Gethsemane, Jesus' Death on the Cross, The Burial of Jesus, The Resurrection of Jesus, The Outpouring of the Holy Ghost. Instruction is exclusively oral.[Pg 110] Historical references are disregarded. Historical situations are frequently clarified by references to the history of civilization and geography. New phases of God's dealings with men and their attitudes toward Him are singled out and presented for consideration. Passages of Scripture and others from the catechism or hymns are treated in connection with the Bible stories as they are told.
From New Testament: The Birth of Jesus, Jesus' Entry into Jerusalem, Jesus Suffering in the Garden of Gethsemane, Jesus' Death on the Cross, The Burial of Jesus, The Resurrection of Jesus, The Outpouring of the Holy Spirit. Instruction is entirely verbal.[Pg 110] Historical references are ignored. Historical contexts are often explained with references to the history of civilization and geography. New aspects of God's interactions with humanity and their responses to Him are highlighted and considered. Scripture passages, along with other quotes from the catechism or hymns, are connected with the Bible stories as they are shared.
Class III. (Six half hour periods weekly.) Biblical history up to and including the time of Solomon, characteristic stories from the prophetic period, and selections of Scripture from the New Testament designated officially for study in reference to certain church holidays. Among the topics included we find: The Tower of Babel, God's Covenant with Abraham, The Visit of the Three Men, The Lord Visits Sodom and Gomorrah, Jacob Serving Laban, Jacob's Return, The Travel to Sinai, The Giving of the Law, The Unfaithfulness of the People, The Travels from Sinai to Jordan, The Death of Moses, Joshua Leading the People into Canaan, Gideon, Ruth, Samuel, Saul Becomes King, Saul Rejected, God Chooses David to be King, David and Jonathan, Saul Pursuing David, The Death of Saul, David Chosen to be King by the People, The Fall and Restitution of David, Absalom, The Last Days of David's Life, Solomon, Elias, Jonah, Daniel. The matter covered in Classes I and II is again taken up, to which the above is added in historical connection. To this material Biblical geography and cultural history are added as needed, while hymns, passages of Scripture, or selections from the catechism[Pg 111] are continually used. Through constant reviews the moral and religious contents from the various sources are connected into successive groups, each group centering around the life of some prominent Biblical character. Instruction is chiefly oral, though some reading from text is a privilege which may be indulged in as an aid. A certain amount of catechismal work may be assigned as home lessons.
Class III. (Six half-hour sessions weekly.) Biblical history up to and including the time of Solomon, key stories from the prophetic period, and selected Scriptures from the New Testament officially designated for study in relation to certain church holidays. Among the topics covered are: The Tower of Babel, God's Covenant with Abraham, The Visit of the Three Men, The Lord Visits Sodom and Gomorrah, Jacob Serving Laban, Jacob's Return, The Journey to Sinai, The Giving of the Law, The Unfaithfulness of the People, The Journey from Sinai to Jordan, The Death of Moses, Joshua Leading the People into Canaan, Gideon, Ruth, Samuel, Saul Becomes King, Saul Rejected, God Chooses David to be King, David and Jonathan, Saul Pursuing David, The Death of Saul, David Chosen as King by the People, The Fall and Restoration of David, Absalom, The Last Days of David's Life, Solomon, Elijah, Jonah, Daniel. The material covered in Classes I and II is revisited, with the above topics included in historical context. Additionally, Biblical geography and cultural history are incorporated as needed, while hymns, Scripture passages, or selections from the catechism[Pg 111] are used continuously. Through regular reviews, the moral and religious content from various sources is connected into successive groups, each focused around the life of a prominent Biblical character. Instruction is mostly oral, although some reading from the text may be included as a helpful resource. A certain amount of catechism work may be assigned as homework.
Second Division
Class IV. (Boys four hours, girls three hours, weekly.) New Testament history centering in the stories of Jesus' childhood, His miracles, and His easier parables. New stories taken up: The Birth of John the Baptist Foretold, The Birth of Jesus Foretold, The Birth of John the Baptist, Jesus Presented in the Temple, The Flight into Egypt, Appearance of John the Baptist, The Baptism of Jesus, Jesus is Tempted, The First Disciples Come to Jesus, The Marriage in Cana, Jesus Visits Nazareth, Jesus Choosing the Twelve Apostles, Jesus Heals the Centurion's Servant, The Death of John the Baptist, Jesus Healing the Palsied, Jesus Raising Jairus' Daughter, The Woman of Canaan, Parable of the Unmerciful Servant, The Good Samaritan, Jesus at the House of Martha and Mary, Parables of the Lost Sheep and the Lost Coin, Parable of the Prodigal Son, Dives and Lazarus, Healing of the Ten Lepers, Parable of the Publican and Pharisee, Parable of the Marriage of the King's Son, Easter, Pentecost. The extent to which details of stories, Biblical geography, cultural[Pg 112] history, and passages of Scripture or catechism are included is governed by the maturity and education of the children. In this class considerable attention is given to the reading of hymns and New Testament Scriptures from the four Gospels (elucidating obscure passages and difficult sentences), to connections between Bible stories and history, and to chronological sequence.
Class IV. (Boys four hours, girls three hours, weekly.) New Testament history focusing on stories from Jesus' childhood, His miracles, and His simpler parables. New stories covered include: The Birth of John the Baptist Foretold, The Birth of Jesus Foretold, The Birth of John the Baptist, Jesus Presented in the Temple, The Flight into Egypt, The Appearance of John the Baptist, The Baptism of Jesus, Jesus is Tempted, The First Disciples Come to Jesus, The Marriage at Cana, Jesus Visits Nazareth, Jesus Choosing the Twelve Apostles, Jesus Heals the Centurion's Servant, The Death of John the Baptist, Jesus Healing the Palsied, Jesus Raising Jairus' Daughter, The Woman of Canaan, Parable of the Unmerciful Servant, The Good Samaritan, Jesus at the House of Martha and Mary, Parables of the Lost Sheep and the Lost Coin, Parable of the Prodigal Son, Dives and Lazarus, Healing of the Ten Lepers, Parable of the Publican and Pharisee, Parable of the Marriage of the King's Son, Easter, Pentecost. The depth of details about stories, Biblical geography, cultural history, and passages from Scripture or catechism depends on the maturity and education of the children. In this class, significant focus is placed on the reading of hymns and New Testament Scriptures from the four Gospels (clarifying difficult passages and complex sentences), connections between Bible stories and history, and chronological order.
Class V. (Boys four hours, girls three hours, weekly.) Continued instruction in New Testament history, especially the parables of Jesus and the story of his passion and resurrection. To this is added the account of the founding of the first Christian church and its spread by the efforts of the chief apostles. The work includes the following new stories: Jesus and Nichodemus, Jesus and the Samaritan Woman, Jesus Commences to Speak in Parables, The Transfiguration of Jesus, Peter's Confession, The Man Born Blind, Jesus the Good Shepherd, The Raising of Lazarus, Jesus in the House of Zacchaeus, Jesus in Bethany, Parable of the Labourers in the Vineyard, Parable of the Ten Virgins, Washing of Feet, The Lord's Supper, Jesus in Gethsemane, Jesus Before the High Priest and the Sanhedrin, Jesus Before Pilate and Herod, Crucifixion of Jesus, Christ's Burial, The Resurrection, Jesus Appears to the Two Disciples on the Way to Emmaus, He Appears to the Disciples in Jerusalem, He Appears at the Sea of Tiberias, The Great Commission to the Disciples, His Ascension, The Outpouring of the Holy Ghost on Pentecost, The First Miracle and First Persecution, Stephen, The Ethiopian Eunuch, Saul, Cornelius, Paul Preaching the Gospel to the Gentiles.
Class V. (Boys four hours, girls three hours, weekly.) Continued lessons in New Testament history, specifically the parables of Jesus and the story of his passion and resurrection. This also includes the account of the founding of the first Christian church and its growth through the efforts of the main apostles. The curriculum features the following new stories: Jesus and Nicodemus, Jesus and the Samaritan Woman, Jesus Begins Speaking in Parables, The Transfiguration of Jesus, Peter's Confession, The Man Born Blind, Jesus the Good Shepherd, The Raising of Lazarus, Jesus in the House of Zacchaeus, Jesus in Bethany, Parable of the Laborers in the Vineyard, Parable of the Ten Virgins, Washing of Feet, The Last Supper, Jesus in Gethsemane, Jesus Before the High Priest and the Sanhedrin, Jesus Before Pilate and Herod, The Crucifixion of Jesus, The Burial of Christ, The Resurrection, Jesus Appears to the Two Disciples on the Way to Emmaus, He Appears to the Disciples in Jerusalem, He Appears at the Sea of Tiberias, The Great Commission to the Disciples, His Ascension, The Outpouring of the Holy Spirit on Pentecost, The First Miracle and First Persecution, Stephen, The Ethiopian Eunuch, Saul, Cornelius, Paul Preaching the Gospel to the Gentiles.
Bible reading, the catechism, Bible history, and hymns are studied as in former classes, but more intensively. Besides the catechism, passages of Scripture, containing great Christian and moral truths are to be impressed and memorized verbatim. Continuous reviews through the years enable the children to connect several stories into groups, and to acquire complete information regarding the life and work of Christ. A small instruction book is used. First part and Article I of the second part are studied.
Bible reading, the catechism, Bible history, and hymns are studied like in previous classes, but with more depth. Along with the catechism, students are expected to memorize verbatim passages of Scripture that contain important Christian and moral truths. Ongoing reviews throughout the years help the children link various stories together and gain a thorough understanding of the life and work of Christ. A small instruction book is used. The first part and Article I of the second part are studied.
Third Division
Class VI. (Four hours weekly.) Bible history and Old Testament taken up simultaneously—Bible reading and ecclesiastical history alternating. A deeper knowledge of sacred history is sought. Striking illustrations of God's plan of salvation operating among the Jews are given, designed to enable the children to appreciate the redemptive meaning of Old Testament history. Emphasis is placed on the period just preceding the time of Christ. New stories introduced: The Division of the Kingdom, Elisha, The Downfall of the Kingdom of Israel, Isaiah, Jeremiah, The Fall of the Kingdom of Judah, The Jews under Babylonian Captivity, Their Return from Captivity, The Last Four Hundred Years.
Class VI. (Four hours per week.) Bible history and the Old Testament will be studied at the same time—Bible reading and church history will alternate. We aim for a deeper understanding of sacred history. There will be powerful examples of God's plan for salvation at work among the Jews, helping the children to grasp the redemptive significance of Old Testament history. Special focus will be on the period right before the time of Christ. New stories will be introduced: The Division of the Kingdom, Elisha, The Downfall of the Kingdom of Israel, Isaiah, Jeremiah, The Fall of the Kingdom of Judah, The Jews under Babylonian Captivity, Their Return from Captivity, The Last Four Hundred Years.
Familiarity with Old Testament Scriptures and history, Biblical geography, and cultural history is to be gained. Articles II and III of the second part, and the third, fourth, and fifth parts of the instruction book are taken up.
Familiarity with the Old Testament Scriptures and its history, biblical geography, and cultural history will be developed. Articles II and III of the second part, along with the third, fourth, and fifth parts of the instruction book are covered.
Class VII. (Three hours weekly.) One Gospel—Matthew—is read connectedly and followed by a treatment of selected parts from the Acts of the Apostles in connection with the work of Biblical history in the fourth and fifth grades. All materials previously gathered from the various sources are again taken up, applied, and centered.
Class VII. (Three hours weekly.) One Gospel—Matthew—is read in sequence, followed by a focus on selected sections from the Acts of the Apostles, linking to the study of Biblical history in the fourth and fifth grades. All materials previously collected from various sources are revisited, applied, and consolidated.
Narratives relating to important periods of the church. Among them:—The Persecutions (under Nero, Polycarpus), The Victory of Christianity (Constantine), The Christian Ceremonies, Augustine, Hermits and Monks, The Spread of Christianity, The Popes, The Crusades, The Preparation for the Reformation, The Lutheran Reformation (Luther, the Jesuits, the Catholic Mission), The Lutheran Church in the Seventeenth and Eighteenth Centuries, in the Eighteenth and Nineteenth Centuries, The Mission, Bible Societies.
Narratives about significant periods in the church include: The Persecutions (under Nero, Polycarpus), The Victory of Christianity (Constantine), Christian Ceremonies, Augustine, Hermits and Monks, The Spread of Christianity, The Popes, The Crusades, The Preparation for the Reformation, The Lutheran Reformation (Luther, the Jesuits, the Catholic Mission), The Lutheran Church in the Seventeenth and Eighteenth Centuries, in the Eighteenth and Nineteenth Centuries, The Mission, Bible Societies.
The aim in this division is to give information regarding the development of the church in general, and of the Lutheran church in particular. Narratives are grouped around great central characters—Christian personages. A realization of the lofty aims of Christianity on the part of the children together with an appreciation of their duties and responsibilities as members of the Christian church is the intent. By means of an instruction book the main divisions of church history, general history, and the history of Norway are correlated. Information contained in the hymn book acquaints the children with the ceremonial order of the ecclesiastical year as well as with the contents and order[Pg 115] of the book itself. The study of previously memorized hymns and verses is emphasized and enlarged upon.
The goal of this section is to provide information about the development of the church overall, with a focus on the Lutheran church. Stories are organized around major central figures—Christian individuals. The aim is for children to understand the high ideals of Christianity and to appreciate their duties and responsibilities as members of the Christian church. Using an instruction book, the main parts of church history, general history, and the history of Norway are connected. Information found in the hymn book introduces the children to the structure of the church year and the content and organization of the book itself. The study of previously memorized hymns and verses is highlighted and expanded upon.
It is to be remembered that in Norway church and state are united. Religious and scholastic interests are under the direction of the Department of Ecclesiastical and Educational affairs. The minister of this department of State is one of the King's cabinet. Here we find one of the numerous attempts at the solution of the vexing question of moral instruction, or, to be more exact, religious instruction in the public schools. While the provisions for this teaching are not faultless, and though their course of instruction could not be adopted for use in America with its medley of religious prejudices, yet we must acknowledge that they are well adapted to the needs and desires of the people served. The citizenship of the country is homogenous religiously, almost universally Lutheran, and their traditions militate against any change in religious creed. The teaching of religion in the schools has been the practice for generations, the instruction is taken as a matter of course, and it exerts its beneficient influences upon all.
It’s important to remember that in Norway, church and state are joined together. Religious and educational interests fall under the Department of Ecclesiastical and Educational Affairs. The minister in this department is part of the King’s cabinet. This is one of the many attempts to tackle the challenging issue of moral education, or more specifically, religious education in public schools. While the framework for this teaching isn’t perfect, and the instructional methods wouldn’t work in America due to its diverse religious biases, we must recognize that they are well-suited to the needs and wishes of the population. The country’s citizens share a homogeneous religious background, almost entirely Lutheran, and their traditions resist changes in religious beliefs. Teaching religion in schools has been a long-standing practice; this instruction is taken for granted and positively influences everyone.
There are a number of important features of this moral instruction which press their claims for special mention, but we cannot discuss them all. A few, however, demand some attention. The statement of the proverb, that as the twig is bent so will the tree be inclined, has been borne out in practice times without number. Here, it seems to me, is one more illustration. Throughout their whole school life—that receptive, appropriating, formative period—the children have constantly before them ideals that are elevating, examples[Pg 116] that are inspiring, and admonitions that tend to create and develop within them an ambition to excel in beauty of character. That the morals of society are not kept more nearly pure by this procedure seems a psychological impossibility. Again a rather successful attempt is made to have the home and school cooperate along the lines of personal purity. In fact the home, the school, and the church join hands and supplement each other in all efforts in religious and moral training. True it is that striking examples of nobility of character, high ideals, and moral worth abound in profane history as well as in sacred, in secular life as well as in religious, in living characters as truly as in those of past ages, but the school system of Norway provides ample opportunity for presenting all of these things in connection with their regular instruction in the various subjects taught, and, in addition, furnishes particularized instruction which makes a specialty of moral and religious development. It seems imperative that, when these ennobling lessons are thus vividly presented, the powers of imitation and habit should combine in the creation of stronger and nobler characters.
There are several important aspects of this moral education that deserve special mention, but we can't cover them all. However, a few do warrant attention. The saying, "as the twig is bent, so the tree is inclined," has been proven true countless times. Here, I believe, is another example. Throughout their entire school experience—that receptive, absorbing, and formative stage—children are constantly exposed to uplifting ideals, inspiring examples, and guidance that fosters a desire to excel in character. It seems psychologically impossible that society's morals would not be kept relatively pure through this process. Moreover, there is a successful effort to have home and school work together to promote personal integrity. In fact, the home, school, and church collaborate and support each other in religious and moral education. It's true that there are many striking examples of noble character, high ideals, and moral value in both secular and sacred history, in everyday life as well as in religious contexts, and in characters from both modern times and the past. However, Norway's school system provides ample opportunity to showcase these aspects alongside regular curriculum subjects, and additionally offers specialized instruction focused on moral and spiritual growth. It seems essential that when these uplifting lessons are presented so vividly, the forces of imitation and habit come together to cultivate stronger and nobler individuals.
Nevertheless, when religious instruction is made a requirement, it too frequently becomes formal and literal rather than spiritual and lifegiving. That this great misfortune is the case in some of the secondary schools of Norway is an indictment which cannot be denied. However, in the primary schools the instruction is fruitful and important. As a consequence of these conditions the statement is common among many that in looking back over the years of religious instruction[Pg 117] they recall numerous happy instances of earnest, heartfelt prayer and Bible stories accompanied by intense feeling on the part of the teacher. Other experiences reveal the fact that some of the teaching profession had not the sincerity and feeling back of their instruction required in order to give vitality and meaning to the lessons presented.
Nevertheless, when religious education is made mandatory, it often becomes more formal and rigid instead of spiritual and life-affirming. The reality that this unfortunate situation exists in some secondary schools in Norway is a criticism that can't be ignored. However, in primary schools, the education is productive and significant. Because of these circumstances, many people reflect on their years of religious instruction[Pg 117] and remember numerous joyful moments of sincere, heartfelt prayers and Bible stories filled with the teacher's intense emotions. Other experiences show that some educators lacked the sincerity and passion essential to bring vitality and meaning to the lessons they taught.
The entire question of instruction in morals in our public schools is one of pressing importance. It is being agitated in many lands today and a solution is sorely needed. Were all classes of society united as to what should be included in this instruction the matter would adjust itself very readily. However, social conditions in a single nation are more or less diverse, and between different nations still greater breaks are to be found. In fact the ideals and conceptions of society are so varied that no one present system would suffice for all. Could a code of ethics be formulated which would meet universal approval then its adoption and use might be hoped for. Until then each nation must necessarily follow the plan which seems best adapted to its social requirements. As already stated, the people of Norway are nearly all adherents to the Lutheran creed so there are very few dissenters from the common rule. Provision is made in the law that those who do not adhere to the state church and object to receiving instruction in this particular line may, upon request of parent or guardian, be excused from such instruction.[23]
The entire question of instruction in morals in our public schools is one of pressing importance. It is being agitated in many lands today and a solution is sorely needed. Were all classes of society united as to what should be included in this instruction the matter would adjust itself very readily. However, social conditions in a single nation are more or less diverse, and between different nations still greater breaks are to be found. In fact the ideals and conceptions of society are so varied that no one present system would suffice for all. Could a code of ethics be formulated which would meet universal approval then its adoption and use might be hoped for. Until then each nation must necessarily follow the plan which seems best adapted to its social requirements. As already stated, the people of Norway are nearly all adherents to the Lutheran creed so there are very few dissenters from the common rule. Provision is made in the law that those who do not adhere to the state church and object to receiving instruction in this particular line may, upon request of parent or guardian, be excused from such instruction.[23]
Norwegian
Aim. It is the aim of the instruction in Norwegian to further the mental development of children, especially their linguistic ability. In this course of activity they should acquire:
Aim. The goal of teaching in Norwegian is to promote children's mental development, particularly their language skills. Through this program, they should gain:
(1) Efficiency in apprehending and assimilating what they hear or read, confident readiness in reading, plain articulation, and correct and natural accentuation.
(1) Being efficient at understanding and taking in what they hear or read, being ready and confident when reading, speaking clearly, and using proper and natural pronunciation.
(2) Efficiency in expressing themselves orally and in writing without making any serious errors in the common usage of language or the rules of composition.
(2) Being effective in expressing themselves both verbally and in writing without making serious mistakes in everyday language or the rules of writing.
(3) Efficiency in the use of the grammar of the mother-tongue which is necessary for the above measure of attainments.
(3) Effectiveness in using the grammar of the native language, which is essential for the above level of achievements.
First Division
Class I. (Boys twelve hours, girls eleven hours, weekly.) A suitable number (twelve or fifteen) of interesting children's stories are told and utilized for the special purposes of widening the circle of the children's imagination and developing in them ability in observation, conception, and expression. An effort is made to render the general contents of the stories lucid through explanations, while the features arousing special interest in the minds of the pupils are made the objects of more detailed conversation. An effort is made to train the children in correct, free, and easy expression in connected[Pg 119] sentences, and to develop in them the ability to rehearse their stories freely and connectedly.
Class I. (Boys attend for twelve hours, girls for eleven hours weekly.) A suitable number (twelve or fifteen) of engaging children's stories are shared and used to expand the children's imagination and enhance their skills in observation, understanding, and expression. Efforts are made to clarify the general content of the stories through explanations, while elements that spark particular interest in the students are discussed in more detail. There is a focus on teaching the children to express themselves correctly, confidently, and naturally in complete sentences, and to help them learn to recount their stories in a free and cohesive manner.
Reading. The aim is ability to read the primer (ABC-en) with assurance and in a clear tone, properly articulating and accenting each word and syllable.
Reading. The goal is to be able to read the primer (ABC-en) confidently and with a clear voice, properly enunciating and stressing each word and syllable.
Written exercises. The object of the written work is to teach the children to write words and simple sentences which have just been read orally or have been seen in the primer or on the blackboard.
Written exercises. The goal of the written work is to help children write words and simple sentences that they have just read aloud or have seen in the primer or on the board.
Class II. (Boys ten hours, girls eight hours, weekly.) Twenty or thirty of the most interesting and valuable selections (prose and poetry) contained in the reader are made the objects of special and thorough treatment. Comments, questions, elucidating explanations, and conversations are means employed in securing a vivid appreciation of the contents and in developing ability in their easy rehearsal. The other pieces are treated in a more cursory manner, only the larger views and the more general understanding of them being attempted.
Class II. (Boys ten hours, girls eight hours, weekly.) Twenty or thirty of the most engaging and valuable selections (prose and poetry) from the reader are given special and thorough attention. Discussions, questions, clarifying explanations, and conversations are used to foster a clear appreciation of the content and to develop an ability to easily summarize it. The other pieces are covered more briefly, focusing only on the broader themes and general understanding.
Special attention is given to having all readings slow with loud, plain, and correct articulation and proper accentuation. Habitual mistakes are carefully eliminated. Story telling is also a feature of the year's work.
Special attention is given to making sure all readings are slow, with clear, loud, and accurate articulation and proper emphasis. Common mistakes are carefully addressed. Storytelling is also an important part of the year's work.
Written exercises, made up of sentences and short parts of readings, conversations, or stories are given frequently and for short periods. Here the names of letters and spelling are attended to with great care.
Written exercises, consisting of sentences and brief excerpts from readings, conversations, or stories, are assigned often and for short durations. In this context, the names of letters and spelling are focused on very carefully.
Class III. (Boys eight hours, girls seven hours, weekly.) Twenty or thirty paragraphs from the reader are given special attention—the remainder[Pg 120] cursory. The plan of work is about the same as for Class II. Considerable attention is given to the rehearsing of the reading lesson by the pupils. Some reproductions are to be quite detailed and exact though they are not to be given in the exact words of the text. Still other selections receive more general treatment. A few of the most pleasing poems should be memorized. Greater readiness in slow and even reading with loud and clear expression and proper natural accentuation should be sought.
Class III. (Boys attend for eight hours, girls for seven hours weekly.) Special focus is given to twenty or thirty paragraphs from the reader, while the rest are covered more quickly[Pg 120]. The work plan is similar to that of Class II. Significant emphasis is placed on the students rehearsing the reading lesson. Some reproductions are expected to be quite detailed and accurate, though they shouldn't be word-for-word from the text. Other selections are treated more generally. A few of the most enjoyable poems should be memorized. We aim for smoother, more consistent reading with loud, clear expressions and proper natural emphasis.
Written exercises. Selections from the language work giving special and rather extended attention to spelling, punctuation, and grammatical constructions and forms. The teacher sets examples of correct punctuation, etc.
Written exercises. Selections from the language work that focus specifically and in detail on spelling, punctuation, and grammatical structures and forms. The teacher provides examples of correct punctuation, etc.
Second Division
Class IV. (Five hours weekly.) A select number (20-30) of pieces from the reader treated as in the former classes, though more exhaustively; and, in addition, quite a wide range of selections chosen for more cursory reading. A considerable amount of information regarding the topics treated and explanations of literary expressions should form important parts of the instruction in this class. Here, as in both preceding and succeeding classes, it should be the aim to have the children make their meanings plain when conversing upon the selections read, at least to the degree of their ability and development. Parts of former conversations on various topics should also be recalled and woven into their discussions.
Class IV. (Five hours weekly.) A select number (20-30) of pieces from the reader will be covered in more detail than in previous classes, along with a broader range of selections for quicker reading. A significant amount of information about the topics discussed and explanations of literary terms should be key parts of the instruction in this class. As in both the previous and following classes, the goal should be for the children to clearly express their understanding when talking about the selections they read, at least to the best of their ability and development. They should also recall parts of earlier conversations on various topics and incorporate them into their discussions.
Written exercises. These shall include features previously studied, and introduce more detailed and finer discriminations in grammatical usages and forms.
Written exercises. These will include previously studied features and introduce more detailed distinctions in grammatical usages and forms.
Class V. (Boys four hours, girls five hours, weekly.) Exhaustive study of a few selections and cursory reading in large quantities as before. Careful and abundant training in oral expression. Specific and detailed rehearsal of topics discussed in which an increasing amount of knowledge gained through study, experience, and thought is utilized. Short stories are read. Poems are memorized. Progress in clear and distinct articulation and easy and natural emphasis in harmony with refined speech is continuously a requirement.
Class V. (Boys four hours, girls five hours, weekly.) In-depth study of a few selections with some casual reading in larger amounts like before. Thorough and ample training in verbal expression. Detailed practice on topics discussed, utilizing the growing knowledge from study, experience, and reflection. Short stories are read. Poems are memorized. Continuous progress in clear and distinct speech and easy, natural emphasis that aligns with refined language is a constant requirement.
Written exercises. A continuation of former exercises and a considerable amount of copying, or the writing of abstracts of lesson content, especially during the second half year. Orthographic, grammatical, and rhetorical forms are entered into more exhaustively and their niceties urged. Through continued practice in preparing and writing compositions, extra work in copying, and special study of orthography and punctuation, the children, by the close of this their fifth year of schooling, should be quite capable in punctuation as well as spelling, though they should not be expected to spell and punctuate independently with accuracy.
Writing exercises. This builds on previous exercises and includes a lot of copying or summarizing lesson content, especially in the second half of the year. Students will engage more deeply with spelling, grammar, and writing style. Through regular practice in preparing and writing essays, additional work in copying, and focused study on spelling and punctuation, by the end of their fifth year of school, the children should be quite skilled in punctuation and spelling, although they should not be expected to spell and punctuate accurately on their own.
Third Division
Class VI. (Boys five hours, girls six hours, weekly.) Reading from a selected portion of the reader. Conversations, information, explanations, and linguistic[Pg 122] elucidations are to be entered into according to necessity. Increasing stress is here laid on the work of drawing out the thoughts, ideas, and knowledge of the pupils, and of inciting them to more independent, intellectual effort.
Class VI. (Boys five hours, girls six hours, weekly.) Reading from a chosen section of the reader. Discussions, information, explanations, and language clarifications are to be included as needed. There is a growing emphasis on encouraging students to express their thoughts, ideas, and knowledge, and to motivate them towards more independent intellectual efforts.
Written exercises. Continued as previously though introducing larger amounts of independently selected forms of expression and insisting on greater accuracy in punctuation. Letter writing is added.
Written exercises. Continued as before but now include more independently chosen forms of expression and emphasize better accuracy in punctuation. Letter writing is also included.
Class VII. (Five hours weekly.) Selections from the reader and supplementary reading from recommended books calculated to awaken, develop, and educate. Special attention given to the most important authors.
Class VII. (Five hours weekly.) Selections from the reader and extra reading from suggested books aimed at inspiring, developing, and educating. Special focus on the most significant authors.
Written exercises. Compositions on topics of interest, letter writing, business correspondence including applications, invoices, advertisements, and telegrams.
Written exercises. Compositions on topics of interest, writing letters, business correspondence including job applications, invoices, advertisements, and telegrams.
The methods employed in presenting the mother-tongue are quite plainly set forth in the foregoing outline. Though the content is not so specifically defined, the general lines are indicated in such a way as to give very adequate insight thereinto. Some of the methods of presentation seem somewhat cumbersome and rather antiquated. This impression is due chiefly to terminology. The actual work in the schoolrooms is flexible, free, and, as a rule, attractive. The latitude granted to the teachers in all their work admits of almost unlimited individual initiative. Many of their teachers are quite expert in the most modern methods.
The methods used to teach the mother tongue are clearly outlined above. While the content isn't defined in detail, the general direction provides a good understanding of it. Some of the presentation methods feel a bit clunky and outdated, primarily because of the terminology. The actual classroom work is flexible, open, and generally engaging. Teachers have a lot of freedom in their work, allowing for nearly unlimited individual creativity. Many of the teachers are quite skilled in the latest teaching methods.
The utilitarian idea which pervades every phase of their school work is especially noticeable in the teaching of their own language. In harmony with this idea, let[Pg 123] me call attention to the fact that, from the first, constant use is made of every attainment in both oral and written form. The oral work embraces the reading of the text, reading from the blackboard, and conversational exercises on the special topics being considered. Written work on the same lessons include copying of certain selections or parts of them and original expressions in regard to the contents of lessons read. In the advanced grades these written exercises become more and more extended and complicated until they amount to complete essays. Special attention is given to correct forms of expression and to the acquirement of habits of clear and distinct enunciation. The child, who from his earliest school days becomes habituated to exact pronunciations, is very liable—almost sure—to spell correctly; and, when constant use is made of the language in written exercises, the accepted and approved forms of expression become the fixed usages.
The practical approach that influences every aspect of their schoolwork is especially evident in how they teach their own language. In line with this approach, let[Pg 123] me point out that from the beginning, there is a consistent emphasis on using every skill in both spoken and written forms. The oral work includes reading the text, reading from the board, and engaging in conversations about the specific topics being studied. Written assignments on the same lessons consist of copying certain sections or parts and creating original responses related to the material read. In the higher grades, these written tasks become increasingly lengthy and complex until they develop into full essays. Special emphasis is placed on correct forms of expression and building habits of clear and distinct pronunciation. A child who is accustomed to precise pronunciations from their earliest school days is very likely—almost guaranteed—to spell correctly; and when the language is consistently used in writing assignments, the accepted and approved expressions become the standard practices.
Now their treatment of the mother-tongue is a combination of our reading, spelling, language lessons, grammar, rhetoric, and literature, all taught in their natural order as they arise through actual use. Incidentally, vast amounts of biography, history, geography, and natural science as well as writing are included. The richness of content and thoroughness of treatment deserve careful consideration in the writing of courses and still more in their application. Specialization in phases of a single subject in lower schools nearly always means waste of energy, scattering of forces, and disappointment in the end. On the contrary, unification and close correlation result in economy[Pg 124] of time and effort, and issue in more worthy attainments. The several fields of thought are already too much isolated from each other, and unless some guards are erected the individual fields also will be broken up and their distinctive phases so divorced from one another that their cooperative tendencies and values will become void and their relationships will be lost sight of. Norwegian is easily the preponderant study in Norway's schools, but, since it is so inclusive, it probably deserves the large amount of time devoted to it.
Now their approach to the mother tongue combines reading, spelling, language lessons, grammar, rhetoric, and literature, all taught in the natural order as they come up in everyday use. Additionally, a lot of biography, history, geography, and natural science, as well as writing, are incorporated. The richness of content and thoroughness of treatment warrant careful thought in course design and even more so in how they're applied. Specializing in specific areas of a single subject in elementary schools often leads to wasted energy, scattered focus, and ultimately disappointment. In contrast, integrating and closely aligning subjects results in more efficient use of time and effort, leading to greater accomplishments. The different fields of knowledge are already too isolated from one another, and if we don't take steps to address this, individual fields may also become fragmented, causing their unique aspects to become disconnected, which would nullify their collaborative benefits and erase their relationships. Norwegian is by far the main subject studied in Norway's schools, but since it covers so much, it likely merits the substantial time dedicated to it.
The long lists of supplementary readings now provided in our American schools exert a wholesome influence. Their constant revision and extension furnish materials which in the hands of skilled teachers, guarantee to the pupils sure knowledge and ability in the use of the mother-tongue. The limitless resources in English literature, America's lavish provision for higher education and professional training, and the freedom granted to our teaching profession leave the teachers of our language without excuse. The pupils studying English in America have a right to expect the best. One condition which frequently militates against first class work in this line is that school boards all too frequently fail to realize that being a teacher of English means more than merely hearing lessons so many times a week. A very large part of the most important work must be done aside from class exercises. If there be any teacher justified in asking a reduction in hours of instruction it is the teacher of the mother-tongue.
The long lists of extra readings now offered in our American schools have a positive impact. Their ongoing updates and additions provide materials that, in the hands of skilled teachers, ensure that students gain solid knowledge and skills in using their native language. The endless resources available in English literature, America's generous investment in higher education and professional training, and the freedom given to our teaching profession leave language teachers with no excuses. Students studying English in America have the right to expect the best. One issue that often hinders high-quality work in this area is that school boards frequently don't understand that being an English teacher involves more than just going over lessons a certain number of times each week. A significant portion of the most crucial work must happen outside of class activities. If there’s any teacher justified in requesting fewer instructional hours, it’s the teacher of the native language.
Mathematics
Aim. Readiness in the four mathematical operations in whole numbers, decimal numbers, and simple fractions, written and oral. Ability to independently solve various examples in the forms in which they generally appear in practical life, also examples in proportion and examples in percentage, together with problems of planes and solids. Course and mode of its execution as given in a text—Instruction in Mathematics (Regneundervisningen)—followed in all essentials.
Aim. Proficiency in the four basic math operations with whole numbers, decimals, and simple fractions, both written and spoken. The ability to independently solve different types of problems as they commonly occur in everyday life, including proportion and percentage problems, as well as issues related to planes and solids. The course and its implementation will follow the guidelines provided in the text—Instruction in Mathematics (Regneundervisningen)—in all key aspects.
First Division
Class I. (Boys five hours, girls four hours, weekly.) Through constant use of illustrative material (objects about the room, wooden pins, cubes, the children's fingers, etc.) the children are taught to gradually become acquainted with the numbers to ten, twenty, thirty, and on up to one hundred; and they are afforded continuous practice in reading, writing, and explaining the numbers, as well as in performing simple solutions in the four arithmetical operations. At the close of the year the children should be able to count to one hundred forward and backward. They must know how to manipulate the numbers from one to ten in adding to or subtracting from any number less than one hundred, and be able, by the assistance of the tables, to answer questions in multiplication (two's to five's). and some questions in division. Chief importance attaches to the ability of the children to use the numbers from one to thirty.
Class I. (Boys five hours, girls four hours, weekly.) Through consistent use of visual materials (objects in the room, wooden pins, cubes, the children's fingers, etc.), the kids gradually learn the numbers up to ten, twenty, thirty, and all the way to one hundred. They get ongoing practice in reading, writing, and explaining the numbers, as well as solving simple problems in the four basic math operations. By the end of the year, the children should be able to count to one hundred both forward and backward. They need to know how to work with numbers from one to ten to add or subtract any number less than one hundred, and with the help of charts, they should be able to answer questions about multiplication (from two to five) and some division problems. The primary focus is on the children's ability to use the numbers from one to thirty.
Class II. (Four hours weekly.) Acquaintance with and ability to read and write any number up to one million.
Class II. (Four hours weekly.) Familiarity with and the ability to read and write any number up to one million.
Mental arithmetic. Continuation of operations begun in Class I. When proficient in adding and subtracting units to and from one hundred, tens and units are taken up in the same way. Examples in easy multiplication, with occasional use of division, carried on throughout the year.
Mental arithmetic. Continuation of operations started in Class I. Once proficient in adding and subtracting units to and from one hundred, we will tackle tens and units in the same manner. Examples of simple multiplication, with occasional use of division, will be covered throughout the year.
Tablet work. Addition and subtraction of numbers up to one million. In the operations coin, measure, and weight denominations are used, and are illustrated by coins, measures, and weights.
Tablet work. Adding and subtracting numbers up to one million. In these operations, various denominations of coins, measures, and weights are used and illustrated by actual coins, measurements, and weights.
Class III. (Boys four hours, girls three hours, weekly.) Acquaintance with the numeral system up to and including millions. Continuous practice in reading, writing, and using numbers.
Class III. (Boys four hours, girls three hours, weekly.) Introduction to the numeral system up to and including millions. Ongoing practice in reading, writing, and using numbers.
Mental operations. Addition and subtraction of numbers up to one hundred continued. Thereafter extend the numbers as far as the children can use them with certainty and rapidity. Multiplication of numbers up to one hundred by units.
Mental operations. Continued addition and subtraction of numbers up to one hundred. After that, increase the numbers as far as the children can handle them confidently and quickly. Multiplication of numbers up to one hundred by single digits.
Tablet work. More work in addition and subtraction going farther than to numbers with six ciphers. Multiplication of numbers with many ciphers by multipliers having one or more ciphers.
Tablet work. More work in addition and subtraction going beyond numbers with six digits. Multiplying numbers with many digits by multipliers that have one or more digits.
Second Division
Class IV. (Boys four hours, girls three hours, weekly.) Division with divisors having one or more[Pg 127] ciphers. Separation of numbers into their individual factors. Finding of the least common multiple. After this a thorough drill in the four arithmetical operations with whole numbers—old and new exercises.
Class IV. (Boys four hours, girls three hours, weekly.) Division with divisors that have one or more[Pg 127] zeros. Breaking down numbers into their individual factors. Finding the least common multiple. After this, a comprehensive practice session in the four basic math operations with whole numbers—both new and old exercises.
Mental and tablet exercises in closest relation to each other. In all mental operations, here or later, rapid and positive use should be made of the easier examples before the harder ones are fumbled or handled with uncertainty.
Mental and tablet exercises are closely related to each other. In all mental tasks, whether now or later, it's important to use the easier examples quickly and confidently before struggling with the more difficult ones.
Class V. (Two hours weekly.) After the necessary preparation, practice in the three operations with decimal numbers. In connection with the consideration of plane surfaces the children should be given practice in measuring parallelograms, triangles, irregular quadrangles and many-sided surfaces—triangles should predominate.
Class V. (Two hours weekly.) After the necessary preparation, practice in the three operations with decimal numbers. Along with learning about plane surfaces, the kids should practice measuring parallelograms, triangles, irregular quadrilaterals, and multi-sided shapes—triangles should be the main focus.
Mental and tablet exercises parallel each other and are in intimate relation.
Mental and tablet exercises go hand in hand and are closely connected.
Third Division
Class VI. (Three hours weekly.) Preparatory practice in common fractions together with addition and subtraction of fractions having a common denominator and others which can easily be reduced to a common denominator. Multiplication and division using or including fractions. Further development with mental operations growing out of and in connection with tablet work.
Class VI. (Three hours a week.) Introductory practice in basic fractions, including addition and subtraction of fractions with a common denominator, as well as those that can be easily converted to a common denominator. Multiplication and division involving fractions. Additional practice with mental math related to and connected with tablet exercises.
Class VII. (Three hours weekly.) Percentage including interest, rebate, and discount. The calculating[Pg 128] of cubes, prisms, pyramids, circles, cylinders, cones; also shortened pyramids, cones, and cylinders.
Class VII. (Three hours weekly.) Percentage that includes interest, rebates, and discounts. The calculations of cubes, prisms, pyramids, circles, cylinders, and cones; also truncated pyramids, cones, and cylinders.
After this a general review so far as time admits.
After this, we'll do a general review as time allows.
Simple arithmetical operations occupy the entire field during the earlier years. The elementary algebraic forms and methods of solution are introduced relatively early, and minor geometric relations and operations are presented during the last (seventh) year of the lower schools. These latter features are radically different from our general procedure in the United States. We are in the habit of presenting the various mathematical subjects one at a time, completing one before another is considered to any extent whatever. For example, arithmetic is taken up and gone through, while parts of geometry and algebra which would be great aids in some of the arithmetical solutions are studiously avoided or excluded until the formal study of that particular subject is finally begun. The people of Norway, on the contrary, enter the larger field of mathematics and, in a more rational manner—a more psychological way—utilize available processes and forms at every opportunity. The phases of mathematics are not specialized into isolation but coordinated into a working unity. Instead of studying one subject throughout its intricacies and side issues before admitting consideration of other phases of mathematics, they make it the rule to utilize the elemental factors of the various mathematical subjects in every way possible. They give recognition to the simpler and more fundamental principles and operations regardless of the special phase of the subject to which they belong,[Pg 129] and use the entire product as groundwork for succeeding steps in the science. In this way parts of algebra and geometry become valuable contributing preliminaries to higher arithmetical operations.
Simple math operations dominate the early years. Basic algebraic concepts and problem-solving methods are introduced fairly early, while some minor geometry concepts and operations are covered in the last (seventh) year of primary school. These latter aspects are significantly different from our general approach in the United States. We typically teach various math subjects one at a time, completing one before moving on to the next. For instance, we focus solely on arithmetic while avoiding or excluding parts of geometry and algebra that could assist with arithmetic solutions until we officially begin studying those subjects. In contrast, the people of Norway dive into the broader field of mathematics and, in a more logical way—more aligned with how people think—make use of relevant processes and concepts whenever possible. The different areas of mathematics are not taught in isolation but are instead combined into a cohesive whole. Rather than delving into each subject's complexities and details before considering other areas of math, they make it a point to utilize the basic elements of various math topics in every way they can. They acknowledge simpler, fundamental principles and operations, no matter where they fit into a specific topic, and leverage the entire body of knowledge as a foundation for further steps in the discipline. This method positions parts of algebra and geometry as valuable precursors to more advanced arithmetic operations.[Pg 129]
The texts used by the pupils are little more than a series of exercises. All teaching is done by the teacher and the texts are arranged in such a way that the children may have opportunity to become skilled in the principles evolved in class through application of them in the long lists of problems in their texts. Very little blackboard is provided for the pupils' use, hence but little blackboard work is accomplished. Each room has a small board on which the teacher of a pupil may go through solutions. Never have I seen more than one at a time working at the blackboard. While the limited use of blackboards generally calls for an increased amount of dependence upon intellectual activity and consequent increase in mental alertness, the free use of blackboards relieves the mind of unnecessary burdens which may as well be borne by crayon, and thus provides for the higher centers a freer activity in pushing on the quest for the unknown.
The materials used by the students are mostly just a series of exercises. The teacher does all the instruction, and the texts are structured so that kids have the chance to practice the principles learned in class through working on the long lists of problems in their books. There is very little blackboard space available for the students to use, so not much blackboard work gets done. Each classroom has a small board where a student's teacher can go over solutions. I've never seen more than one student at a time working at the blackboard. While the limited use of blackboards usually means students rely more on their mental skills and stay more alert, having more freedom to use the blackboards can take some pressure off the mind. This way, they can focus more on advancing their understanding without unnecessary distractions.
Geography
Aim. To obtain (1) A somewhat complete acquaintance with the fatherland; its conditions, commerce, manner of life. (2) Acquaintance with the geography of Europe, especially the countries to the north and the other longer civilized countries. (3) A view of the different continents and a closer acquaintance[Pg 130] with lands and places which are of greatest importance to the fatherland. (4) Knowledge of the most important features of physical and mathematical geography.
Aim. To gain (1) a fairly complete understanding of the homeland; its conditions, trade, and way of life. (2) Familiarity with the geography of Europe, especially the northern countries and other long-established civilizations. (3) An overview of the different continents and a closer understanding[Pg 130] of the lands and locations that are most significant to the homeland. (4) Knowledge of the key aspects of physical and mathematical geography.
First Division
Class II. (Boys three hours, girls two hours, weekly.) With continuous reference to local geography and places known to the children, the pupils are brought to understand geographical forms and relations in general. Special attention is given to charts and maps. Instruction begins with drawings (on blackboard and tablets) of the schoolroom; then extends to schoolgrounds, to the immediate surroundings with streets and some of the more important buildings; and then to the entire city with its environs, etc., etc. The children should become acquainted with the more important features of topography, soil, valleys, plains, ridges, mountains, seas, fjords, rivers, brooks, seasons, day and night, rising and setting of planets (sun, moon, and stars), flora and fauna, altitude, sea level, etc. From familiarity with the city and its surroundings the work extends to the entire fatherland which is considered in an elementary fashion. Herein are included elementary studies of coast line, principal systems of valleys, and location and size of cities.
Class II. (Boys three hours, girls two hours, weekly.) With a continuous focus on local geography and places familiar to the children, the students learn about geographical features and relationships in general. Special attention is given to charts and maps. Instruction starts with drawings (on the blackboard and tablets) of the classroom; then moves to the school grounds, the immediate surroundings including streets and some of the more important buildings; and then to the entire city and its outskirts, etc., etc. The children should become familiar with significant aspects of topography, soil, valleys, plains, ridges, mountains, seas, fjords, rivers, streams, seasons, day and night, the rise and set of celestial bodies (sun, moon, and stars), plants and animals, altitude, sea level, etc. From their knowledge of the city and its surroundings, the learning extends to the entire country, which is explored in a basic way. This includes introductory studies of coastlines, major valley systems, and the location and size of cities.
Map drawing of small localities.
Map of small local areas.
Class III. (Two hours weekly.) The map of Europe. Beginning with the fatherland, including its location with reference to other lands and seas as well[Pg 131] as its relations thereto, enter into a study of other European countries in the order in which they would naturally be entered if touring from the fatherland. Subdivisions of the sea and land, also cities, railways, canals, rivers, and mountains are to be studied. Pictures are to be used in illustration. By the use of globes and other illustrative material, the discussion may be extended to other parts of the world. Each of the several divisions of the earth is to be treated in an elementary manner. Everything is to be outlined or indicated on the maps and charts—first by the teacher and later by the pupils.
Class III. (Two hours weekly.) The map of Europe. Starting with the home country, including its location in relation to other lands and seas as well[Pg 131] as its connections with them, we will explore other European countries in the order they would be visited if traveling from the home country. We will study the subdivisions of land and sea, along with cities, railways, canals, rivers, and mountains. Illustrative pictures will be used. By using globes and other visual aids, the discussion can be expanded to other parts of the world. Each area of the earth will be addressed in a simple way. Everything will be outlined or marked on the maps and charts—first by the teacher and then by the students.
Second Division
Class IV. (One hour weekly.) On the foundation of what was done in Class III the work shall be extended to the outlying divisions of Europe—Norway, Sweden, Denmark, The British Isles, France, Spain, Portugal, Italy, Russia. The study of maps is emphasized both for review and new work. Every land is considered with reference to the fatherland, other known lands, the equator, and the poles. Attention confined to typical aspects: description of a typical city, a manufacturing center, etc., special variations in climate, flora and fauna, chief natural scenery, commercial activities, products and conditions of the citizens. Readings on geographical topics are correlated with picture illustrations. Details and illustrations utilized as in Class III.
Class IV. (One hour weekly.) Building on what was covered in Class III, the focus will expand to the surrounding regions of Europe—Norway, Sweden, Denmark, the British Isles, France, Spain, Portugal, Italy, and Russia. Emphasis will be placed on studying maps for both review and new material. Each country will be examined in relation to our homeland, other familiar countries, the equator, and the poles. The focus will be on typical elements: describing a typical city, a manufacturing hub, etc., along with specific variations in climate, plants and animals, main natural landscapes, commercial activities, products, and living conditions of the people. Readings on geographical subjects will be paired with picture illustrations. Details and illustrations will be used as in Class III.
Class V. (One hour weekly.) Holland, Belgium, Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Hungary, and the[Pg 132] Balkan peninsula are considered after the plan used in Class IV. After these European countries, foreign countries are discussed. Study and instruction in this class is in accord with the outlines of work in previous classes though more exhaustive and minute. India, China, the large islands in the Pacific Ocean, North Africa with its Sahara, Central Africa, The United States of America, Australia, etc., are also considered.
Class V. (One hour weekly.) The countries of Holland, Belgium, Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Hungary, and the[Pg 132] Balkan peninsula are studied following the plan used in Class IV. After covering these European nations, we will discuss other countries around the world. The study and instruction in this class follow the outlines of previous classes but are more in-depth and detailed. We will also explore India, China, the major islands in the Pacific Ocean, North Africa including the Sahara, Central Africa, the United States, Australia, and more.
Third Division
Class VI. (One hour weekly.) The geography of the fatherland is gone through thoroughly with the aim of imparting to the children a rather complete knowledge of their country's nature, commerce, and life in its various localities. The chief points considered are: coast line, surface, water channels, climate—east and west—boundaries, inhabitants, life of the people, political divisions. This is to be constantly correlated with what has been learned previously of other European countries. Map drawing in detail. Review of former work.
Class VI. (One hour weekly.) The geography of the homeland is explored in depth to give the children a comprehensive understanding of their country's geography, trade, and life in different regions. The main topics covered include: coastline, terrain, waterways, climate—both east and west—borders, population, lifestyle, and political divisions. This will be consistently linked to what they've previously learned about other European countries. Detailed map drawing. Review of past work.
Class VII. (One hour weekly.) The more important features of mathematical and physical geography are presented, being continuously illustrated by charts, maps, globes, astronomical plates, etc. The horizon, earth formations, zones, yearly and daily rotations, geographical breadth and length; the moon, its phases; the planets, etc., are important topics for study. Others are positions of continents and oceans with reference to each other, climate and physical features[Pg 133] of the earth, the air, winds, changes in temperature, movements of the sea, the more important ocean streams (Gulf and Polar streams), etc. Throughout the study constant connections should be made between what is known in geography, natural history, and nature study.
Class VII. (One hour weekly.) This class covers key aspects of mathematical and physical geography, consistently illustrated with charts, maps, globes, astronomical images, and more. The topics include the horizon, Earth's formations, zones, daily and yearly rotations, geographical latitude and longitude, the moon and its phases, and the planets. Other important subjects are the positions of continents and oceans relative to one another, climate and physical characteristics of the Earth, the atmosphere, winds, temperature changes, ocean movements, and the major ocean currents (like the Gulf Stream and Polar streams). Throughout the course, students should continuously connect their knowledge from geography, natural history, and nature study.[Pg 133]
The outline indicates both thoroughness and a close correlation with related fields of work. Beginning with the well-known in geography they gradually widen their horizon and establish connections with the more remote parts of the earth until the children obtain a moderately accurate appreciation and knowledge of this branch of study and get a view of its intricate relations with life and human activity. While the work of the course is generally characterized by thoroughness, their study of localities outside of Europe is simply a skimming over or a skipping glance.
The outline shows both depth and a strong link to related areas of study. Starting with well-known geographical concepts, they slowly broaden their perspective and make connections with more distant parts of the world until the students gain a reasonably accurate understanding and knowledge of this subject and see its complex relationships with life and human activity. While the course work is generally marked by thoroughness, their exploration of locations outside of Europe is just a quick overview or a passing glance.
To be sure time is insufficient to enable them to exhaust all opportunities; but, it would seem more consistent with their general idea of concentrating on matters which directly concern the fatherland and its subjects, did they bring the young into a more intimate acquaintance with America and a fuller appreciation of what America really means to Norway and Norwegians. Very few Norsemen are without vital interests here. Nearly all, it seems, have immediate relatives or very dear friends who have migrated from the native land and have established homes in the United States. It appears that it would be important for them to follow the path of their migrating brethren and acquaint themselves more fully with the geography[Pg 134] of America. Its life, topography, commerce, and other distinctive features would add to their geography a chapter of unsurpassed values.
Time may be too short for them to take advantage of all opportunities, but it seems more in line with their general idea of focusing on issues that directly affect the homeland and its people if they introduced the younger generation to a closer understanding of America and a deeper appreciation of what America truly represents for Norway and Norwegians. Very few Norwegians are without significant interests here. Almost all of them seem to have immediate relatives or very close friends who have moved from their homeland and established lives in the United States. It seems important for them to follow the path of their migrating peers and become more familiar with the geography[Pg 134] of America. Understanding its life, landscapes, commerce, and other unique aspects would provide their geography with a chapter of unmatched value.
The work which is done is commendable for many reasons. The many-sided views obtained by varied methods of attack are rich and meaningful. Every pupil is ready with a full discussion in response to a question relating to their own country. Furthermore, they are informed with reference to the relationships existing between each country studied and the fatherland. These have been clearly pointed out. The perspective obtained through the study of physical and mathematical geography affords richer meaning to every day of life as well as to all the phenomena of nature.
The work being done is commendable for many reasons. The diverse perspectives gained through different approaches are rich and meaningful. Every student is prepared with a thorough discussion in response to questions about their own country. Furthermore, they understand the relationships between each studied country and their homeland. These connections have been clearly highlighted. The insights gained from studying physical and mathematical geography provide a deeper understanding of everyday life and all the phenomena of nature.
History
Aim. The chief aim of instruction in history is to inspire the children's historic instincts and love for their country and people. In an effort to obtain this the following information is imparted: (1) A somewhat connected knowledge of the history of the fatherland together with the fundamental tendencies of the social order. (2) Acquaintance with the most significant incidents in general history.
Aim. The main goal of teaching history is to inspire children's natural curiosity about the past and their love for their country and its people. To achieve this, the following information is provided: (1) A somewhat cohesive understanding of the nation's history along with the basic principles of the social structure. (2) Familiarity with the most important events in general history.
First Division
Class III. (Two hours weekly.) Selected narratives from the history of the fatherland. The collection of stories includes the following: Harald the[Pg 135] Fair Haired, Haakon the Good, Haakon Jarl, Olaf Trygveson, Olaf the Holy, Sverre Sigurdson, Haaken the Aged, Margaret and Albert, Christian the Second, Christian the Fourth, Tordenskjold, The Years 1807-1814, The Time of Pirates, Kristian August, Norway in 1814, Kristian Fredrik, Eidsvold, 17th of May, Norway's decennial celebration.
Class III. (Two hours weekly.) Selected stories from our national history. The collection includes the following: Harald the Fair-Haired, Haakon the Good, Haakon Jarl, Olaf Trygveson, Olaf the Holy, Sverre Sigurdson, Haaken the Aged, Margaret and Albert, Christian the Second, Christian the Fourth, Tordenskjold, The Years 1807-1814, The Time of Pirates, Kristian August, Norway in 1814, Kristian Fredrik, Eidsvold, May 17th, Norway's decennial celebration.
The stories are presented orally and are so detailed that the children get clear pictures of persons and incidents. The material of instruction is centered about particular and important persons and incidents in order to give them greater fixity. The pupils rehearse the stories they have been taught. Historic poems and songs of the fatherland which refer especially to people or incidents are studied in connection with the history. The material received through instruction in geography during the former year is utilized as groundwork in building up and enriching the historical ideas of the fatherland. The more important phases of social institutions are presented in a way suited to the capacity of the pupils. As the stories proceed, an attempt is made to awaken a degree of appreciation of their historical sequence.
The stories are shared verbally and are so detailed that the kids can easily picture the people and events. The teaching material focuses on specific and significant people and events to help them remember better. The students practice the stories they've learned. Historical poems and songs from the homeland that refer especially to individuals or events are studied alongside the history. The knowledge gained from geography lessons in the previous year is used as a foundation to build and enhance their understanding of their homeland's history. The key aspects of social institutions are presented in a way that is appropriate for the students’ understanding. As the stories unfold, there is an effort to encourage an appreciation for their historical order.
Second Division
Class IV. (Two hours weekly.) Stories and descriptions regarding general history centering about the following points or topics: Ancient world kingdoms, Greeks, Romans, Germans, Norse, Papacy, great discoveries and inventions. Treatment here is[Pg 136] similar to that given in Class III. Stories, anecdotes and pictures add life to regular routine. Stories of the fatherland are presented in very brief form and are given in order to effect connection with general events in world history. Here again geography is made the groundwork of history.
Class IV. (Two hours weekly.) Stories and descriptions about general history focusing on the following topics: ancient world kingdoms, Greeks, Romans, Germans, Norse, the Papacy, and significant discoveries and inventions. The approach is[Pg 136] similar to that used in Class III. Stories, anecdotes, and illustrations bring energy to the usual routine. Brief accounts of the fatherland are shared to connect with major events in world history. Once again, geography serves as the foundation for history.
Class V. (One hour weekly.) Work carried on as previously. Narratives of events chiefly during the time from the Reformation to the French Revolution.
Class V. (One hour weekly.) Work continues as before. Stories of events mainly from the time of the Reformation to the French Revolution.
Central features studied: Luther and the time of the Reformation (Luther's childhood and youth, Karl V., extension of the Reformation, and the Thirty Years' War), the period of absolute monarchy, the time preceding the Revolution, science and discovery. Presentation of topics the same as previously given. Here is included also a considerable amount of culture history, descriptions from which are given in such a way that life among the higher classes, as well as among the oppressed, may be presented and appreciated.
Central features studied: Luther and the time of the Reformation (Luther's childhood and youth, Charles V, the spread of the Reformation, and the Thirty Years' War), the period of absolute monarchy, the time leading up to the Revolution, science and discovery. The presentation of topics remains the same as before. This also includes a significant amount of cultural history, presented in a way that allows for an appreciation of life among both the upper classes and the oppressed.
Third Division
Class VI. (One hour weekly.) Work continued as heretofore. Stories from the time of the Revolution down to modern times. Among the materials used are the following topics: time of the Revolution, 1789-1800; Napoleon, 1800-1815; July and February Revolutions, Napoleon III., Germany's consolidation, discoveries and inventions, delineations of the history of civilization, and the advance of modern times in industries and means for communication.
Class VI. (One hour weekly.) Work continued as before. Stories from the time of the Revolution to modern times. The topics covered include: the time of the Revolution, 1789-1800; Napoleon, 1800-1815; the July and February Revolutions; Napoleon III; the unification of Germany; discoveries and inventions; an overview of the history of civilization; and the progress of modern times in industries and communication methods.
Class VII. (Two hours weekly.) The history of the fatherland gone through in great detail and in a definitely connected manner. All work based upon what has been learned in former classes. The following are among the more important points considered: Norway in ancient times, Norway organized into a Christian kingdom, Norway's time of prosperity, Norway under internal wars, Norway under later kings of Swedish family and descent, Norway in union with Sweden and Denmark, Norway united to Denmark until 1661, time of absolute monarchy (1661-1814), Norway in 1814, Norway since 1814. In addition, the chief features of social institutions, the condition of the state, rights and obligations of citizens, state administration, communal affairs, and similar topics are discussed at some length.
Class VII. (Two hours weekly.) The history of our country is explored in depth and in a well-organized way. All work builds on what has been learned in previous classes. The following are some of the key topics covered: Ancient Norway, the establishment of Norway as a Christian kingdom, Norway's period of prosperity, internal conflicts in Norway, Norway under later Swedish kings, Norway in union with Sweden and Denmark, Norway's union with Denmark until 1661, the period of absolute monarchy (1661-1814), Norway in 1814, and Norway since 1814. Additionally, the key features of social institutions, the state’s condition, citizens' rights and obligations, state administration, local affairs, and similar subjects are discussed in detail.
By the assistance of a suitable text the presentation should impart to the pupils a moderately connected knowledge of the historical development of the fatherland up to the present time. The children should obtain clear insight into the inner historic situations; persons, events, and specific dates standing as contributors in the background. Historic sagas and related selections are used in connection. While attention centers in the history of the fatherland, important contemporary events in general history are kept constantly before the eyes, frequent reference being made to the studies in Classes IV-VI.
By using an appropriate text, the presentation should provide students with a reasonably connected understanding of the historical development of their country up to the present. The children should gain a clear perspective on the significant historical contexts; key figures, events, and specific dates serve as contributors in the background. Historical stories and related selections are used together. While the focus is on the history of their country, important contemporary events in world history are consistently highlighted, with frequent references made to the studies in Grades IV-VI.
The stated aims, enumerated means, and outlined methods of presentation afford a fairly good idea of the work done in the study of history throughout the[Pg 138] primary schools. It has been observed, perhaps by many, that instruction in history has been preceded by one year's study of geography, that the geography of the several countries precedes the history of the peoples inhabiting them, and that geographical appreciation is utilized as a foundation for instruction in history.
The stated goals, listed resources, and explained presentation methods give a pretty clear idea of the work done in the study of history in the [Pg 138] primary schools. It has been noted, perhaps by many, that history instruction follows a year of geography study, that the geography of different countries comes before the history of the people who live there, and that understanding geography is used as a basis for teaching history.
The main purposes of instruction in history are: development of patriotic and loyal citizens, intellectual training, and cultural information. The prized traits of citizenship are read, sung, and drilled into the daily life of every child in the entire country, and these impressions are fixed so definitely that they live through generations, even when the subjects are transplanted to foreign soils.
The main purposes of teaching history are: developing patriotic and loyal citizens, providing intellectual training, and sharing cultural knowledge. The valued traits of citizenship are read, sung, and practiced in the daily lives of every child across the country, and these lessons are so deeply ingrained that they carry on through generations, even when the individuals move to other countries.
Story telling in the beginnings of history instruction affords an immediate appeal both to the children's interest in personal activities and to their liking for that form of instruction. The characters whose biographies are delineated are the men around whom national activities have centered. The bits of history related are of epoch-making incidents from the earliest times down to the present. Being presented through biography they have a personal touch and flavor which secure vital and immediate responses from the children.
Storytelling in the early stages of history teaching captures children's interest in personal stories and their preference for this teaching style. The characters featured in these biographies are the individuals around whom significant national events have revolved. The historical details shared include major events from ancient times up to the present day. Since these stories are told through personal biographies, they have a relatable and engaging quality that encourages strong and immediate reactions from the children.
There are still other features worthy of consideration. Incidents of historic interest are not only pointed out and studied but the scenes of these are actually visited. Here again we see the definite way in which history and geography are correlated. Too, since Norway has been[Pg 139] favored by the gift of many literary geniuses, most historic characters and events have found place in literary classics. All along the way, songs, poems, and dramas having relation to national history are brought into the instruction in a living, real way. The children are given abundant opportunity to attain proficiency in relating historic events with information gained from the fields of geography, language, and literature.
There are still other features worth considering. Incidents of historic interest are not only highlighted and studied, but their actual locations are visited. Here again, we see the clear connection between history and geography. Also, since Norway has produced many literary geniuses, most historical figures and events are represented in literary classics. Throughout the journey, songs, poems, and plays related to national history are incorporated into the instruction in a vibrant, engaging way. The children have plenty of opportunities to become skilled at linking historical events with knowledge gained from geography, language, and literature.
Nature Study
Aim. Instruction in nature study attempts to awaken the children's interest in and regard for nature in all its expressions, and to exercise their thought powers and judgment so as to enable them to find or make connections between cause and effect. In order that their attention be centered upon the suitability to purpose, conformity to law, harmony and beauty, the children should have their thought directed to nature's creation and maintenance. Finally, the children through this instruction should obtain a conception of how mankind attempts to control nature and to utilize its strength in the promotion of human welfare.
Aim. Teaching nature study aims to spark children's interest in and appreciation for nature in all its forms, while also exercising their thinking skills and judgment to help them make connections between cause and effect. To focus their attention on suitability for purpose, adherence to natural laws, harmony, and beauty, children should be guided to observe how nature is created and maintained. Ultimately, through this instruction, children should understand how people try to control nature and use its power to improve human well-being.
Materials for instruction. Our bodily structure in the large or whole, as necessary to an understanding of the general conditions in man's physical life and as fundamental to instruction in health. The more important native and foreign animals and plants; their growth and life, together with their importance in nature's economy. The natural forces which have greatest significance for organic life and for man's efficiency.
Materials for instruction. Our body as a whole is essential for understanding the basic conditions of human physical life and is fundamental to health education. We will cover important native and foreign animals and plants, their growth and life, along with their significance in nature's economy. We will also examine the natural forces that are most important for organic life and human effectiveness.
Methods of instruction. Natural objects or representations of them in model or drawing, and operations of natural forces illustrated by experiments observed and written up. The accuracy of observations are tested by the pupil's oral or written accounts of what they see. Conditions and things familiar to the children in common life are the ones to be used above all others.
Methods of instruction. Natural objects or representations of them in models or drawings, along with demonstrations of natural forces through experiments that are observed and documented. The accuracy of observations is evaluated through the students' oral or written descriptions of what they see. Conditions and things that are familiar to the children in everyday life should be prioritized above all others.
Class IV. (One hour weekly.) Short synopsis over our bodily structure (four hours). Present by oral instruction and through illustrative materials the skeleton, muscles, digestive organs, skin, circulation, respiratory organs. The same points may also be studied as they appear in the lower animals.
Class IV. (One hour weekly.) Brief overview of our body’s structure (four hours). Introduce through spoken instruction and visual aids the skeleton, muscles, digestive organs, skin, circulation, and respiratory organs. The same topics can also be examined as they appear in lower animals.
Mammals. (Twenty hours.) Horse, ass, cow, sheep, goat, reindeer, deer, elk, camel, cat, wild-cat, lion, tiger, dog, wolf, fox, marten, bear, swine, elephant, seal, whale, hare, rabbit, squirrel, rat, beaver, anteater, bat, monkey.
Mammals. (Twenty hours.) Horse, donkey, cow, sheep, goat, reindeer, deer, moose, camel, cat, wildcat, lion, tiger, dog, wolf, fox, marten, bear, pig, elephant, seal, whale, hare, rabbit, squirrel, rat, beaver, anteater, bat, monkey.
Fowls. (Ten hours.) Tame chickens, woodcock, sparrow, yellow hammer, bullfinch, lark, swallow, starling, dove, cuckoo, parrot, hawk, falcon, eagle, owl, heron, stork, duck, goose, swan, gull, ostrich, and others.
Birds. (Ten hours.) Domesticated chickens, woodcock, sparrow, yellowhammer, bullfinch, lark, swallow, starling, dove, cuckoo, parrot, hawk, falcon, eagle, owl, heron, stork, duck, goose, swan, gull, ostrich, and others.
Instruction begins with typical animal forms which are illustrated by charts or drawings when the stuffed or mounted specimens are not at hand. The children are required to depend upon themselves as much as possible in finding out individual characteristics in the bodily structures of the chosen forms. Then bodily structure and habits are related, as are also their homes, food, color, and environment. Finally, the animal's[Pg 141] meaning in the economy of nature and its value to man are the points studied. Along with the careful study of a typical form, related animals are examined in a more general and cursory manner. The children are taught to remember that while they have dominion over the animals they are at the same time under obligations to them. Disregard of these duties is looked upon as rudeness. Animal stories form a part of the instruction. After studying the chosen types a review takes notice of common characters and separates animals into classes. Instruction is based on a text.
Instruction starts with common animal forms, which are shown through charts or drawings when stuffed or mounted specimens aren’t available. The kids are encouraged to rely on themselves as much as possible to discover the unique traits in the body structures of the selected forms. Then, the physical structure and behaviors are connected, along with their habitats, diet, color, and environment. Finally, the animal's[Pg 141] role in the ecosystem and its significance to humans are the topics explored. In addition to studying a typical form closely, related animals are looked at in a more general way. The kids are taught to remember that while they have control over the animals, they also have responsibilities toward them. Ignoring these obligations is seen as disrespectful. Animal stories are included in the lessons. After examining the chosen types, a review highlights common characteristics and groups animals into categories. Instruction is based on a textbook.
Class V. (Two hours weekly.) Plants. (Forty hours.) Dicotyledonous plants. Bluebells, buttercups, strawberry, apple trees, pea, clover, beans, cherry, plum, dandelion, blueberry, heather, potato, tobacco, willow, birch, hazel, and others, studied under their regular headings or in their special families.
Class V. (Two hours weekly.) Plants. (Forty hours.) Dicotyledonous plants. Bluebells, buttercups, strawberries, apple trees, peas, clover, beans, cherries, plums, dandelions, blueberries, heather, potatoes, tobacco, willows, birches, hazels, and others, studied under their regular categories or in their specific families.
Monocotyledonous plants. Rye, barley, wheat, oats, timothy, lily of the valley, pine, fir, juniper, in connection with respective families.
Monocotyledonous plants. Rye, barley, wheat, oats, timothy, lily of the valley, pine, fir, juniper, along with their respective families.
Flowerless plants. Ferns, moss, mushrooms.
Non-flowering plants. Ferns, moss, fungi.
Foreign useful plants. Coffee, tea, cotton, sugar cane, rice, maize, orange, palms, spices. All plants are studied carefully under their respective subdivisions. As in the consideration of animals, the growth, vital organs, habitat, and use of plants are studied, as are also their grouping, fruit, etc. About fifty plants are studied carefully and others are related to them. The children are taught not to injure plants or trees.
Useful foreign plants. Coffee, tea, cotton, sugar cane, rice, corn, oranges, palm trees, and spices. All plants are examined thoroughly in their specific categories. Just like with animals, we look at the growth, essential functions, habitat, and uses of plants, along with their classifications, fruit, and more. Around fifty plants are studied closely, with others connected to them. Children are taught not to harm plants or trees.
Animals. (Twenty hours.) Adder, lizard, crocodile, turtle, frog, toad, mackerel, pike, salmon, trout,[Pg 142] herring, haddock, flounder, eel, shark, cabbage butterfly, silk worm, moth, bee, bumble-bee, wasp, ant, fly, gnat, grasshopper, spider, lobster, crab, angleworm, leech, trichina, snail, mussel, star-fish, sea urchin, coral, sponge, etc. Instruction along same line as in Class IV.
Animals. (Twenty hours.) Adder, lizard, crocodile, turtle, frog, toad, mackerel, pike, salmon, trout,[Pg 142] herring, haddock, flounder, eel, shark, cabbage butterfly, silk worm, moth, bee, bumble-bee, wasp, ant, fly, gnat, grasshopper, spider, lobster, crab, angleworm, leech, trichina, snail, mussel, starfish, sea urchin, coral, sponge, etc. Instruction will follow the same guidelines as in Class IV.
Physics. (Sixteen hours.) Based on a text. Instruction to be accompanied by experiments whenever possible—otherwise illustrated by drawings and models.
Physics. (Sixteen hours.) Based on a textbook. Teaching will include experiments whenever possible; otherwise, it will be illustrated with drawings and models.
Solids. Resistance to change in form: hardness, elasticity. Resistance to change of extensity: compressibility, porosity, adhesion, cohesion.
Solids. Resistance to change in shape: hardness, elasticity. Resistance to change in size: compressibility, porosity, adhesion, cohesion.
Liquids. No fixed form, apparent unchangeability of extensity, adhesion to solids, solution of solids, mixing of liquids, endosmose.
Liquids. No definite shape, seeming unchangeability of volume, sticking to solids, dissolving solids, blending of liquids, osmosis.
Gases. No definite form, attraction, diffusion, absorption.
Gases. No fixed shape, attraction, spreading out, uptake.
Gravitation. Weight, units of weight, weighing, relation between weight and size, force of weight as a cause of movement, hindrances to movement, forces in equilibrium.
Gravitation. Weight, weight units, weighing, the relationship between weight and size, the force of weight as a cause of motion, obstacles to motion, forces in balance.
The lever. Balance, hand presses, on the principle of the lever.
The lever. Balance, hand presses, based on the principle of the lever.
Class VI. (Two hours weekly.) Liquids. (Eight hours.) Distribution of pressure, Archimedes' law, specific gravity, communicating shaft.
Class VI. (Two hours weekly.) Liquids. (Eight hours.) Distribution of pressure, Archimedes' principle, specific gravity, connected shafts.
Properties of air. (Eight hours.) Archimedes' law, the atmosphere and its pressure, barometer, pumps and lifters, Mariotte's law.
Properties of air. (Eight hours.) Archimedes' principle, the atmosphere and its pressure, barometer, pumps and lifts, Mariotte's principle.
Heat. (Twelve hours.) Different temperatures, effects of heat, expansion of bodies, the thermometer,[Pg 143] maximum density of water, melting and freezing, evaporation and condensation, boiling, degree of pressure at the boiling point.
Heat. (Twelve hours.) Different temperatures, effects of heat, the expansion of materials, the thermometer, [Pg 143] maximum density of water, melting and freezing, evaporation and condensation, boiling, and the pressure at the boiling point.
Transmission of heat by radiation and by conduction, good and poor conductors, temperature and humidity of the air, downward pressure, circulation of water, atmospheric currents, sources of heat, heat as force, steam pressure.
Transmission of heat through radiation and conduction, effective and ineffective conductors, air temperature and humidity, downward pressure, water circulation, atmospheric currents, heat sources, heat as energy, steam pressure.
Sound. (Eight hours.) Origin of sound, its transmission, rate of transmission, the ear, tones, reflection of sound.
Sound. (Eight hours.) The origin of sound, how it travels, the speed of transmission, the ear, different tones, and the reflection of sound.
Light. (Ten hours.) Self-illuminating and dark bodies, transparent and opaque, straight path of light, shade, rate of transmission, reflection, refraction, diffusion of color, convex and concave lenses, microscope, telescope, camera, the eye, spectacles.
Light. (Ten hours.) Self-lighting and dark objects, clear and non-transparent, direct light path, shadow, speed of transmission, reflection, bending of light, spreading of color, curved and flat lenses, microscope, telescope, camera, the eye, glasses.
Magnetism. (Five hours.) The magnet and its poles, their reciprocal relations, magnetizing, difference magnetically in iron and steel, horseshoe magnet, compass.
Magnetism. (Five hours.) The magnet and its poles, their interactions, magnetizing, differences in magnetism in iron and steel, horseshoe magnet, compass.
Electricity. (Fifteen hours.) Electricity of friction, two kinds of electrical condition, conductors and insulators, communicating and distributing, electrical machines, lightning and thunder, lightning rods, electrical current, battery, electric light, electro-magnetism, telegraph, telephone, electricity which generates power.
Electricity. (Fifteen hours.) Static electricity, two types of electrical charges, conductors and insulators, transmitting and distributing, electrical devices, lightning and thunder, lightning rods, electric current, battery, electric light, electromagnetism, telegraph, telephone, electricity that produces power.
Equilibrium and Motion. (Ten hours.) Motion with uniform, increasing, or decreasing rapidity; combination of motion and force (the parallelogram of power, center of gravity, the three conditions of balance,[Pg 144] the beam, the inclined plane); work and vital force; experiment with the pendulum.
Equilibrium and Motion. (Ten hours.) Motion with consistent, accelerating, or decelerating speed; the interaction of motion and force (the parallelogram of power, center of gravity, the three conditions of balance,[Pg 144] the beam, the inclined plane); work and energy; experiment with the pendulum.
Class VII. (Two hours weekly.) Physics. (Sixteen hours.) Machines, block, tackle, windlass, the curved pivot, various driving forces (water wheel, steam engines, dynamos), application of machinery in the industries, railways and steamboats.
Class VII. (Two hours weekly.) Physics. (Sixteen hours.) Machines, pulleys, winches, curved pivots, different driving forces (water wheels, steam engines, generators), how machines are used in industries, railways, and steamboats.
Chemistry. (Sixteen hours.) Ingredients of water and air, coal, carbonic acid, burning and oxidation. Fundamental elements as material in all bodies. Examples of elements: oxygen, hydrogen, nitrogen, carbon, chlorine, sulphur, phosphorus, aluminum, iron, silver, and gold. Examples for combinations: water, ammonia, sulphuric acid, rust, soda, cooking salt, lime, chalk, clay, quartz, ores. Examples of organic matter: starch, sugar, albumen, alchohol, fats. Instruction in chemistry consists in illustrations and descriptions of materials and experiments.
Chemistry. (Sixteen hours.) Components of water and air, coal, carbon dioxide, combustion, and oxidation. Basic elements that make up all substances. Examples of elements: oxygen, hydrogen, nitrogen, carbon, chlorine, sulfur, phosphorus, aluminum, iron, silver, and gold. Examples of compounds: water, ammonia, sulfuric acid, rust, baking soda, table salt, lime, chalk, clay, quartz, and ores. Examples of organic matter: starch, sugar, protein, alcohol, and fats. Chemistry instruction involves visual aids and detailed explanations of materials and experiments.
Structure and life of the human body. Study of health. (Thirty hours.) Based on text. Study of skeleton, muscles, nervous system, work and rest, sense organs and their use, digestive organs and processes, use of teeth, blood and circulation, breathing pure and impure air, kidneys, meaning of bodily exercise, structure and use of the skin, bathing, clothing, dwellings, foods and pleasures (under this intoxicating drinks, tobacco, etc.) Something regarding contagious diseases and help in times of accidents. Inject instruction on health when convenient in connection with the study of the organs of the body. Illustrate by experiment when possible. General review, especially[Pg 145] the points concerning the nourishment and respiration of plants and animals.
Structure and function of the human body. Study of health. (Thirty hours.) Based on text. Study of the skeleton, muscles, nervous system, work and rest, sense organs and their functions, digestive organs and processes, use of teeth, blood and circulation, breathing in clean and polluted air, kidneys, importance of physical exercise, structure and function of the skin, bathing, clothing, living spaces, food and pleasures (including alcohol, tobacco, etc.). Overview of contagious diseases and assistance during emergencies. Incorporate health education when relevant to the study of body organs. Demonstrate through experiments when possible. General review, especially[Pg 145] the topics related to the nourishment and respiration of plants and animals.
The outline in nature study impresses one with the inclusiveness of the course. The elementary phases of animal life, plant life, physics, chemistry, and human physiology and health are made the objects of careful consideration. True this study in some cases is stiff, formal, meaningless, and without spirit because of not being connected with the vital interests of the pupils, but on the whole the work is brought very close home to their daily life. Through it the children are able to see the contributions to life and human welfare made by the innumerable things in man's environment.
The outline in nature study highlights how comprehensive the course is. It carefully focuses on the basic aspects of animal life, plant life, physics, chemistry, and human physiology and health. While it’s true that in some cases this study can feel rigid, formal, and lifeless because it doesn't connect with the students' real interests, overall, the work relates closely to their everyday lives. Through this, children can recognize the many contributions to life and human well-being from the countless elements in their environment.
Throughout the primary grades the work is mostly devoted to descriptive studies. Considerable attention is given also to the intrinsic value to man of animals, plants, and natural forces, and the means he has found for utilizing them in his struggle forward. The nature lessons throughout the grades are enriched and enlivened by the use of well selected and carefully prepared appliances and models for demonstration. Whenever possible the living animals and plants in their natural habitat, forces as applied in the machinery of neighboring institutions, and minerals in their successive processes of development and refinement are studied at first hand. Every school where the financial stringency is not too keen is provided with a liberal amount of apparatus for demonstrational purposes (anskuelsesmidler). As an instance, every primary school in the city of Christiania has at least one room of considerable size devoted exclusively to the storing[Pg 146] of this material. Maps, charts, mounted specimens, plates, preserved articles, and accessory materials are there in abundance, and provide minute representations for most any point one might wish to make typical for illustration or study. The more genuine phases of laboratory work are not provided, though a considerable amount of crude experimentation is done in the grades.
Throughout the early grades, the focus is mainly on descriptive studies. A lot of attention is also given to the inherent value of animals, plants, and natural forces to humans, along with how we've learned to use them in our progress. The nature lessons across the grades are made more engaging with the help of well-selected and carefully prepared tools and models for demonstration. Whenever possible, living animals and plants in their natural habitats, forces applied in the machinery of nearby institutions, and minerals in their various stages of development and refinement are studied firsthand. Every school that isn’t too financially strained is equipped with a generous amount of equipment for demonstration purposes (anskuelsesmidler). For example, every primary school in the city of Christiania has at least one room of considerable size dedicated solely to storing[Pg 146] this material. Maps, charts, mounted specimens, plates, preserved items, and additional materials are plentiful, providing detailed representations for nearly any point one might want to illustrate or study. However, more advanced laboratory work isn’t provided, although a fair amount of basic experimentation is conducted in the grades.
The teacher presenting this course must be capable for he is the authority and guide back of all work done. Text books (good ones though condensed) play a part, but a much smaller part than would be the case in our American schools were similar instruction approached in a formal way. In other words, their teachers furnish the course and teach the subject, while too many of ours merely present the course provided in the adopted text book.
The teacher leading this course needs to be skilled because they are the authority and guide for all the work done. Textbooks (good ones, even if they are condensed) play a role, but it's much smaller than it would be in our American schools if similar instruction were handled formally. In other words, their teachers create the course and teach the subject, while too many of ours just present the course from the adopted textbook.
Writing, drawing, vocal music, manual training, and gymnastics are also in the curriculum and each receives careful attention. Perhaps extended outlining of these courses and long discussions concerning them are unnecessary. Their importance and value are recognized. Their presentation in the schools of Norway is commendable, but some things must be passed without exhaustive treatment. Only general statements will be given.
Writing, drawing, vocal music, hands-on skills, and gymnastics are also part of the curriculum, and each gets proper attention. Maybe detailed outlines of these courses and lengthy discussions about them aren't needed. Their significance and value are acknowledged. The way they're taught in the schools of Norway is impressive, but some topics shouldn't be covered too deeply. Only general remarks will be provided.
The results in some lines—writing and drawing in particular—do not justify the amount of time devoted to them. The writing is mechanical throughout, and in the lower grade the requirements are altogether too exacting. Drawing is required of all alike. Those[Pg 147] who have ability in this line of work perhaps receive too little instruction; others, without talent or liking for it, regard it as a drudgery and, in the minds of some of their teachers, hinder the progress of the gifted. The finer coordinations required in both writing and drawing are frequently in advance of the development of the pupils and work injury rather than benefit.
The results in some areas—especially writing and drawing—don't justify the amount of time spent on them. The writing is very mechanical, and in the lower grades, the expectations are way too strict. Drawing is mandatory for everyone. Those[Pg 147] who have a talent for it probably don't get enough instruction; others, who lack skill or interest, see it as a chore and, according to some of their teachers, slow down the progress of the gifted students. The more refined coordination needed for both writing and drawing often outpaces the students' development, causing more harm than good.
Vocal music is required of all and injures none. Probably each one reaps considerable benefit from the instruction. The class of music used in their teaching is very different from what is in vogue in our American schools. The church has exercised a great deal of influence in this respect. Since church and state are united the music of the church forms a predominating portion of the music of the state schools. Psalms, chants, and songs of stately dignity constitute the bulk of their selections, while those of lighter strain are interspersed at intervals not too close together. In America our children's songs are more attractive from the "jingle" point of view. Our children like them better and are more anxious to sing them. The little Norwegians, too, are delighted when permitted to swing into the lighter strains of music. They love to sing. Their faces fairly glow as their mellow voices swell out whether they sing in a jingle or in the rich harmonies of their psalms. Common use of the better quality of music cultivates their ability to appreciate and to render works of higher order than one usually finds in the schools of our own country.
Vocal music is required for everyone and harms no one. Most likely, everyone gets significant benefits from the instruction. The type of music used in their teaching is very different from what is popular in American schools. The church has had a strong influence in this area. Since church and state are connected, the music of the church makes up a large part of the music in state schools. Psalms, chants, and dignified songs make up most of their selections, while lighter songs are included from time to time, but not too frequently. In America, our children's songs are more appealing from the "jingle" perspective. Our kids prefer them and are more eager to sing them. The little Norwegians also enjoy it when they get to sing lighter songs. They love to sing. Their faces light up as their warm voices fill the air, whether they are belting out a jingle or the rich harmonies of their psalms. Regular exposure to high-quality music helps them develop an appreciation for and the ability to perform works of a higher caliber than what is typically found in our schools.
Manual and industrial training has had an important place in their schools for many years. Every hour[Pg 148] spent at the bench is a delight to the boys, while the girls enjoy equally well the privilege of sewing or cooking. These activities are certainly valuable in the training of the young, and their influences extend into the homes of all the pupils.
Manual and industrial training has been a significant part of their schools for many years. Every hour spent at the bench is a joy for the boys, while the girls equally appreciate the opportunity to sew or cook. These activities are definitely valuable in educating young people, and their impact reaches into the homes of all the students.
Gymnastics is the regular order for all pupils. A Swedish system of exercises is used which requires little apparatus but yields large returns. Abundant well-directed exercises of various kinds are provided for every pupil at stated periods and are entered into with zest. The regularity with which the gymnastic exercises are given doubtless has much to do in preserving the health of the children. As a class they are not only free from weaknesses but are vigorous and robust. Another part of their gymnastic work is the outdoor exercise which is required of all the pupils between the class periods. This doubtless adds much life and animation to the entire school program.
Gymnastics is a regular part of the curriculum for all students. A Swedish exercise system is used that requires minimal equipment but offers great benefits. Various well-structured exercises are provided for each student at scheduled times, and they participate with enthusiasm. The consistency of these gymnastic activities undoubtedly plays a significant role in maintaining the children's health. Overall, they are not only free from weaknesses but are also energetic and healthy. Another aspect of their physical activity includes outdoor exercises that all students must do between classes. This likely adds a lot of energy and excitement to the entire school program.
The course as a whole includes the fundamentals and chief essentials to educational activity. Those who pass through the primary schools obtain an intelligent appreciation of life and its meanings. They are able to meet common needs successfully and to attend to general affairs in an approved manner. The masses feel the necessity of the fuller life thus provided and in turn the school is admirably fitted to the task of developing loyal and capable citizens. Furthermore, those who are so favorably situated that they may continue in school longer than seven years and desire fitness for entrance upon the work of higher education[Pg 149] find in the primary schools every opportunity to gratify their desires.
The course overall covers the basics and key essentials of educational activities. Those who go through elementary school gain a smart understanding of life and its meanings. They can successfully meet everyday needs and manage general affairs in an appropriate way. People recognize the need for the richer life that this offers, and in turn, the school is well-equipped to develop loyal and competent citizens. Additionally, those who are fortunate enough to continue their education beyond seven years and want to prepare for higher education[Pg 149] find plenty of opportunities in elementary schools to pursue their goals.
The connection between the lower and higher schools was not at all satisfactory until 1896, when the Storthing readjusted the system. Since then pupils may pass regularly from the fifth grade of the primary school into the four year middle school, or after the completion of the seven grades of the primary school they may enter either a three or a four year middle school and finish in three years. Since the number desiring entrance to the middle school from the fifth grade is larger than can be accommodated, those of highest ranking educationally are admitted. While the secondary school men claim perfect right to choose the fittest for entrance into their schools, the primary school men feel that their work in the sixth and seventh grades suffers injustice as a result of this selective process. The connection between the schools is not yet perfect and some unrest is evidenced in reference to the matter. The chief need seems to be an increase in the number of middle schools.
The relationship between elementary and middle schools wasn't great until 1896, when the Storthing revamped the system. Since then, students can move up from the fifth grade of elementary school into a four-year middle school, or after finishing all seven grades of elementary school, they can enter either a three or four-year middle school and complete their studies in three years. Because more students are looking to enter middle school from the fifth grade than there is space available, only those with the highest academic performance are admitted. While secondary school educators argue they have every right to select the best candidates for their schools, elementary school teachers feel that their students in sixth and seventh grades are at a disadvantage due to this selective process. The connection between the schools is still not ideal, and there are signs of discontent regarding the situation. The main need appears to be an increase in the number of middle schools.
III. THE MIDDLE SCHOOL
The Storthing, in 1896, passed a law defining the limits and work of the middle school. According to the enactment this school builds upon the foundation laid in the primary school and secures to the pupils a thorough general education suited to the needs and receptivity of childhood. The course of study offered may be of varied length, but in no case shall it exceed[Pg 150] four years in duration. The four year course aims at a very natural connection with the work done during the first five years in the common school. Where the connection can be made with the work of later grades in the primary school, the course of the middle school may be correspondingly shorter. The aim and methods are in general similar to those in the lower school; though, of course, higher, more thorough and inclusive, and such as give deeper insight into all subjects of instruction. It is required that instruction be given in religion, Norwegian, German, English, history, geography, natural science, mathematics, writing, drawing, manual training, and vocal music. Instruction in domestic economy may be provided for the girls.
The Storthing, in 1896, passed a law defining the limits and work of middle school. According to this law, middle school builds on the foundation laid in primary school and provides students with a solid general education tailored to the needs and understanding of childhood. The length of the study program may vary, but it cannot exceed[Pg 150]four years. The four-year curriculum aims for a natural connection with the first five years of common school education. If a connection can be made with the work of later primary school grades, the middle school course may be shorter. The goals and methods are generally similar to those in lower school, though they are, of course, higher, more in-depth, and designed to provide deeper insights into all subjects. Instruction is required in religion, Norwegian, German, English, history, geography, natural science, mathematics, writing, drawing, manual training, and vocal music. Domestic economy instruction may be offered for girls.
Formerly all of these schools charged tuition; but, as the conditions in the commune gradually improved, provisions were made in some of them for the issuance of a certain number of free scholarships. These were usually governed in such a way that those most in need were the first to receive the benefits. From time to time scholarship funds were increased until now some communes provide free scholarships to all resident children. The city of Christiania has a three-year middle school building upon the foundation of seven years of primary work and charging no tuition whatsoever. This provision together with the building up of scholarship funds are forerunners of free entrance, probably, to all of the state's middle schools. As already stated, the work of the middle school overlaps in part that of the primary school. The course of study for Classes I and II is in a large measure a duplication of that provided[Pg 151] for Classes VI and VII in the lower school. However, to present the work of the middle school adequately, it is essential that the course for the entire four years be here included. The state adopts a curriculum which is used in all of its secondary schools. Minor details such as texts vary in the different schools. The following is an outline of the curriculum used in the Christiania Cathedral School.
Previously, all of these schools charged tuition; however, as the conditions in the community gradually improved, some of them started offering a limited number of free scholarships. These scholarships were usually awarded to those most in need. Over time, scholarship funds were increased, and now some communities provide free scholarships to all resident children. The city of Christiania has a three-year middle school that builds on seven years of primary education and charges no tuition at all. This arrangement, along with the development of scholarship funds, is paving the way for free access to all state middle schools. As mentioned, the middle school curriculum overlaps somewhat with that of the primary school. The curriculum for Classes I and II largely repeats what is covered in Classes VI and VII of the lower school. However, to fully represent the middle school experience, it's important to include the curriculum for the entire four years here. The state adopts a curriculum that is consistent across all its secondary schools, although minor details like textbooks may vary between different schools. Below is an outline of the curriculum used in the Christiania Cathedral School.
Religion
Class I. (Two hours.) Vogt's Bible History to the fall of the Kingdom of Judah. J. Sverdrup's Commentary to Article 2. Verses of hymns once each week.
Class I. (Two hours.) Vogt's Bible History up to the fall of the Kingdom of Judah. J. Sverdrup's Commentary on Article 2. Verses of hymns once a week.
Class II. (Two hours.) Vogt's Bible History from "The Exile" to "The Story of the Passion." Commentary from Article 2 to "The Sacraments." Verses from hymns.
Class II. (Two hours.) Vogt's Bible History from "The Exile" to "The Story of the Passion." Commentary from Article 2 to "The Sacraments." Verses from hymns.
Class III. (Two hours.) Bible History and Commentary completed and reviewed. Verses from hymns. Bible reading.
Class III. (Two hours.) Bible history and commentary completed and reviewed. Verses from hymns. Bible reading.
Class IV. (One hour.) Y. Brun and Th. Caspari's Church History gone through and reviewed. Cursory study of the ecclesiastical year and the order of divine service.
Class IV. (One hour.) Y. Brun and Th. Caspari's Church History covered and reviewed. Brief study of the church year and the schedule of worship.
Here we note the beginnings of a more formal consideration of religion. A large part of the work is historical. Texts and lectures covering practically identical grounds form the basis of the work in this branch of study. The change to the more formal[Pg 152] study of religion strikes the writer as a distinctive turn or transfer from moderately successful to useless endeavor. The personal touch and human flavor attending the informal telling of Bible stories afford some genuine inspiration. Life touches life. When character is exemplified in a living person or is shown through story once to have had expression in a fellow mortal, interest is awakened and the child instinctively imitates the vision before him. He transforms it into life. He enters into the spirit of the theme and the spirit giveth life.
Here we note the beginnings of a more formal consideration of religion. A large part of the work is historical. Texts and lectures covering nearly identical topics form the foundation of this area of study. The shift to a more formal study of religion seems to the writer to be a significant transition—from something moderately successful to a useless endeavor. The personal touch and human element in the informal storytelling of Bible stories provide genuine inspiration. Life connects with life. When character is exemplified in a living person or is shown through a story to have once been expressed in another human being, interest is sparked, and the child instinctively imitates the vision in front of them. They turn it into life. They engage with the spirit of the theme, and the spirit gives life.
On the other hand, when religion is presented in a formal way, when an abstract view is taken, when the core of the subject is in the cold pages of texts,—then the letter killeth. Through force of habit the children retain some respect for the wishes of the teacher and do go through the motions of study and recitation, but the life of the subject is very soon extinguished and even respect for it vanishes in large measure. However, in rare instances good results are obtained through the efforts of teachers who are especially well qualified for this work.
On the other hand, when religion is taught in a formal way, when it’s looked at from an abstract perspective, when the essence of the subject is found in the dry pages of texts, it becomes lifeless. Out of habit, students still show some respect for what the teacher wants and participate in studying and reciting, but the excitement surrounding the subject quickly fades, and their respect for it diminishes significantly. However, in rare cases, positive outcomes do emerge from the efforts of teachers who are particularly skilled in this area.
The Mother-Tongue and Old Norse
Class I. (Five hours.) Pauss and Lassen's Reader II. 2. Some of the Songs of the Fatherland learned by heart. Oral and written analysis. Hofgaard's Norwegian School Grammar, Paragraphs 1-31, 34-38, 41, 45, 48-59, 61, 65, 76-79. The more important part of Hougen's Rules for Correct Writing. Written work (dictation and composition) each week.
Class I. (Five hours.) Pauss and Lassen's Reader II. 2. Some of the Songs of the Fatherland memorized. Oral and written analysis. Hofgaard's Norwegian School Grammar, Paragraphs 1-31, 34-38, 41, 45, 48-59, 61, 65, 76-79. The key sections of Hougen's Rules for Correct Writing. Written assignments (dictation and composition) every week.
Class II. (Four hours.) Pauss and Lassen's Reader II. 3. Poems—among them some of the Songs of the Fatherland learned by heart. Hofgaard's Grammar continued, also analyses. One written exercise each week (dictation and easy composition.)
Class II. (Four hours.) Pauss and Lassen's Reader II. 3. Poems—including some of the Songs of the Fatherland memorized. Hofgaard's Grammar continued, along with analyses. One written exercise each week (dictation and simple composition.)
Class III. (Alternately three and four hours.) Pauss and Lassen's Reader III. Poems learned by heart—partly from Lassen's Poems for Middle Schools, partly from Songs of the Fatherland. Certain parts of the grammar reviewed. Analyses now and then. About twenty written exercises, among them some dictations.
Class III. (Alternately three and four hours.) Pauss and Lassen's Reader III. Poems memorized—partly from Lassen's Poems for Middle Schools, partly from Songs of the Fatherland. Some grammar reviewed. Analyses occasionally. About twenty written assignments, including a few dictations.
Class IV. (alternating three and four hours.) Pauss and Lassen's Reader III. That portion from which the examination is taken, gone through and partly reviewed. Several poems committed to memory. Fourteen written exercises. Among the topics used the following are typical: The summer vacation, the location of our city, Denmark, past and present lighting systems, animal life in our forests, reminiscences from my earlier school days, birds and why we protect them, the Norsemen as seamen, Christiania in winter garb, Europe's natural conditions in preference to those of other continents.
Class IV. (alternating three and four hours.) Pauss and Lassen's Reader III. The section that's covered for the exam has been completed and partially reviewed. Several poems are memorized. Fourteen written assignments. Some of the topics covered include: summer vacation, the location of our city, Denmark, past and present lighting systems, animal life in our forests, memories from my earlier school days, birds and why we protect them, the Norsemen as sailors, Christiania in winter, and Europe's natural environment compared to other continents.
In harmony with the indications of the plan of instruction, the early part of the work in the study of the mother-tongue is devoted to reading from selected texts. Simultaneously, grammar and rhetoric are carried along and put into use in written compositions which are frequent. Here, as in the primary schools, exact spelling, correct grammatical and rhetorical[Pg 154] forms, and approved literary style are constant requirements. The child is expected not only to read intelligently, but to express himself orally and in writing in a comprehensive manner and in such form as to appeal to the intelligence of others. Thus both in oral speech and through written composition the pupil is privileged to put his attainments into continuous use. They acquire the tools of thought and skill in handling them.
In line with the guidance of the curriculum, the initial part of the course in studying the mother tongue focuses on reading selected texts. At the same time, grammar and rhetoric are incorporated and applied in frequent written assignments. Here, as in primary schools, precise spelling, correct grammar and rhetorical forms, and an accepted literary style are always required. Students are expected not only to read thoughtfully but also to express themselves both verbally and in writing in a clear way that engages the understanding of others. Thus, in both spoken and written forms, students have the opportunity to continuously apply what they've learned. They gain the tools for thinking and skills in using them.
German
Class I. (Six hours.) Knudsen and Kristiansen's Reader from the beginning to the "Subjunctive." Written exercises.
Class I. (Six hours.) Knudsen and Kristiansen's Reader from the start to the "Subjunctive." Writing exercises.
Class II. (Five hours.) Knudsen and Kristiansen's Reader from "Subjunctive" to close of book. Voss' Reader in section A, seventy-six pages, in section B, fifty pages; one-half of these shall be learned by heart. Hofgaard's Short German Grammar the most important forms. Written exercises. Rehearsals. Retroversions.
Class II. (Five hours.) Knudsen and Kristiansen's Reader from "Subjunctive" to the end of the book. Voss' Reader in section A, seventy-six pages, in section B, fifty pages; half of these should be memorized. Hofgaard's Short German Grammar covers the most important forms. Written exercises. Rehearsals. Retroversions.
Class III. (Five hours.) Voss' Reader, in section A, seventy-five pages, in section B, fifty-eight. Hofgaard's Short German Grammar, inflections. In section B besides the above, paragraphs 140-148, 156, 169, 179-181. In addition section B shall have thirty-six pages of O. Kristiansen's oral exercises and thirty-two compositions according to O. Kristiansen's exercises in written work. In section A, written exercises, partly according to Kristiansen's outlines for written[Pg 155] work and partly reviews of the lessons in the reading book.
Class III. (Five hours.) Voss' Reader, in section A, seventy-five pages, in section B, fifty-eight. Hofgaard's Short German Grammar, inflections. In section B, in addition to the above, paragraphs 140-148, 156, 169, 179-181. Furthermore, section B will include thirty-six pages of O. Kristiansen's oral exercises and thirty-two compositions based on O. Kristiansen's written work exercises. In section A, there will be written exercises, partly based on Kristiansen's outlines for written[Pg 155] work and partly reviews of the lessons from the reading book.
Class IV. (Five hours.) Voss' Reader in section A, twenty pages, in section B, seventy-five. Repetition of the portion designated for minutest study. The grammar reviewed. One or two written exercises each week according to Kristiansen's outlines.
Class IV. (Five hours.) Voss' Reader in section A, twenty pages, in section B, seventy-five. Review of the parts designated for detailed study. The grammar is revisited. One or two written assignments each week based on Kristiansen's outlines.
The instruction in German proceeds in a very natural manner. The earlier lessons are devoted very largely to oral instruction in which the teacher takes the lead. Words, phrases, and sentences are given by the teacher for translation and concert repetition. Repetition and concert work are prominent in many places in the schools, but nowhere stressed to the same extent as in their language instruction. Concert work seems to stimulate to freedom in pronunciation, while repetition affords the drill which is necessary to the required accuracy. Having had at least five years of thorough instruction in the mother-tongue the children are able to appreciate in a measure the meaning and importance of verb forms and other features of inflection so that they are ready to do consistent work in this phase of their study. In addition to the translations referred to, conversational exercises are soon introduced, and at the end of the second year some facility in easy conversation is evidenced. Toward the close of the middle school the children are able to read the language with ease and to converse in it quite fluently.
The instruction in German is conducted in a very natural way. The earlier lessons focus largely on oral teaching, where the teacher takes the lead. The teacher provides words, phrases, and sentences for translation and group repetition. Repetition and group activities are common in many areas of the schools, but they are emphasized more in language instruction. Group work seems to encourage freedom in pronunciation, while repetition provides the practice needed for accuracy. After at least five years of thorough instruction in their native language, the children can understand the meaning and importance of verb forms and other aspects of inflection, allowing them to engage consistently in this part of their studies. In addition to the translations mentioned, conversational exercises are introduced soon, and by the end of the second year, some ability in simple conversation is noticeable. By the end of middle school, the children can read the language easily and converse fluently.
English
Class II. (Five hours.) Brekke's Elementary Reader to page seventy-four, studied and reviewed, besides the grammar in the back of the book. Conversational exercises and written work on the blackboard. During the last half year an occasional written exercise in a book.
Class II. (Five hours.) Brekke's Elementary Reader to page seventy-four, studied and reviewed, along with the grammar at the end of the book. Conversational exercises and written work on the blackboard. During the last six months, there has been the occasional written assignment in a notebook.
Class III. (Five hours.) Brekke's Reader for the Middle School, sixty-five pages read and reviewed. Knap's Grammar. One narrative per week.
Class III. (Five hours.) Brekke's Reader for the Middle School, sixty-five pages read and discussed. Knap's Grammar. One story each week.
Class IV. (Five hours.) Brekke's Reader for the Middle School. Required portion read and reviewed, while the remainder of the book is gone through and in part read ex tempore. One narrative each week.
Class IV. (Five hours.) Brekke's Reader for the Middle School. The required sections will be read and reviewed, while the rest of the book will be covered and partly read ex tempore. One story each week.
The study of English proceeds along lines parallel to those followed in the German. The learning of the language is accomplished chiefly through its use. Explanations are made by using the more familiar words of the tongue studied, by circumlocutions, and by other similar practices. Grammar is resorted to as a means rather than an end. It is used only in facilitating the acquisition of the language, not as an end in itself. However, at the close of the course each pupil has become quite proficient in the grammar as well as in reading the language and in conversing in it.
The study of English follows a path similar to that of German. Learning the language mainly happens through its use. Explanations are given using more familiar words from the language being studied, through roundabout phrases, and other similar methods. Grammar is approached as a tool rather than a goal. It's used to help with learning the language, not as a final objective. However, by the end of the course, each student becomes quite skilled in grammar, reading, and speaking the language.
History
Class I. (Three hours.) Nissen's History of the World by Sehjoth, from the beginning until "Scandinavia in the Middle Ages."
Class I. (Three hours.) Nissen's History of the World by Sehjoth, from the beginning until "Scandinavia in the Middle Ages."
Class II. (Two hours.) Text as in Class I. From "Scandinavia in the Middle Ages" to "Modern Times."
Class II. (Two hours.) Same text as in Class I. From "Scandinavia in the Middle Ages" to "Modern Times."
Class III. (Three hours.) Same Text. From "Charles V" to "The February Revolution." Review.
Class III. (Three hours.) Same Text. From "Charles V" to "The February Revolution." Review.
Class IV. (Three hours.) Same Text. Reviewed in its entirety.
Class IV. (Three hours.) Same Text. Reviewed completely.
The course in history is very rich and its study is entered into with animation. The teacher is usually a master in the subject and he makes the work of great profit. A considerable amount of the class period is devoted to a vivid and analytic introduction of the work to be done at the next meeting of the class, preparation for which shall be made in the meantime. Problems are presented and purposes are indicated so that the preparatory study may be done with some definite end in view.
The history course is very engaging and its study is approached with enthusiasm. The teacher is typically an expert in the subject, making the work highly beneficial. A significant portion of the class time is dedicated to a lively and analytical introduction of the material to be covered in the next meeting, for which preparation should be made in the meantime. Problems are presented and objectives are outlined so that the preparatory study can be done with a clear purpose in mind.
All facts of history are placed in appropriate settings and perspective, correlated into a unity, and given vital meaning. Maps, charts, and pictorial illustrations are provided in abundance and used constantly. Frequently historic scenes near at hand or known to the pupils are pointed out, minutely described, and visited.
All historical facts are placed in the right context and perspective, connected into a cohesive whole, and given significant meaning. There's an abundance of maps, charts, and illustrations that are used consistently. Often, historical scenes nearby or familiar to the students are highlighted, described in detail, and explored.
Teachers appeal to the sentiment of pupils with the aim of begetting loyalty for the fatherland in the hearts and minds of the young. I have heard instructors grow eloquent as they warmed up on phases of Norway's history, and have noted the flushed cheeks and snapping eyes of the children that bespoke the national pride of the young hearts as familiar words, slogans, and songs of their heroes were quoted.
Teachers connect with students' feelings to instill a sense of loyalty to their country in the hearts and minds of the youth. I've seen teachers become passionate when discussing parts of Norway's history, and I've noticed the flushed cheeks and bright eyes of the children that revealed the national pride in their young hearts as familiar words, slogans, and songs of their heroes were shared.
When given an opportunity—a common occurrence—the pupils enter into the rehearsal of historic events with enthusiasm. Every mind in the room is active. They are awake to the situations and are familiar with the scenes and literature connected with the several stages of development. Replies given in response to questions from the teacher are nearly always in the form of narratives, sometimes occupying ten or fifteen minutes.
When given a chance—which happens often—the students dive into the practice of historical events with excitement. Every mind in the room is engaged. They are alert to the situations and are well-versed in the scenes and literature related to the different stages of development. Answers to the teacher's questions are usually shared as stories, sometimes taking ten to fifteen minutes.
General history or history of any foreign country is entered into in a spirit similar to that characterizing the consideration of their own. On one occasion I listened to a review on American history. Among the characters taken up were Grant, Lee, Harriet Beecher Stowe, and Lincoln. The pupils discussed Uncle Tom's Cabin with familiarity, Lee was considered as "The Napoleon of America," but Lincoln was the one to whom most of the class period was devoted. At the close of the hour the teacher announced a lecture on "Abraham Lincoln" for the following Sunday evening in the Working-Men's College (Arbeiderakademi)[24] of which he was the director. This incident illustrates the way in which they correlate the work of different educational organizations, and shows their interest in the important events connected with the history of other nations.
General history or history of any foreign country is entered into in a spirit similar to that characterizing the consideration of their own. On one occasion I listened to a review on American history. Among the characters taken up were Grant, Lee, Harriet Beecher Stowe, and Lincoln. The pupils discussed Uncle Tom's Cabin with familiarity, Lee was considered as "The Napoleon of America," but Lincoln was the one to whom most of the class period was devoted. At the close of the hour the teacher announced a lecture on "Abraham Lincoln" for the following Sunday evening in the Working-Men's College (Arbeiderakademi)[24] of which he was the director. This incident illustrates the way in which they correlate the work of different educational organizations, and shows their interest in the important events connected with the history of other nations.
Geography
Class I. (Two hours.) Arstal's Geography. Norway and Sweden. Review.
Class I. (Two hours.) Arstal's Geography. Norway and Sweden. Review.
Class II. (Two hours.) Arstal's Geography. From "The Central European Mountains and Rivers" to "Asia." Studied and reviewed.
Class II. (Two hours.) Arstal's Geography. From "The Central European Mountains and Rivers" to "Asia." Studied and reviewed.
Class III. (Two hours.) Arstal's Geography. The foreign continents. Studied and reviewed.
Class III. (Two hours.) Arstal's Geography. The foreign continents. Studied and reviewed.
Class IV. (Two hours.) Arstal's Geography. Repeated or reviewed in its entirety.
Class IV. (Two hours.) Arstal's Geography. Completely repeated or reviewed.
Two books are used in the study of this subject. One is made up entirely of well designed, carefully drawn, and thoroughly reliable maps, printed on a good quality of paper. The other is a text giving a good logical statement of what the course is calculated to include. The teacher must provide the major portion of the information by his own initiative and through cooperation of pupils. Illustrative material (Anskuelsesmidler) is provided in great abundance and in diversified variety.
Two books are used to study this subject. One consists entirely of well-designed, carefully drawn, and completely reliable maps, printed on high-quality paper. The other offers a clear, logical explanation of what the course aims to cover. The teacher needs to supply most of the information through their own initiative and by collaborating with the students. There is a rich supply of illustrative materials (Anskuelsesmidler) available in diverse forms.
An effort is made to impart to the pupils a satisfactory appreciation of the conditions prevailing in the countries considered. Their colonization, commerce, products, topography, political subdivisions, cities, population, river and mountain systems, climate, etc., are all carefully studied. The course begins with the geography of Norway. Next foreign lands and conditions are taken up and compared to situations at home. When the various countries on the globe have been kept for a time before the eyes, a thorough review is given which occupies the greater portion of the last year in the middle school course.
An effort is made to help students gain a satisfying understanding of the conditions in the countries being studied. Their colonization, trade, products, geography, political divisions, cities, populations, river and mountain systems, climate, and more are all examined closely. The course starts with the geography of Norway. Then, foreign countries and conditions are discussed and compared to local situations. After various countries around the world have been explored for a while, a comprehensive review takes place, which takes up most of the last year in the middle school curriculum.
Mathematics
Class I. (Five hours.) Numbers resolved into factors. Fractions. Some Proportion.
Class I. (Five hours.) Numbers broken down into factors. Fractions. Some Proportions.
Class II. (Five hours.) Algebra: Bonnevie and Eliassen's text. From beginning to division. Geometry: Bonnevie and Eliassen's text. From beginning to right lines divided into equal parts. Arithmetic: Proportion and percentage.
Class II. (Five hours.) Algebra: Bonnevie and Eliassen's text. From the start to division. Geometry: Bonnevie and Eliassen's text. From the start to straight lines divided into equal parts. Arithmetic: Proportion and percentage.
Class III. (Five hours.) Algebra: Bonnevie and Eliassen's text. From division to equations with two unknowns. Geometry: Bonnevie's text. From parallelograms to Book IV. Drill in percentage and interest.
Class III. (Five hours.) Algebra: Bonnevie and Eliassen's textbook. Covers division and equations with two variables. Geometry: Bonnevie's textbook. Ranges from parallelograms to Book IV. Practice in percentages and interest.
Class IV. (Five hours.) Algebra: Bonnevie and Eliassen's text. From equations with two unknowns to close of book. Geometry: Bonnevie's text. From Book IV to close of text. Review of entire text. Drill in computing solids and other miscellaneous problems. A few hours devoted to bookkeeping.
Class IV. (Five hours.) Algebra: Bonnevie and Eliassen's textbook. Covering equations with two unknowns until the end of the book. Geometry: Bonnevie's textbook. From Book IV to the end of the text. Review of the entire text. Practice in calculating volumes and other various problems. A few hours dedicated to bookkeeping.
One of the most favorable features of their instruction in mathematics is the intimate connection they make between the several phases of the subject. Arithmetic, algebra, and geometry are never wholly separated from each other. They are in reality interwoven and so definitely correlated that each contributes to the others. By constant use the several processes become familiar tools in the mental activities of the pupils. Mastery of the principles of the science and ability in their use are the ends to be attained. The outline of the course indicates the extent of the field receiving attention.[Pg 161] It is sufficient to say that the topics are all made to appear plain, definite, and vital; and that they are assimilated, and do become parts of the growing life.
One of the best aspects of their math instruction is the close connection they establish among the different areas of the subject. Arithmetic, algebra, and geometry are never completely isolated from one another. They are actually intertwined and so closely linked that each area enhances the others. With regular practice, these various processes become familiar tools in the students' mental activities. Mastery of the principles of the subject and the ability to use them effectively are the main goals. The course outline shows the breadth of the topics covered.[Pg 161] It's enough to say that the topics are presented in a clear, specific, and essential way; they are integrated and become part of the students' developing knowledge.
Nature Study (Natural Science)
Class I. (Three hours.) Botany: Sorensen's text. Written descriptions of about twenty-five plant forms. Zoology: Vertebrates according to Sorensen's text.
Class I. (Three hours.) Botany: Sorensen's textbook. Written descriptions of around twenty-five plant species. Zoology: Vertebrates based on Sorensen's textbook.
Class II. (Two hours.) Botany: Sorensen's text. From "The Sunflower Family" to "Plant Structure." Plant analysis. Zoology: Sorensen's text. "Invertebrates." Review from treatise on insects to close of book.
Class II. (Two hours.) Botany: Sorensen's text. From "The Sunflower Family" to "Plant Structure." Plant analysis. Zoology: Sorensen's text. "Invertebrates." Review from the section on insects to the end of the book.
Class III. (Two hours.) Zoology and botany reviewed. Plant analysis. Henrichsen's Physics. From beginning to "Properties of Air."
Class III. (Two hours.) Review of zoology and botany. Analysis of plants. Henrichsen's Physics. From the beginning to "Properties of Air."
Class IV. (Three hours.) Henrichsen's Physics studied through and reviewed with related laboratory work. Knudsen and Falch's The Human Body I studied and reviewed.
Class IV. (Three hours.) Henrichsen's Physics will be studied thoroughly and reviewed along with related laboratory work. Knudsen and Falch's The Human Body I will also be studied and reviewed.
The plan of work, as noted, includes botany, zoology, physics, and human physiology. Each subject is taken up and pursued in a consistent manner. In botany plant analysis and structure form the important part of the work. A herbarium is made by each pupil. The study is brought very definitely into the daily lives of the children with the intent of opening their eyes to the conditions in nature about them and of developing in them an appreciation of the almost unlimited provision[Pg 162] made for man's welfare. Zoology and physiology are treated in a similar way. They are calculated to enrich the life of the individual by bringing him into more sympathetic relations with all living forms. In physics the child does some experimental work and thereby gets first hand experience to accompany, clarify, and assist in evaluating the elaborated instruction of the teacher regarding forces, phenomena, and laws.
The work plan, as mentioned, covers botany, zoology, physics, and human physiology. Each subject is approached and studied consistently. In botany, plant analysis and structure are key parts of the work. Each student creates a herbarium. The study is closely tied to the children's daily lives, aiming to open their eyes to the natural environment around them and to foster an appreciation for the nearly limitless resources available for human well-being. Zoology and physiology are taught in a similar fashion. They are designed to enrich individual lives by helping students develop a deeper connection with all living things. In physics, the child engages in some hands-on experiments, gaining firsthand experience that complements, clarifies, and helps evaluate the detailed instructions provided by the teacher about forces, phenomena, and laws.
It was interesting to note in a recitation chiefly devoted to experimental work that the language used in conversation was carefully scrutinized and that errors were corrected. Throughout the curriculum a very definite effort is made to utilize every phase of information possessed by the pupils.
It was interesting to observe in a discussion primarily focused on hands-on activities that the language used in conversation was closely examined and that mistakes were corrected. Throughout the curriculum, there is a clear effort to make use of every aspect of knowledge held by the students.
IV. GYMNASIUM
Religion
Class I. (One hour.) Selected hymns, and chapters from the prophet Isaiah.
Class I. (One hour.) Selected hymns and passages from the prophet Isaiah.
Class II. (One hour.) Short survey of church history. Brandrud's text used by some of the pupils.
Class II. (One hour.) Brief overview of church history. Brandrud's text is used by some of the students.
Class III. (Two hours.) Short presentation of the Christian faith and ethics, without text. Survey of designated portions of John's Gospel, the Epistle to the Romans, and Revelations.
Class III. (Two hours.) Brief overview of the Christian faith and ethics, without a text. Survey of selected sections from John's Gospel, the Epistle to the Romans, and Revelation.
The instruction in religion is commonly given by the city pastors. While all of these men are highly educated, many of them lack the ability to awaken the[Pg 163] minds of the pupils to an active interest in the subject. No examination in religion is required in the gymnasium. As a result of the formality in this teaching and the lack of incentives generally, the members of the classes are listless and inattentive. I insert a note that I made in reference to one class in which I was a visitor. "Most of the class was listless all of the time and all of them most of the time." I have on a few occasions heard short and irrelevant remarks made by pupils in response to direct questions by the instructor, and among the pupils it is accounted no reflection whatever if any of their number states that he knows nothing regarding the situation under discussion. The work appears altogether void of interest and without profit.
The instruction in religion is usually provided by the city pastors. While all of these men are well-educated, many lack the ability to spark the students' active interest in the subject. No exams in religion are required in the gymnasium. As a result of the formality in this teaching and the general lack of incentives, the class members are disengaged and inattentive. I want to include a note I made about one class I visited. "Most of the class was disengaged all of the time and all of them were most of the time." I've occasionally heard brief and irrelevant comments from students in response to direct questions from the instructor, and among the students, it’s not considered a big deal if one of them admits he knows nothing about the topic being discussed. The whole experience seems completely uninteresting and unproductive.
It seems almost pathetic that a subject of such importance should have its richness of content dissipated and wasted through lack of incentives or by reason of unsuccessful methods of presentation. My observation of the work from the beginning of the primary school through all the classes up to the completion of the gymnasium convinces me that the personal and concrete presentations in the lower grades are very successful but that the formal, authoritative work in the secondary schools is little more than failure.
It seems almost sad that such an important subject has its rich content wasted due to lack of incentives or unsuccessful teaching methods. From my observation of education from the start of primary school through to the end of high school, I believe that the personal and hands-on approaches in the younger grades are very effective, but the formal, rigid methods in secondary schools achieve little more than failure.
Norwegian
Class I. A and B (Four hours.) Pauss and Lassen's Reader IV. 1. Njael's saga. Holberg's The Busybodies and Peter Paars. Part of Ohlenschlager's Aladdin. Baggesen's Noureddin to Aladdin. Hertz's[Pg 164] Svend Dyring's House. Also in A, Ibsen's Vikings at Helgeland; in B, Ibsen's The Feast at Solhaug; Bjornson's Synnove Solbakken.
Class I. A and B (Four hours.) Pauss and Lassen's Reader IV. 1. Njael's saga. Holberg's The Busybodies and Peter Paars. Part of Ohlenschlager's Aladdin. Baggesen's Noureddin to Aladdin. Hertz's[Pg 164] Svend Dyring's House. Also in A, Ibsen's Vikings at Helgeland; in B, Ibsen's The Feast at Solhaug; Bjornson's Synnove Solbakken.
Landsmaal. Garborg and Mortensen's Reader for Higher Schools. About forty pages from Aasen, Janson, Sivle, etc.
Landsmaal. Garborg and Mortensen's Reader for Higher Schools. About forty pages from Aasen, Janson, Sivle, etc.
Fourteen compositions in each class. Assigned exercises: Impressions from the summer vacations; what do we learn from Njaal's saga regarding life and customs in Iceland about the year one thousand; a characteristic of the "Busybodies" by Holberg; Christiania as a city of manufacture and industry; a comparison between the east and west of Norway with references to nature and commerce; a painting I like; Norway as a tourist land; do not put off until tomorrow what you can do today; why could not the Persians conquer the Greeks; the dark sides of city life; what circumstances have combined in giving the Norsemen high ranking as seamen?
Fourteen pieces in each class. Assigned tasks: Impressions from summer vacation; what we learn from Njaal's saga about life and customs in Iceland around the year 1000; a trait of the "Busybodies" by Holberg; Christiania as a manufacturing and industrial city; a comparison between eastern and western Norway with mentions of nature and commerce; a painting I like; Norway as a tourist destination; don’t put off until tomorrow what you can do today; why couldn’t the Persians conquer the Greeks; the darker sides of city life; what factors have contributed to the Norsemen's high status as sailors?
Class II. R. G. (Five hours.) History of Literature through the literature of the North, folk songs, a collection of Danish and Norwegian ballads, selections from Asbjornsen, Moe, and Holberg. Romance poetry, some read minutely and the rest cursorily. Consideration of Aasen and the Landsmaal movement. Sixty pages of Garborg and Mortenson's Landsmaal. About twenty pages of Old Norse from Nygaard's beginner's book.
Class II. R. G. (Five hours.) History of Literature through the literature of the North, folk songs, a collection of Danish and Norwegian ballads, selections from Asbjornsen, Moe, and Holberg. Romance poetry, some studied in detail and the rest briefly. Discussion of Aasen and the Landsmaal movement. Sixty pages from Garborg and Mortenson's Landsmaal. About twenty pages of Old Norse from Nygaard's beginner's book.
Written exercises, frequently on topics of interest. Besides all this each pupil must give a discussion on a self-selected theme before the class.
Written exercises, often on topics of interest. In addition, each student must present a discussion on a self-chosen theme before the class.
Class II. L-H. (Six and five hours.) Holberg's Erasmus Montanus. Wessel's Kjaerlighed uden Stromper (Love without Stockings.) History of literature to about one thousand, eight hundred. Shakespeare's Julius Caesar. In the Landsmaal selections from Garborg and Mortenson's Reader (excepting folk songs.) Old Norse: Nygaard's beginner's book. Some pages from Thor to Utgard. Twelve written exercises on important literary, historical, and industrial subjects.
Class II. L-H. (Six and five hours.) Holberg's Erasmus Montanus. Wessel's Kjaerlighed uden Stromper (Love without Stockings.) A history of literature up to around 1800. Shakespeare's Julius Caesar. In the Landsmaal selections from Garborg and Mortenson's Reader (excluding folk songs.) Old Norse: Nygaard's beginner's book. Some pages from Thor to Utgard. Twelve written exercises on key literary, historical, and industrial topics.
Class III. R. G. (Four hours.) History of literature from Holberg down to the present. Read scrutinizingly selected writings of Holberg, Ohlenschlager, Wergeland, Welhaven, Asbjornsen and Ibsen. In the Landsmaal read from Garborg and Mortenson's Reader and the writings of Vinje. In the Old Norse read the remainder of Nygaard's beginner's book. History of language and history of literature. Many written exercises, largely literary and historical topics.
Class III. R. G. (Four hours.) A history of literature from Holberg to the present. Read carefully selected works by Holberg, Ohlenschlager, Wergeland, Welhaven, Asbjornsen, and Ibsen. In the Landsmaal, read from Garborg and Mortenson's Reader and the writings of Vinje. In Old Norse, finish the rest of Nygaard's beginner's book. Cover the history of language and literature. There will be many written assignments, focusing mostly on literary and historical topics.
Class III. L-H. (Five and four hours.) Special study of selections specified as examination material including the writings of Holberg, Wergeland, and Welhaven. Landsmaal from Garborg and Mortenson's Reader. History of Literature. History of Language. Twelve written compositions on important topics.
Class III. L-H. (Five and four hours.) Focused study of selected materials designated for exams, including works by Holberg, Wergeland, and Welhaven. Landsmaal from Garborg and Mortenson's Reader. Literature History. Language History. Twelve written assignments on significant topics.
The work in literature throughout the gymnasium deals with the masterpieces of the language in an analytic and critical way. The aims are to familiarize the pupils with the best productions in the language, to acquaint them with the lives and historical relations of their authors, and to develop literary appreciation[Pg 166] and style. Accordingly many writers are included, translations of world classics are utilized, history of literature in its connections with general history receives attention, and ability in composition is encouraged and required.
The literature work in high school focuses on analyzing and critiquing the masterpieces of the language. The goals are to help students get to know the best works out there, learn about the lives and historical contexts of the authors, and develop an appreciation for literature and style. As a result, we cover many writers, use translations of classic works from around the world, pay attention to the history of literature and how it connects to general history, and encourage and require writing skills.[Pg 166]
Eddas, sagas, and the more important productions from successive periods are studied in minute detail. The Landsmaal is not neglected. When any piece of literature is under discussion, related historical events; references to other literary productions, characters, myths, etc.; the life of the author; and many other important points are considered exhaustively. The intricacies of the language are sought out in patience and made familiar. Every known device for completing the literary background is utilized. Since the literature of the country is a part of the life of its citizens, no effort is required to secure intense interest in the work.
Eddas, sagas, and other significant works from different periods are analyzed in great detail. The Landsmaal is also taken into account. When discussing any piece of literature, related historical events, references to other literary works, characters, myths, etc., the author's life, and many other important aspects are thoroughly examined. The complexities of the language are patiently explored and made familiar. Every known method for enhancing the literary context is employed. Since the literature of the country is a reflection of the lives of its citizens, there is no need to generate strong interest in the work.
In the linguistic-historical course more time is devoted to this branch of instruction than is given to it in the real and Latin courses. The quality or class of work is essentially the same though the quantity is necessarily less in the two latter courses. A definite effort is made to place each pupil in possession of the culture represented in the national literature.
In the language and history classes, more time is spent on this area of study than in the real and Latin classes. The level of work is basically the same, although the amount of work is understandably less in the latter two courses. A clear effort is made to ensure each student gains access to the culture found in national literature.
German
Class I. A and B (Three hours.) Gundersen's German for the Gymnasiums. A, sixty-seven pages, B, seventy-five pages, consisting of the following titles: Die Sanger, Die Burgschaft, Der Ring des Polykrates[Pg 167] Der Handschuh, Die Sonne Bringt es an den Tag, Die Goldene Repetieruhr, Wie der Meisenseppe Gestorben ist, Umzingelt, Der Stumme Ratsherr, Zur Geschichte des 30-jahrigen Krieges, Landsknecht and Soldat. In B review the more important features of syntax in O. Kristiansen's Grammatical Exercises.
Class I. A and B (Three hours.) Gundersen's German for the Gymnasiums. A has sixty-seven pages, and B has seventy-five pages, which include the following titles: Die Sanger, Die Burgschaft, Der Ring des Polykrates[Pg 167] Der Handschuh, Die Sonne Bringt es an den Tag, Die Goldene Repetieruhr, Wie der Meisenseppe Gestorben ist, Umzingelt, Der Stumme Ratsherr, Zur Geschichte des 30-jahrigen Krieges, Landsknecht and Soldat. In B, review the more important features of syntax from O. Kristiansen's Grammatical Exercises.
Once every week a written review of a lesson read.
Once a week, a written review of a lesson read.
Class II. (Three hours.) Gundersen's German for Gymnasiums, about one hundred pages. Fifteen written exercises, partly reproductions of new matter and partly write-ups of what has been studied. In real gymnasium some supplementary assignments in addition (Das Schneeschuhlaufen, Die Lage Kristianias, etc.)
Class II. (Three hours.) Gundersen's German for Gymnasiums, about one hundred pages. Fifteen written exercises, partly reproducing new material and partly summarizing what has been studied. In real gymnasium, some additional assignments are included (Das Schneeschuhlaufen, Die Lage Kristianias, etc.)
Class III. (Alternating three and four hours.) Gundersen's German for Gymnasiums. Reading finished and the greater part of it reviewed. Every second week a written review covering two consecutive hours.
Class III. (Alternating three and four hours.) Gundersen's German for Gymnasiums. Reading completed and most of it reviewed. Every other week, there will be a written review covering two consecutive hours.
German is recognized as the language of a great neighbor nation and is assiduously studied. Much time has been spent in the middle school in acquiring the language and now three years are used in introducing the pupils into the thought-life and culture of the nation through the inner contact of its literature. Some of Germany's more important authors are studied rather exhaustively. An endeavor is also put forth to become familiar with the most remarkable events in the history of that Empire. Through this advanced treatment they perfect their knowledge of the language as such, and further their ability to converse in the foreign tongue.
German is acknowledged as the language of a significant neighboring country and is diligently studied. A lot of time has been spent in middle school learning the language, and now three years are dedicated to introducing students to the thought processes and culture of the nation through direct engagement with its literature. Some of Germany's key authors are studied in considerable depth. There is also an effort to become familiar with the most notable events in the history of that empire. Through this advanced approach, they enhance their knowledge of the language itself and improve their ability to speak in the foreign tongue.
French
Class I. A (Four hours.) After the more important parts of phonology, Hermanstorff and Wallem's Reader in French for the Gymnasium I. pp. 18-108. The most essential parts of the grammar, together with many exercises in translation. While reviewing, special emphasis is placed upon reading exercises.
Class I. A (Four hours.) After covering the major aspects of phonology, Hermanstorff and Wallem's Reader in French for the Gymnasium I. pp. 18-108. The key elements of grammar are included, along with various translation exercises. During the review, particular focus is given to reading exercises.
Class I. B (Four hours.) Hermanstorff and Wallem's Reader I pp. 1-55 read and reviewed, together with the corresponding translations from Norwegian p. 109 ff. In addition pages 98-108 are read and reviewed and most of the remaining exercises are gone through cursorily. Wallem's Vocabulary Part I. 1 and Part V. 6-9 are studied.
Class I. B (Four hours.) Hermanstorff and Wallem's Reader I pp. 1-55 are read and reviewed, along with the corresponding translations from Norwegian p. 109 and onward. Additionally, pages 98-108 are read and reviewed, and most of the other exercises are gone through briefly. Wallem's Vocabulary Part I. 1 and Part V. 6-9 are studied.
Class II. R. G. (Two hours.) Hermanstorff and Wallem's Reader II pp. 1-31 and 104-112. Grammar drill by references to synopses of grammar in the beginner's book. Wallem's Vocabulary Part I. 1 and V. 6-10 studied and reviewed.
Class II. R. G. (Two hours.) Hermanstorff and Wallem's Reader II pp. 1-31 and 104-112. Grammar practice using the grammar summaries in the beginner's book. Wallem's Vocabulary Part I. 1 and V. 6-10 studied and reviewed.
Class II. Lang. (With Latin five hours, without Latin four hours.) Hermanstorff and Wallem's Reader. Division without Latin about eighty pages, consisting of Part I., the last section and Part II selections for A, I-VI for B, III, IV, VII, XI. Division with Latin, the same amount excepting B, VII and XI. Wallem's Vocabulary, review V. 6-9.
Class II. Lang. (With Latin five hours, without Latin four hours.) Hermanstorff and Wallem's Reader. The division without Latin has about eighty pages, including Part I., the last section, and selected parts from Part II for A, I-VI for B, III, IV, VII, XI. The division with Latin includes the same amount except for B, VII and XI. Wallem's Vocabulary, review V. 6-9.
Class III. R. G. (Two hours.) Hermanstorff and Wallem's Reader, about eighty pages.
Class III. R. G. (Two hours.) Hermanstorff and Wallem's Reader, around eighty pages.
Class III. Lang. (Three hours.) Hermanstorff and Wallem's Reader I, the last section and II for A, I-X[Pg 169] and for B, I-XIII with the exception of a few selections such as X in A which is read only cursorily. As exercise in ex tempore translation use Duruy's History of France.
Class III. Lang. (Three hours.) Hermanstorff and Wallem's Reader I, the last section and II for A, I-X[Pg 169] and for B, I-XIII with the exception of a few selections like X in A which is only briefly reviewed. For practice in ex tempore translation, use Duruy's History of France.
About the same amount of French is taken in the Latin as in the real course of study though it is carried but for two years in the former and three in the latter.[25] More time is provided for it in the linguistic-historical course then in either of the others. Reference to the table on page 171 will indicate exactly the amount of time used and its distribution throughout the years.
About the same amount of French is taken in the Latin as in the real course of study though it is carried but for two years in the former and three in the latter.[25] More time is provided for it in the linguistic-historical course then in either of the others. Reference to the table on page 171 will indicate exactly the amount of time used and its distribution throughout the years.
The French language is not as closely related to the Norwegian as are the German and English. Greater variations are noted both in pronunciation and in vocabulary. Almost universally the Norwegians regard it as the most difficult of the three foreign languages to acquire.
The French language is not as closely related to Norwegian as German and English are. There are more differences in both pronunciation and vocabulary. Almost universally, Norwegians see it as the hardest of the three foreign languages to learn.
The study of French is not begun until the pupils enter the gymnasium when they are fourteen or fifteen years old. English and German are begun three and four years before French. The teachers believe that a mistake is made in not beginning the study of French earlier. It is worthy of note that the Norwegian pedagogues who have tried beginning instruction in the languages at different times in the school course are definitely of the opinion that to begin the study of a foreign language early is a distinct advantage. It seems to the writer that American schools might profit by this experience and introduce the study of languages in the lower grades.
The study of French doesn’t start until students enter high school at around fourteen or fifteen years old. English and German are taught three to four years before French. The teachers think it’s a mistake not to start teaching French sooner. Interestingly, Norwegian educators who have experimented with starting language instruction at various points in the school curriculum strongly believe that beginning the study of a foreign language early is a clear advantage. The author feels that American schools could benefit from this insight and should introduce language studies in the lower grades.
TABLE XI
Course of study showing weekly hours in Christiania Cathedral School (1910-1911).
GYMNASIUM | |||||||||||||
Courses | Real | Language-History | Latin | Middle School | |||||||||
Classes | 3 | 2 | 1 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 3 | 2 | 1 | IV. | III. | II. | I. |
Religion | 2 | 1 | 1 | 2 | 1 | 1 | 2 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
Norwegian | 4 | 5 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 4 | 4 | 5 | 4 | 3-1/2 | 3-1/2 | 4 | 5 |
German | 3-1/2 | 3 | 3 | 3-1/2 | 3 | 3 | 3-1/2 | 3 | 3 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 6 |
French | 2 | 2 | 4 | 3 | 4 | 4 | 0 | 5 | 4 | ||||
English | 2 | 2 | 4 | 7 | 7 | 4 | 2 | 2 | 4 | 5 | 5 | 5 | |
Latin | 11 | 7 | |||||||||||
History | 3 | 3 | 3 | 5 | 5 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 2 | 3 |
Geography | 2 | 1 | 1 | 2 | 1 | 1 | 2 | 1 | 1 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
Mathematics | 6 | 6 | 4 | 2 | 2 | 4 | 2 | 2 | 4 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 5 |
Natural Science | 5 | 5 | 4 | 1 | 1 | 4 | 1 | 1 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 2 | 3 |
Writing | 1/2 | 1/2 | 1 | 2 | |||||||||
Drawing | 1 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | ||||
Vocal Music | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | |
Gymnastics | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
Manual Training | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | |||||||||
Total | 35-1/2 | 35 | 35 | 35-1/2 | 35 | 35 | 35-1/2 | 35 | 35 | 36 | 36 | 36 | 36 |
English
Class I. (Four hours.) Brekke and Western's Selections from English Authors for the First Gymnasium. The regulation sixty pages (matter from which examination is taken) is read and reviewed. Forty pages ex tempore. One synopsis or reproduction each second week. Knudsen's English Prepositions and Synonyms.
Class I. (Four hours.) Brekke and Western's Selections from English Authors for the First Gymnasium. The required sixty pages (the material for the exam) is read and discussed. Forty pages ex tempore. One summary or recreation every other week. Knudsen's English Prepositions and Synonyms.
Class II. R. G. and Latin (Two hours.) Brekke and Western's Selections for Second and Third Classes in the Real Gymnasium. Sixty-seven pages read and reviewed in part. Ex tempore: Called Back of Conwoy.
Class II. R. G. and Latin (Two hours.) Brekke and Western's Selections for Second and Third Classes in the Real Gymnasium. Sixty-seven pages read and partially reviewed. Ex tempore: Called Back of Conwoy.
Class II. L-H. (Seven hours.) Brekke and Western's Selections from English Authors for Second and Third Linguistic-Historical Classes, one hundred and sixty pages. Merchant of Venice, Act I. Most of Brigadier Gerard by Conan Doyle. Western's English Institutions gone through. Otto Anderssen's History of Literature to "Bacon." Written exercises each week.
Class II. L-H. (Seven hours.) Brekke and Western's Selections from English Authors for Second and Third Linguistic-Historical Classes, one hundred and sixty pages. The Merchant of Venice, Act I. Most of Brigadier Gerard by Conan Doyle. Western's English Institutions covered. Otto Anderssen's History of Literature up to "Bacon." Written assignments each week.
Class III. R. G. (Two hours.) Anderssen and Eitrem's Selection of English Classics, thirty-three pages. The portion from which selections are taken for the final examination (Artium Examen) reviewed in its entirety. Ex tempore: Called Back of Conwoy.
Class III. R. G. (Two hours.) Anderssen and Eitrem's Selection of English Classics, thirty-three pages. The section used for the final exam (Artium Examen) reviewed in full. Ex tempore: Called Back of Conwoy.
Class III. L-H. (Seven hours.) Brekke and Western's Reader. Obligatory, Selections 3, 4, 16, 17, 11, 19. From Otto Anderssen's English Literature the required amount: Swift, Byron, Thackeray, Merchant[Pg 172] of Venice. O. Anderssen's History of English Literature. Western's English Institutions. Written work each week.
Class III. L-H. (Seven hours.) Brekke and Western's Reader. Required: Selections 3, 4, 16, 17, 11, 19. From Otto Anderssen's English Literature, the required readings include Swift, Byron, Thackeray, Merchant[Pg 172] of Venice. O. Anderssen's History of English Literature. Western's English Institutions. Weekly written assignments.
Class III. Latin (Two hours.) Anderssen and Eitrem's Selection of English Classics, forty-five pages. Review of selections from which examinations are taken.
Class III. Latin (Two hours.) Anderssen and Eitrem's Selection of English Classics, forty-five pages. Review of selections from which exams are taken.
The connections the Norwegians sustain with the English speaking world are, perhaps, stronger than those binding them to any other people. Norway has close commercial associations with both England and America, and rarely does one find a family in Norway without near relatives in one or both countries. As a consequence, more than usual interest attaches to the study of English. Strenuous efforts are now being made to introduce it into the curriculum of the elementary school, and such change will probably be effected at an early date.
The connections that Norwegians have with the English-speaking world are possibly stronger than those they have with any other nationality. Norway has strong commercial ties with both England and America, and it's uncommon to find a family in Norway without close relatives in one or both countries. Because of this, there's a heightened interest in studying English. Significant efforts are currently being made to add it to the curriculum of elementary schools, and this change will likely happen soon.
According to the present plan those who graduate from the gymnasium have studied English six or seven years and have gained a fairly definite knowledge of it. They are able to read fluently and converse with ease. They have become familiar also with much of the best English literature, and through it have been brought into close touch with the life and culture of the English speaking peoples.
According to the current plan, those who graduate from the gymnasium have studied English for six or seven years and have gained a solid understanding of it. They can read fluently and have smooth conversations. They have also become familiar with a lot of the best English literature, which has connected them closely with the life and culture of English-speaking people.
Latin
Class II. Latin (Seven hours.) Schreiner's Short Grammar. Inflection and some of the rules of syntax. Ording's elementary book. Ording's Latin Reading Selections, pp. 1-36. Written exercises each week.
Class II. Latin (Seven hours.) Schreiner's Short Grammar. Inflection and some rules of syntax. Ording's elementary book. Ording's Latin Reading Selections, pp. 1-36. Written exercises each week.
Class III. Latin (Eleven hours.) Schreiner's Latin Reading Selections, pp. 30-67 and 73-88. Livy XXII., chapters 4, 9-15, 16-18, 19-28, 42-55. Cicero in Verrem IV., sections 1-14, 60-70, 72-81, 105-115. Schreiner's Short Grammar: Syntax. Forty written translations.
Class III. Latin (Eleven hours.) Schreiner's Latin Reading Selections, pp. 30-67 and 73-88. Livy XXII., chapters 4, 9-15, 16-18, 19-28, 42-55. Cicero in Verrem IV., sections 1-14, 60-70, 72-81, 105-115. Schreiner's Short Grammar: Syntax. Forty written translations.
Latin is included in the curricula of only about one-half of the gymnasia of Norway.[26] It is taught by competent teachers who appeal to the interests of the pupils through related history and literature, and through promise of linguistic excellence. The work is gone into thoroughly, drill is constant, and readiness in response is demanded.
Latin is included in the curricula of only about one-half of the gymnasia of Norway.[26] It is taught by competent teachers who appeal to the interests of the pupils through related history and literature, and through promise of linguistic excellence. The work is gone into thoroughly, drill is constant, and readiness in response is demanded.
Despite the excellent quality of instruction there is a general feeling among the Norwegians that the study of Latin does not yield the immediate and substantial returns coming from other kinds of study. While they recognize that for advanced work in certain lines Latin is a prerequisite, they are convinced that, outside of those special lines of learning, contemporary tongues, history, biology, industrial chemistry, and other scientific subjects are more beneficial. As a consequence this branch of study is on the decline.
Despite the high quality of teaching, many Norwegians feel that studying Latin doesn't provide the immediate and significant benefits that other subjects do. While they acknowledge that Latin is necessary for advanced study in some areas, they believe that, outside of those specific fields, modern languages, history, biology, industrial chemistry, and other scientific topics are more valuable. As a result, this area of study is declining.
History
Class I. (Three hours.) Ancient history as treated in Raeder's text. History of the middle ages up to the[Pg 174] second division from Schjoth and Lange's General History.
Class I. (Three hours.) Ancient history as discussed in Raeder's text. History of the Middle Ages up to the [Pg 174] second division from Schjoth and Lange's General History.
Class II. R. G. and Latin (Three hours.) Schjoth and Lange's General History. History of the Middle Ages and of Modern times until the Vienna Congress. History of Scandinavia until 1720. Survey of its more important portions—oral or written.
Class II. R. G. and Latin (Three hours.) Schjoth and Lange's General History. History of the Middle Ages and Modern times up until the Vienna Congress. History of Scandinavia up until 1720. Overview of its most significant parts—either spoken or written.
Class II. L-H. (Five hours.) History of the Middle ages down to the French Revolution from Schjoth and Lange's General History. History of Scandinavia to 1720. In addition use two hours per week in historical readings including such topics as the feudal system, medieval poetry, the university, Venice, craftsmen and merchants in the middle ages, Fredrik II., Hanseatics and aristocracy in the north, William Pitt.
Class II. L-H. (Five hours.) History of the Middle Ages up to the French Revolution from Schjoth and Lange's General History. History of Scandinavia until 1720. Additionally, spend two hours each week on historical readings covering topics like the feudal system, medieval poetry, universities, Venice, craftsmen and merchants in the Middle Ages, Fredrik II, the Hanseatic League, and the aristocracy in the North, William Pitt.
Class III. L-H. (Five hours.) Schjoth and Lange's General History finished. Scandinavian history in the nineteenth century. Review of all requirements. Taranger's Social Conditions or Civics. Historical readings including introduction to the French Revolution, state rights in Norway, general culture and political development in our time, Norway in 1814, historical events.
Class III. L-H. (Five hours.) Completion of Schjoth and Lange's General History. Scandinavian history in the nineteenth century. Review of all requirements. Taranger's Social Conditions or Civics. Historical readings covering the introduction to the French Revolution, state rights in Norway, general culture and political development in our time, Norway in 1814, and significant historical events.
Class III. Real and Latin. (Three hours.) History of Norway since the treaty of Kiel in 1814, and the history of Europe after the Vienna Congress, using Schjoth and Lange's General History. The more important features are presented in oral synopses. Besides this Taranger's Civil Government of Norway.
Class III. Real and Latin. (Three hours.) History of Norway since the treaty of Kiel in 1814, and the history of Europe after the Vienna Congress, using Schjoth and Lange's General History. The key features are presented in oral summaries. In addition, Taranger's Civil Government of Norway is included.
The study of history in the gymnasium builds very definitely upon the foundations laid in the primary[Pg 175] and middle schools. The supposition is that the pupils are by this time capable of getting from texts the information they contain.
The study of history in high school definitely builds on the foundations established in elementary[Pg 175] and middle schools. The assumption is that by now, students are able to extract the information from the texts.
The class periods are devoted partially to texts of lesson preparation, but mostly to free discussion and to presentation of relevant material by the instructor. Bits of information regarding the private life of historical characters, minor incidents in their careers, and varied personal touches given by the teacher infuse spirit and vitality into the entire course. The lessons are brought directly home to the pupils and they are able to appreciate the fact that they are inheritors of past accomplishments and participants in present activities. Some of the most interesting and enthusiastic recitations I visited were in history.
The class periods are partly dedicated to preparing lesson texts, but mostly to open discussions and the instructor sharing relevant material. Insights about the personal lives of historical figures, small events in their careers, and various personal anecdotes from the teacher add energy and life to the whole course. The lessons directly connect with the students, helping them recognize that they are the heirs of past achievements and active participants in current events. Some of the most engaging and passionate discussions I attended were in history.
All through the course in history Norway is given first attention and consideration. Its history is begun first, all along it is made the center around which the history of other nations is grouped, and finally it is given the concentrated, mature, and crowning efforts of those pursuing the long course of instruction. The closing year is generally devoted to a study of social and political conditions in the fatherland. Norway's constitution with its many provisions and administrative features of government (general and local) is given to the youths in clear, concrete, and concise presentations. Upon leaving the gymnasium the young people, therefore, are in a position to appreciate the meaning, privileges, and responsibilities of citizenship. While they have their affections centered in their native land, they[Pg 176] are able to comprehend the relative accomplishments, standing, and conditions of other countries.
Throughout the history course, Norway is given primary focus and attention. Its history is introduced first, and it remains the central point around which the histories of other nations are organized. In the final year, it receives the concentrated, mature efforts of those pursuing the long curriculum. The last year is typically dedicated to examining social and political conditions in the homeland. Norway's constitution, with its numerous provisions and governmental features (both general and local), is presented to the students in clear, straightforward, and concise ways. Consequently, when they graduate from gymnasium, the young people are equipped to understand the meaning, privileges, and responsibilities of citizenship. While their affections are anchored in their native land, they[Pg 176] can also grasp the relative achievements, status, and situations of other countries.
Geography
Class I. (One hour.) Haffner's Physical Geography.
Class I. (One hour.) Haffner's Physical Geography.
Class II. (One hour.) Steen's Mathematical Geography. Completed and reviewed.
Class II. (One hour.) Steen's Mathematical Geography. Finished and reviewed.
Class III. (Two hours.) Arstal's Economic Geography. Review all requirements.
Class III. (Two hours.) Arstal's Economic Geography. Review all the requirements.
The gymnasial course in geography includes physical geography, astronomy, and political geography. It is rich and profitable. Under the head of physical geography are included such topics as physiography, petrography, dynamic geology, history of the world's development, the earth's surface, oceanography, and the atmosphere. While only a general survey of the respective fields is possible, the pupils obtain a pretty fair grasp of fundamentals and feel that they have a very good and adequate idea of what their home—the earth—really is.
The high school geography course includes physical geography, astronomy, and political geography. It’s comprehensive and valuable. In physical geography, topics include landforms, rock studies, dynamic geology, the history of the Earth’s development, the planet’s surface, ocean science, and the atmosphere. Although only a general overview of these subjects is possible, students gain a solid understanding of the basics and feel they have a good grasp of what their home—the Earth—truly is.
The work in astronomy or mathematical geography, as it is frequently called, is concerned chiefly with the earth's place in the universe, the Copernican system, Keppler's laws, the moon, the earth (form, size, and motion), the celestial world in general, the sun's apparent motion, the sun as a measurer of time, etc., etc.
The study of astronomy, often referred to as mathematical geography, primarily focuses on the earth's position in the universe, the Copernican model, Kepler's laws, the moon, the earth (its shape, size, and movement), the overall celestial world, the sun's apparent movement, and the sun as a way to measure time, among other things.
Political geography provides acquaintance with the earth in special reference to man's presence and welfare. It treats of his means of livelihood, ways of communication, and the conditions under which he colonizes, builds up cities, and develops generally.
Political geography gives us insight into the earth, especially concerning human presence and well-being. It focuses on how people make a living, communicate, and the circumstances in which they settle, create cities, and develop overall.
Mathematics
Class I. (Four hours.) Algebra: Bonnevie and Berg's text. From beginning to "Series." Geometry: Bonnevie and Sorensen's text. Entire text covered and reviewed. Examples at home and at school.
Class I. (Four hours.) Algebra: Bonnevie and Berg's textbook. From the beginning to "Series." Geometry: Bonnevie and Sorensen's textbook. Complete text covered and reviewed. Homework and class examples.
Class II. Real (Six hours.) Algebra: Bonnevie and Berg's text. From "Series" to end of text. Trigonometry: Johannesen's text. Completed and reviewed. Stereometry: Guldberg's text. Completed and reviewed. Analytical Geometry: Guldberg's text. From beginning to "The Ellipse." Problems at home and at school.
Class II. Real (Six hours.) Algebra: Bonnevie and Berg's textbook. From "Series" to the end of the textbook. Trigonometry: Johannesen's textbook. Completed and reviewed. Stereometry: Guldberg's textbook. Completed and reviewed. Analytical Geometry: Guldberg's textbook. From the beginning to "The Ellipse." Assignments at home and at school.
Class II. Linguistic (Two hours.) Algebra: Bonnevie and Berg's text. "Series." Trigonometry: O. Johannesen's text. Solving of problems.
Class II. Linguistic (Two hours.) Algebra: Bonnevie and Berg's textbook. "Series." Trigonometry: O. Johannesen's textbook. Problem-solving.
Class III. Real (Six hours.) Guldberg's Analytical Geometry. E. Holst's Higher Arithmetical Series. Review of all requirements in real course. Solution of problems.
Class III. Real (Six hours.) Guldberg's Analytical Geometry. E. Holst's Higher Arithmetical Series. Review of all requirements in real course. Solution of problems.
Class III. Linguistic (Two hours.) Review of the entire requirement. Examples at home and at school.
Class III. Linguistic (Two hours.) Review of all the requirements. Examples from home and school.
In addition to completing the work begun in the middle school in arithmetic, algebra, and geometry; instruction in the gymnasium includes trigonometry, stereometry, analytical geometry, and higher arithmetical series. The methods of instruction are the same as those used in the middle school though, of course, adapted to the greater maturity and stronger mentality of the pupils. By the time pupils enter the[Pg 178] gymnasium considerable ability should have been gained in working independently. Where necessary, the teacher cooperates in solving problems and makes sure that the principles involved are thoroughly understood.
In addition to finishing the work started in middle school in arithmetic, algebra, and geometry, instruction in the gymnasium includes trigonometry, stereometry, analytical geometry, and advanced arithmetic series. The teaching methods are similar to those used in middle school but, of course, are adjusted for the greater maturity and stronger mindset of the students. By the time students enter the [Pg 178] gymnasium, they should have developed considerable skills in working independently. When necessary, the teacher collaborates with students to solve problems and ensures that the underlying principles are thoroughly understood.
Frequently during the recitation period several members of the class are called to the blackboard, one at a time, to perform operations under consideration. As the pupil develops the problem he explains every step taken as he proceeds. The other pupils observe closely, take notes, and offer suggestions. The instructor carefully supervises every move, giving explanations when necessary not permitting erasures or leaving any operation until all in the class understand fully. In this way hearty cooperation is secured. Every mind is actively engaged and the excellent results testify of the validity of the method.
Frequently during the recitation period, several students from the class are called to the board, one at a time, to work on the problems being discussed. As each student tackles the problem, they explain each step they take. The other students watch closely, take notes, and share their suggestions. The instructor closely oversees everything, providing explanations when needed, and doesn’t allow any erasing or moving on until everyone in the class fully understands. This way, strong cooperation is achieved. Every mind is actively involved, and the great results demonstrate the effectiveness of the method.
Work in analytical geometry and higher arithmetical series is taken only by those in the real course of instruction.
Work in analytical geometry and advanced arithmetic series is only taken by those in the real course of instruction.
Natural History
Class I. (Four hours.) Chemistry: Waage's The Chemistry of Daily Life. Gone through and reviewed. Physiology: Knudsen and Falch's The Human Body II. Studied and reviewed.
Class I. (Four hours.) Chemistry: Waage's The Chemistry of Daily Life. Reviewed. Physiology: Knudsen and Falch's The Human Body II. Studied and reviewed.
Class II. Real (Five hours.) Isaachsen's Physics. From the beginning to "Heat." Review after having carefully studied. Exercises at home and at school. Botany: Th. Resvoll's text. Completed and reviewed.
Class II. Real (Five hours.) Isaachsen's Physics. From the start to "Heat." Review after studying thoroughly. Practice assignments at home and at school. Botany: Th. Resvoll's textbook. Completed and reviewed.
Class II. Linguistic (One hour.) Botany: Resvoll's text. Completed and reviewed.
Class II. Linguistic (One hour.) Botany: Resvoll's textbook. Finished and reviewed.
Class III. Real (Five hours.) Isaachsen's Physics. From "Heat" to end of text. Entire text reviewed. Zoology: Chr. Bonnevie's text. Studied and reviewed. Botany: Th. Resvoll's text reviewed.
Class III. Real (Five hours.) Isaachsen's Physics. From "Heat" to the end of the text. The entire text has been reviewed. Zoology: Chr. Bonnevie's text has been studied and reviewed. Botany: Th. Resvoll's text has been reviewed.
Class III. Linguistic (One hour.) Zoology: Chr. Bonnevie's text. Studied and reviewed. Botany: Th. Resvoll's text reviewed.
Class III. Linguistic (One hour.) Zoology: Chr. Bonnevie's textbook. Studied and reviewed. Botany: Th. Resvoll's textbook reviewed.
Natural Science or Nature Study in the earlier years of school life is less differentiated than it becomes in the gymnasium. Here we find the fields very definitely separated. The more important chemical laws, animal and vegetable development and growth (botany and zoology), and the more essential features of human physiology and hygiene form centers of attention throughout the three years. In the real course physics also is stressed, though in the other courses of study little time is provided for it.
Natural Science or Nature Study in the early years of school is not as specialized as it is in high school. Here, the subjects are clearly divided. The main chemical laws, as well as the growth and development of plants and animals (botany and zoology), along with important aspects of human physiology and health, are the main focus over the three years. In the real course, physics is also emphasized, but there is limited time for it in the other subjects.
Not as much is made of the laboratory method as seems advisable. While every school has some provision for it they do not go at it in real earnest. Only one or two at a time can do first hand work. The others cooperate mentally and get some benefit, but they cannot reap the greater results which immediate individual experimentation yields.
Not enough emphasis is placed on the laboratory method as it should be. While every school has some setup for it, they don’t really commit to it. Only one or two students at a time can actually do hands-on work. The others engage mentally and gain some benefit, but they can’t achieve the greater results that come from immediate individual experimentation.
One day during the progress of a lesson in zoology (where I was a visitor) a supply of live specimens arrived from the marine biological station at Drobak, and the remaining portion of the hour was devoted to investigations at close range. Interest was intense.[Pg 180] Pupils dipped in (literally) and investigated at their own pleasure quite informally. The material was soon divided up into several receptacles, and around each of these gathered an eager group in an effort to use, handle, and examine every specimen. Those who had no interfering appointments for the succeeding hour accounted it a great favor to be privileged to continue this study for an extra class period. This is but one illustration of the interest attending laboratory work where each pupil may handle and examine for himself—where he may be a doer, an active participant instead of merely an observer.
One day, during a zoology lesson I was visiting, we received a shipment of live specimens from the marine biological station at Drobak, and we spent the rest of the hour investigating them up close. The excitement was palpable.[Pg 180] Students jumped in (literally) and explored at their own pace in a relaxed setting. The specimens were quickly divided into several containers, and eager groups gathered around each one to use, handle, and examine every specimen. Those who didn’t have any commitments for the next hour considered it a huge privilege to continue this study for an extra class period. This is just one example of the enthusiasm that comes with hands-on laboratory work, where each student can engage directly and actively rather than just watching from the sidelines.
Chapter IV
INTERPRETATIVE CONCLUSIONS
This chapter is for the consideration of some of the more important phases of the school system presented in greater detail in the foregoing chapters. The aim is to bring some features of Norway's system under close inspection, to interpret them in the light of commonly accepted pedagogical principles, to make comparisons between them and our own, and to suggest possible improvements where they seem to be needed. It is clearly evident that school practices admirably adapted to the social conditions in one country may be far from desirable in another. On the other hand, it is well-known that some educational means may be equally suitable in more than one country. Furthermore, certain fundamental principles are effectual wherever education is attempted. We shall hope to find some things worthy of being adopted bodily by us and others capable of transformation into shapes calculated to improve our educational practices.
This chapter looks at some of the key aspects of the school system discussed in more detail in the previous chapters. The goal is to examine certain features of Norway's system closely, interpret them based on widely accepted teaching principles, compare them to our own, and suggest possible improvements where necessary. It's clear that teaching methods that work well in one country may not be ideal in another. However, it's also well-known that some educational approaches can be effective in multiple countries. Additionally, certain fundamental principles are effective wherever education takes place. We hope to discover some ideas worth fully adopting from them and others that can be adapted to enhance our educational practices.
THE PEOPLE AND THEIR IDEALS
The Norse are a sturdy race having potentialities capable of great accomplishment when once aroused and rightly directed. Conditions prevented these capacities from functioning with freedom until the middle of the[Pg 182] last century when the store of energy which had accumulated during preceding decades and centuries asserted itself and effected a rapid rise in the political and intellectual status of the nation.
The Norse are a strong people with the potential for great achievement when they are motivated and guided correctly. Circumstances kept these abilities from being fully expressed until the middle of the[Pg 182] last century, when the energy that had built up over the past decades and centuries emerged and led to a swift increase in the nation’s political and intellectual standing.
It is believed that Norway is now in a period of transition from a condition of mediocrity to one of eminence among the nations of the world. Politically, ethically, and educationally she assumes larger proportions daily.
It is believed that Norway is currently going through a transformation from a state of mediocrity to one of prominence among the nations of the world. Politically, ethically, and educationally, it grows larger every day.
As individuals the Norwegians are recognized among the leaders in literature, art, and science, and equal to any as pioneers in the development of the rich frontiers. As citizens they are enthusiastically welcomed everywhere. Climatic conditions and habits of life have given them the sturdiness of physique and vigor of mind which make them fearless and undaunted in the face of great undertakings and critical situations. They have become habituated to overcoming all obstacles in their way, and they naturally concentrate their energies for the achievement of their desired ends.
As individuals, Norwegians are known as leaders in literature, art, and science, and are just as much pioneers in exploring new frontiers. As citizens, they are warmly welcomed everywhere. The climate and their way of life have given them a strong physique and a lively mind, which makes them fearless and unflinching in the face of great challenges and tough situations. They have become accustomed to overcoming obstacles in their path and naturally focus their energy on achieving their goals.
It is reasonable to expect similar traits in them as a nation. Their past actions declare these same tendencies and their present attitudes confirm the observer in the belief that the history of Norway will continue the story of regular and ever higher development. Their strongly democratic individuality seems to have been a factor in enabling them to realize and recognize their self in a very successful way. Matters of importance put the entire state into action and it ploughs through to the bottom of things. While very conservative, the state will not permit precedent to stand in the way of accepting new conditions when they are proven[Pg 183] superior to the old. After thorough examination of every detail it passes judgment on the situation and then stands on that solution. Conservation has been an operating principle with them all along the line. A step in advance, some worthy achievement, new or loftier ideals, greater political freedom, and the like when once gained are always retained.
It’s reasonable to expect similar traits in them as a nation. Their past actions show these same tendencies, and their current attitudes reinforce the belief that the history of Norway will continue the story of consistent and ever-increasing development. Their strong democratic individuality appears to have played a role in helping them recognize and realize their identity successfully. Important issues mobilize the entire state, and it digs deep to understand them. While very conservative, the state won’t let tradition block the acceptance of new circumstances when they prove to be better than the old ones[Pg 183]. After thoroughly examining every detail, it makes a judgment on the situation and commits to that solution. Conservation has been a guiding principle for them throughout. Once they achieve progress, such as worthy accomplishments, new or elevated ideals, and greater political freedom, these gains are always maintained.
The union of church and state for example has been to their advantage. Matters of religion and politics were handled by the same hands and as a consequence both were strengthened. Each found in the other sources of inspiration and power. They both recognized education as a necessary fundamental means for their preservation and advancement. Acting in the main on the educational ideals of Martin Luther the church accepted the chief responsibilities in the direction of school activities, while the state very cheerfully undertook the burden of their support. Through the processes of growth direct responsibilities have been more and more shifted to the state, though the church continues to exert very strong influence and render every possible assistance.
The union of church and state has been beneficial for them. Religion and politics were managed by the same people, and as a result, both became stronger. Each found inspiration and power in the other. They both acknowledged education as a crucial means for their survival and progress. Following the educational ideals of Martin Luther, the church took on the main responsibilities for school activities, while the state willingly took on the task of providing financial support. Over time, most responsibilities have shifted more to the state, although the church still has a strong influence and offers all possible assistance.
Resulting from this cooperative activity a system of education has evolved which is effectual in the improvement of the state and in the maintenance of the noblest ideals of the church. According to its design this system of schools qualifies all children in the land for intelligent citizenship, and prepares them severally for the performance of every function of state, the service of the church, and for the various arts, professions, and other occupations of life. In other words, Norway provides[Pg 184] for her children educational advantages suitable to every legitimate requirement or desire. Thus its school system develops a loyal, well-trained citizenship capable of maintaining its highest ideals and eager to cooperate in moving the fatherland forward into greater and nobler achievement.
As a result of this collaborative effort, an effective education system has developed that enhances the state and upholds the highest ideals of the church. This network of schools is designed to equip all children in the country for informed citizenship, preparing them individually for various roles in government, the church, and different arts, professions, and occupations in life. In other words, Norway offers[Pg 184] its children educational opportunities that meet every legitimate need or aspiration. Consequently, its school system fosters a loyal, well-prepared citizenry capable of upholding its highest ideals and eager to work together to advance the homeland toward greater and nobler achievements.
FACILITIES FOR EDUCATION
To satisfy the varied requirements of the nation along the line of educational facilities it has been necessary to establish a complex system of diversified schools. Fundamental in the system are the primary schools providing the thorough elementary training so essential and effectual in the qualifying of citizens. Following these are the secondary schools—middle school and gymnasium—which afford the advantages of higher education along the more liberal lines. Besides these are the many institutions—public and private—for technical and professional study. There are general technical schools, schools of trades and manual arts, agricultural and horticultural institutions, naval and military academies, schools of art, teachers' colleges, a technical high school—an engineering college and institute of technology of high rank—in the city of Trondhjem, and the Royal Frederik University in Christiania which is devoted to specialized study and research in science, letters, and learned professions, including theology, law, medicine, and education. The last is provided for in the affiliated Pedagogical Seminary recently established.
To meet the diverse needs of the nation in terms of educational facilities, it has become necessary to set up a complex system of various schools. At the core of this system are the primary schools, which provide the essential basic education that is crucial for preparing citizens. Next come the secondary schools—middle schools and high schools—that offer the benefits of higher education along more liberal disciplines. In addition to these, there are numerous institutions—both public and private—for technical and professional studies. These include general technical schools, trade and vocational schools, agricultural and horticultural colleges, naval and military academies, art schools, teachers' colleges, a technical high school, a highly regarded engineering college and institute of technology located in Trondhjem, and the Royal Frederik University in Christiania, which focuses on specialized study and research in fields like science, humanities, and professional disciplines, including theology, law, medicine, and education. The latter is supported by the affiliated Pedagogical Seminary, which was recently established.
At this point we may speak a word in commendation[Pg 185] of the important part played by private institutions in Norway. Among them may be enumerated primary and secondary schools, teachers' seminaries, and technical institutes. Being of high merit and operating side by side with the state schools, they have rendered valuable service and exerted a wholesome influence. The state has recognized their work and expressed its appreciation of their efforts by giving them standing and by voting annuities to certain of them.
At this point, we should acknowledge the important role that private institutions play in Norway. These include primary and secondary schools, teacher training colleges, and technical institutes. They are highly respected and work alongside state schools, providing valuable service and a positive influence. The government has recognized their contributions and shown appreciation for their efforts by granting them recognition and providing funding to some of them.
The uniformly high standard of preparation required for entrance to and the close correlation between the several special schools make easy the passage from one to another when it is desired, and give solidarity and unity wherein cooperation is natural and mutually beneficial.
The consistently high standard of preparation needed for admission to the various specialized schools, along with the strong connection between them, makes it easy to transition from one to another when desired, fostering a sense of solidarity and unity where collaboration is natural and beneficial for everyone involved.
It should be noted that provision is made for the proper care of the exceptional child in Norway. This is more particularly true of the defective. The child who is dull of comprehension along some lines receives individual assistance from his regular teacher or another who is employed to do the work. Recognition is given to disparity in physiological and mental age of children. Those who are definitely lacking in mentality are segregated into classes in the large schools and into separate schools in the larger cities, where they are provided with abundant, well-selected equipment and expert teachers who exert every effort to improve the conditions and to overcome the handicaps of the unfortunates. Morally delinquent children are placed in children's homes—homes for correction—where they are supervised and taught. Each child is placed under[Pg 186] the conditions best suited to his needs—where he will be most profited. All of this work comes under the authority of the school officials, and as a result there is close coordination between the regular and the special schools.
It’s important to note that Norway makes provisions for the proper care of exceptional children, especially those with disabilities. Children who struggle to understand certain concepts receive individual support from their main teacher or another designated educator. There is an acknowledgment of the differences in physical and mental development among children. Those who have significant intellectual challenges are placed in separate classes within larger schools or into dedicated schools in bigger cities, where they have access to plenty of well-chosen resources and skilled teachers who work hard to improve their circumstances and help them overcome their challenges. Children with behavioral issues are placed in correctional homes, where they receive supervision and education. Each child is placed under[Pg 186] the conditions best suited to their needs to maximize their benefit. All of this falls under the authority of school officials, leading to effective coordination between regular and special education programs.
Not only do these officials care for the mentally and morally delinquent but they are also authorized and required to take children from environments that are likely to develop evil and lawless traits. Unfit parents may be deprived of the control and authority over their offspring who are taken and placed in private homes of moral influence or in children's homes where they receive proper care and training. Being vested with such authority the school officials are able to do much toward the prevention of delinquency as well as to attend specifically to the individual cases where a lack of moral responsibility is evidenced.
Not only do these officials look after those who are mentally and morally troubled, but they are also allowed and obligated to remove children from situations that might foster negative and unlawful behaviors. Unfit parents can lose their rights and authority over their children, who are then placed in private homes with strong moral values or in children's homes where they receive proper care and guidance. With this authority, school officials can do a lot to prevent delinquency and also focus on specific cases where there's a clear lack of moral responsibility.
Here are wholesome lessons for our American schools. Instead of giving sufficient individual help or providing expert teachers for the less intelligent, we permit them to become repeaters or to drop out altogether; in place of taking the child from an evil environment before he becomes a moral delinquent and placing him under moral surroundings in some good home, we hesitate to interfere with parental rights—as though they were greater than social—and permit him to become a law-breaker; and rather than give to school officials the authority and necessary equipment to care rightfully for the child who has committed some error, we place him in the hands of the law and he is probably sent to a reformatory having neither facility for his proper[Pg 187] treatment nor any connection with the schools whatsoever.
Here are valuable lessons for our American schools. Instead of giving adequate individual support or providing expert teachers for those who need more help, we let them fall behind or drop out entirely. Rather than taking a child out of a harmful environment before they become a moral issue and putting them in a nurturing home, we hesitate to step in and protect their well-being, as if parental rights are more important than the community's. Instead of empowering school officials with the authority and tools to appropriately support a child who has made a mistake, we hand them over to the legal system, often sending them to a reformatory that lacks the resources for their proper treatment and has no connection to the schools at all.
Closer co-ordination of these educational functions and institutions would prevent much misfortune, cure a vast amount of misery, and accomplish more efficient results.
Closer coordination of these educational functions and institutions would avoid a lot of problems, alleviate a significant amount of suffering, and achieve more effective outcomes.
DIRECTING AUTHORITY AND MANAGEMENT OF SCHOOLS
Norway's educational authority is definitely centralized in the person at the head of the Department of Ecclesiastical and Educational Affairs, who is a member of the King's cabinet. The several departments, bureaus, commissions, and boards for control are radiations from this central focus. Furthermore, their schools are parts and parcels of one very definite, though somewhat complex, system; each class of schools, in its respective field, is ordered according to certain specifications; and all are coordinated so as to result in a unified whole without overlapping, or exposure of ragged and loose ends.
Norway's education system is clearly centralized under the head of the Department of Ecclesiastical and Educational Affairs, who is part of the King's cabinet. The various departments, bureaus, commissions, and boards for control are extensions of this central authority. Additionally, their schools are integral parts of a specific, albeit somewhat complicated, system; each category of schools is organized according to set guidelines and all are coordinated to create a unified system without overlaps or loose ends.
The controlling features of greater importance such as curriculum, appointment of teachers, plans of instruction, and the determination of qualifications for teaching positions are in the hands of the higher authorities. In effect the state determines the policies, the officers are expected to respect them, and the patrons exercise but little direct control. For example, the law provides that completion of certain grades of school work shall mean practically the same throughout the country, that the middle school and gymnasium[Pg 188] examinations shall be uniform everywhere in the state, that standards of academic fitness for teaching positions must be the same, and that teachers' salaries shall not be below a certain minimum amount. Local opinion never has a thought of departing from these requirements.
The key aspects that matter most, like the curriculum, hiring of teachers, teaching plans, and the criteria for teaching positions, are controlled by higher authorities. Essentially, the state sets the policies, officials are expected to follow them, and the community has very little direct influence. For instance, the law states that completing certain school grades should mean roughly the same thing across the country, that middle school and gymnasium[Pg 188] exams should be uniform throughout the state, that the standards for teaching qualifications must be consistent, and that teachers' salaries cannot fall below a certain minimum threshold. Local opinions rarely consider straying from these requirements.
Being vested with considerable authority the school officials are able not only to make suggestions and recommendations, but also to enforce all school regulations. This plan is successful in securing the most efficient service of which the officials are capable. They are expected to pursue their duties and perform their obligations according to directions without being too largely influenced by the opinions of individuals or community sentiment. Local politics plays a very small part in determining what shall be the educational trend, though the patrons of the school do enjoy considerable liberty and bear some responsibilities in arranging minor factors with reference to local situations.
Being given significant authority, school officials can not only make suggestions and recommendations but also enforce all school rules. This approach successfully ensures that the officials provide the best service they can. They are expected to carry out their duties and fulfill their responsibilities as directed, without being overly swayed by individual opinions or community feelings. Local politics has a minimal influence on deciding the educational direction, although the school patrons do have a fair amount of freedom and bear some responsibilities in addressing minor issues related to local circumstances.
We Americans might avoid a vast amount of leakage and unnecessary expenditure by improved organization of our educational institutions. A unified system of education, manned by competent officials with some authority, might easily raise the standard of efficiency of our schools several grades, and at the same time reduce the proportional cost. President Hall has given optimistic expression along this line. He writes:—"The time is not far off when we shall coordinate all educational agencies for all classes of children of school age.... All... institutions[Pg 189] for the care and betterment of the bodies, minds or morals of children should correlate their work so that eventually it may all become so consolidated that each child can be placed in that position in the whole great system which will do most and best for it at each stage and so that changes from one to the other can be made whenever it becomes for the welfare of the child.... Diversities of agencies, aims and method should increase; and incorrigibles, defectives, homeless, neglected, backward children and the rest should each have special provision; but integration should keep pace with this differentiation."[27]
We Americans might avoid a vast amount of leakage and unnecessary expenditure by improved organization of our educational institutions. A unified system of education, manned by competent officials with some authority, might easily raise the standard of efficiency of our schools several grades, and at the same time reduce the proportional cost. President Hall has given optimistic expression along this line. He writes:—"The time is not far off when we shall coordinate all educational agencies for all classes of children of school age.... All... institutions[Pg 189] for the care and betterment of the bodies, minds or morals of children should correlate their work so that eventually it may all become so consolidated that each child can be placed in that position in the whole great system which will do most and best for it at each stage and so that changes from one to the other can be made whenever it becomes for the welfare of the child.... Diversities of agencies, aims and method should increase; and incorrigibles, defectives, homeless, neglected, backward children and the rest should each have special provision; but integration should keep pace with this differentiation."[27]
Were our public schools, reformatories, schools for defectives, etc., etc., all combined into one system they might perform their offices more effectively than they do now. Instead of permitting each to run along independent of the rest, they should be made to supplement each other.
If our public schools, reformatories, schools for those with disabilities, etc., were all merged into one system, they could function more effectively than they do now. Rather than allowing each to operate independently, they should be organized to support one another.
Again, it is a matter of common knowledge that in our own country high school graduation, qualifications for teaching positions in the several grades of school work, college entrance requirements, college degrees, etc., are without uniform standardization. At present even a college degree has meaning only when the work and equipment of the institution granting it have been carefully estimated; state teachers' certificates may or may not be valid in other states; and reciprocity among the states in recognizing certificates is not in operation generally. While state certificates are not always demanded, some of the states are now[Pg 190] requiring that all teachers in the high schools must be college graduates. In all too many instances the only effectual prerequisite to obtaining a position as teacher in the schools—primary or secondary—is the vote of the school directors. The gradation of educational activity according to a fixed basis and the raising of standards in academic and pedagogical preparation and in personal fitness for teaching positions would make the schools vastly greater factors in the country's progress and do the nation an inestimable service.
Once again, it's well-known that in our country, there is no consistent standard for high school graduation, teaching qualifications at various grade levels, college entrance requirements, or college degrees. Right now, a college degree only holds value if the institution that awarded it is properly evaluated; state teachers' certificates may or may not be recognized in different states, and reciprocity in certificate recognition between states is generally lacking. While not every state requires certification, some are now[Pg 190] mandating that all high school teachers must be college graduates. Unfortunately, too often, the only real requirement for securing a teaching position—whether in primary or secondary schools—is the approval of the school board members. Establishing a consistent framework for educational standards and improving the criteria for academic and teaching preparation, as well as personal qualifications for educators, would significantly enhance the role of schools in advancing the country and provide invaluable benefits to the nation.
Centralization and uniformity in authority and purpose are distinctly evident in every school activity in Norway. The authority of the state is clearly stamped on the work of every official from the directing head to the last in position. Everyone connected with the system feels the obligations of the position occupied and, at the same time, recognizes his own security while keeping within the limits of the law. They all concentrate their energies in an earnest endeavor to realize the ends which the educational system is designed to reach. Even individual subjects of instruction are presented for specific purposes which in turn contribute to the general end to be reached through the course of study as a whole. Purposes, aims, and ends are always in the foreground of attention, and when teacher and pupils cooperate and are actuated by common ideals, their efforts are sure to be vital and successful.
Centralization and uniformity in authority and purpose are clearly seen in every school activity in Norway. The state's authority is evident in the work of every official, from the top leader to the last position. Everyone involved in the system understands their responsibilities and also recognizes their own security as long as they stay within the law. They all focus their efforts on genuinely trying to achieve the goals that the educational system aims for. Even individual subjects are taught with specific purposes that contribute to the overall objectives of the entire course of study. Goals, aims, and objectives are always at the forefront, and when teachers and students work together, driven by shared ideals, their efforts are bound to be effective and successful.
TEACHERS' TRAINING
Proper pedagogical training is perhaps the most potent factor for good in educational activity. But few systems, if any, adequately meet the needs along this line. Some are well supplied with institutions devoted to the training of teachers so far as their number and distribution are concerned but they are lacking in quality; others have training schools very high in quality but they are poorly distributed and insufficient in number.
Proper teacher training is probably the most important factor for success in education. However, very few systems, if any, really meet the needs in this area. Some have plenty of institutions for training teachers in terms of number and distribution, but they lack quality; others have training schools that are very high-quality but are poorly distributed and too few in number.
The ideals and equipment of these special institutions are factors of prime importance in determining their real values. These center in the personnel of the directing and teaching force. Too frequently thorough scientific preparation for the specific work of supervising and instructing in teachers' seminaries is wanting. Natural endowment coupled with long, varied, and successful experience has been regarded as sufficient qualification. To be sure, native ability is an absolute essential; experience is of immeasurable value; but intensive scientific research in the fields of child nature and development, psychology, and pedagogical principles, together with scientific methods, are equally indispensable.
The ideals and resources of these specialized institutions are crucial in determining their true value. This focus is on the staff responsible for guiding and teaching. Too often, there’s a lack of thorough scientific training for those supervising and instructing in teacher training programs. Natural talent, along with extensive, diverse, and successful experience, has been viewed as enough qualification. While inherent ability is absolutely necessary and experience is invaluable, comprehensive scientific research in child development, psychology, and teaching principles, along with effective methods, is just as essential.
Now it is a truism that teachers teach as they have been taught. Hence, to achieve greatest results, prospective teachers should secure their education (general and professional) from ideal teachers as far as possible and obtain experience through practice teaching under the personal supervision of masters[Pg 192] in education. Preparing under such conditions, their natural capabilities would be brought more nearly to maximum efficiency and they would become powers for good in the profession. To have seminaries so distributed and equipped that all prospective teachers might have the best training within easy access would be an ideal condition.
It's a well-known fact that teachers teach how they were taught. Therefore, to achieve the best results, future teachers should get their education (both general and professional) from exceptional educators whenever possible and gain experience through practical teaching under the direct guidance of experts in education[Pg 192]. Training in such environments would help them reach their full potential and they would become strong positive influences in the profession. Ideally, it would be great to have training institutions scattered and equipped in a way that allows all aspiring teachers to access top-notch training easily.
Germany affords an unparalleled example in the development of teachers' seminaries. No other nation ever had a system of training schools as efficient as the one there provided. Her right to the title of "School mistress of the world" is in large measure traceable to the excellent training provided for and required of the teachers in the schools.
Germany provides an unmatched example in the development of teacher training colleges. No other country has ever had a system of training schools as effective as the one found there. Her claim to the title of "School mistress of the world" can mostly be attributed to the outstanding training offered and required for teachers in the schools.
Norway early recognized the importance of this phase of school work and established six teachers' seminaries. Subsequently four private seminaries have been opened and the state has instituted the Pedagogical Seminary in affiliation with the university in Christiania. This gives them a liberal number of training colleges well distributed. While they are subject to some adverse criticism for failure to keep pace with the development of their school system as a whole, we must admit that the excellent results achieved by the schools of Norway are due largely to the early provision of these seminaries and insistence upon special training for teaching positions.
Norway recognized early on the importance of this phase of education and established six teachers' seminaries. Later, four private seminaries were opened, and the state created the Pedagogical Seminary in partnership with the university in Christiania. This provides a good number of training colleges that are well spread out. While they face some criticism for not keeping up with the overall development of their school system, we have to acknowledge that the outstanding results achieved by Norway's schools are largely due to the early establishment of these seminaries and a focus on specialized training for teaching roles.
It is probable that certain normal schools of the United States deserve the honors so far as ideals and results are concerned even though we have accorded first ranking in system to Germany. Our plan, however,[Pg 193] is too individual in nature to accomplish greatest good. We lack a centralized authority with power to do things. We have practically no co-ordination between state systems and no uniformity. Even in certain states the several schools do not cooperate or supplement each other as they should. The waste occasioned by the looseness of our system is enormous. Could we unify our resources, systematize our equipment, and provide efficient direction along cooperative lines of activity, the American schools would advance by leaps and bounds such as have not been known up to the present time in any nation.
It’s likely that some normal schools in the United States deserve recognition for their ideals and results, even though we’ve ranked Germany as having the best system. Our approach, however,[Pg 193] is too focused on individual efforts to achieve the greatest good. We lack a centralized authority with the power to make decisions. There’s almost no coordination between state systems, and there’s no uniformity. Even within certain states, the various schools don’t cooperate or support each other as they should. The waste caused by the disorganization of our system is huge. If we could unify our resources, organize our equipment, and provide effective guidance for collaborative efforts, American schools would make unprecedented progress that hasn't been seen in any nation so far.
A word is in place here with reference to the process of obtaining professional preparation. One of the best things to be gained by special training is a professional attitude toward the work of teaching. This cannot be attained by spasmodic effort but must be grown into. It comes rather as a result of long-continued study and application of principles than by intensive training for a short while. Direct instruction and experiment extended over a long period of time affords opportunity for innumerable associations and interrelations which no "hurry-up" process can provide. When professional training and study along the general lines of academic learning parallel each other they become interwoven in such a way that each contributes to the other, and simultaneously the proper attitude with respect to educational processes becomes a very real part of the student's life.
A word is relevant here regarding the process of getting professional training. One of the greatest benefits of specialized training is developing a professional attitude towards teaching. This isn’t something that can be achieved with occasional effort; it needs to be cultivated over time. It results more from extensive study and applying principles than from a brief period of intensive training. Ongoing instruction and experimentation over a long duration provide opportunities for countless connections and relationships that no “quick-fix” approach can offer. When professional training and academic study go hand in hand, they become intertwined in a way that each enhances the other, and at the same time, the right attitude towards educational processes becomes a significant part of the student’s life.
There are a number of important pedagogical principles which should become ingrained in the life[Pg 194] of the individual in order that he make a success in the teaching profession. It is a generally conceded and commonly practiced rule in education that to thoroughly master any field of knowledge and really get into its vital parts it is necessary to keep the mind acting upon it, at least intermittently, through several years of time. Principles acted and reacted upon, viewed in this light and that, examined under a certain condition and then another, and tested in various ways may result very differently in one's life than when given a hurried, even though intensive, examination. They are certain in the one instance to sink deep into the life of the individual while in the other case they may or may not affect his behavior.
There are several important teaching principles that should become a fundamental part of an individual's life[Pg 194] for them to succeed in the teaching profession. It's a widely accepted and commonly followed guideline in education that to truly master any area of knowledge and deeply understand its essential components, it's necessary to engage with it regularly over several years. Principles that are actively explored, looked at from different perspectives, examined under various conditions, and tested in different ways can have very different impacts on a person's life compared to a rushed, even if intense, review. In one case, they are likely to become deeply embedded in the individual's life, while in the other, they may or may not influence their behavior.
It seems, therefore, that if the excellent features which now characterize Norway's Pedagogical Seminary might be carried along through the whole or a large part of the college course, or if the work of the seminary might be supplemented by studies such as principles of education, history of education, child study, and psychology, carried along with the college work the results would be more effectual—the preparation for teaching more thorough. However, considering the short time that has elapsed since the founding of this Seminary, its work is of high order and its ideals are praiseworthy. The expressed intent of the director is to develop the field as rapidly as possible until it shall be characterized by the best means of professional training known to the science.
It seems that if the excellent qualities that currently define Norway's Pedagogical Seminary could be integrated throughout most of the college curriculum, or if the seminary's work could be enhanced with studies like education principles, education history, child development, and psychology alongside college coursework, the outcomes would be more effective and the preparation for teaching would be more comprehensive. However, given the relatively short time since the Seminary was established, its work is of high quality, and its goals are commendable. The director's stated aim is to expand the field as quickly as possible until it features the best professional training methods recognized by the field.
THE TEACHERS' LIFE
The life of the teacher is one of service, calling for an expenditure of the self to an extent perhaps greater than any other profession. Among the Norse, however, it is not as strenuous as that experienced in American schools. The Norwegian teachers have more time than we for recreation, self-improvement, or any of the activities opened up by leisure hours. Life generally is set at a more moderate pace with the Norsemen than with the rushing Americans, and the schoolmen enjoy the attendant advantages along with those in other professions or occupations.
The life of a teacher is all about serving others, requiring a level of personal investment that might be greater than any other job. However, for the Norse, it isn't as demanding as what American teachers face. Norwegian teachers have more time for fun, personal growth, or any activities that come with free time. Life, in general, moves at a more relaxed pace for the Norse than for the fast-paced Americans, and teachers benefit from this slower lifestyle just like people in other jobs.
While leisure among certain classes leads to idleness and corruption, it has quite opposite results among the better class of citizens. Windelband says that "The cultured man is he who in his leisure does not become a mere idler." The cultured men of the past have in their leisure developed science, art, literature, and philosophy. They have had reserve energy after the performance of their regular labors to use in fruitful, self-selected activities. There are always innumerable avenues through any one of which an earnest servant of the state may bring great gain to its people.
While leisure for some groups can lead to laziness and moral decay, it produces quite the opposite effects among more refined citizens. Windelband states, "The cultured person is one who doesn’t become a complete slacker in their free time." Historically, cultured individuals have used their leisure time to advance science, art, literature, and philosophy. They have had extra energy after their regular work to engage in meaningful, self-chosen activities. There are always countless ways for a dedicated public servant to bring significant benefits to the community.
There is no nobler profession than that devoted to the development of youth; neither is there any occupation which brings more satisfying recompenses. The child is the most precious asset of the nation and deserves the maximum service possible for teachers[Pg 196] to render. To perform the most efficient service the teacher should have health, vigor, and time for recreation in addition to scholastic and professional qualifications. When school authorities make conditions conducive to these ends, the results will be of such character that teachers, pupils, patrons, and community will all obtain greater profits.
There is no more honorable profession than one focused on nurturing youth; nor is there any job that offers more rewarding outcomes. Children are the most valuable asset of our society and deserve the best support possible from teachers[Pg 196]. To provide the best service, teachers should have good health, energy, and time for relaxation, along with their academic and professional credentials. When school leaders create conditions that promote these goals, the outcomes will be beneficial for teachers, students, families, and the community as a whole.
Where school activities are not overtaxing, the teacher has opportunity to build up his physical being, increase the buoyancy of his spirits so as to enthuse his pupils to a greater extent, or improve his educational qualifications. One may concentrate his efforts along some given line of research and from day to day give the pupils under his tuition the benefits derived from these specialized efforts. An individual by persistent study may become the discoverer of new laws or truths which reach the ends of the earth and profoundly influence human affairs. Whatever the particular activity, leisure consecrated to the uplift of mankind is sure to result in great good.
Where school activities aren’t too demanding, teachers have the chance to take care of their physical health, boost their spirits to inspire their students more, or enhance their teaching skills. They can focus their efforts on a specific area of research and each day share the insights gained from their specialized work with their students. Through consistent study, a person might uncover new laws or truths that have a global impact and significantly affect human life. No matter what the specific activity is, time dedicated to improving humanity is bound to have positive results.
When institutions drive their servants to the limit of their powers they must inevitably be the losers in the long run. They extinguish the light of ambition, reduce to machines the individuals who should be contributors to human progress, and make legion "the man with the hoe." Such practice in our schools results in waste of energy, depletion of our teaching force, and irretrievable loss in many ways.
When organizations push their employees to the edge of their abilities, they will ultimately lose out in the long run. They stifle ambition, turn individuals into mere machines when they should be contributing to human progress, and create a multitude of "people with the hoe." This approach in our schools leads to wasted energy, burnout among our teachers, and irreparable losses in many ways.
It is my candid opinion that the rapidity of the evolution of the Norwegian school system, its excellencies, and the highly satisfactory results coming[Pg 197] from it are in large measure due to the fact that it does not overtax the powers of its teachers and educational leaders, but on the contrary allows them opportunity for the exercise of initiative and encourages a professional attitude towards their work.
In my honest opinion, the fast-paced changes in the Norwegian school system, its strengths, and the highly positive outcomes are largely because it doesn’t overwhelm its teachers and education leaders. Instead, it gives them the chance to take initiative and promotes a professional attitude towards their work.[Pg 197]
THE CURRICULUM
The course of instruction in the primary and secondary schools of Norway is uniform for all pupils except in the second and third years of the gymnasium where diverse lines of study are offered. The arrangement is unfortunate in that the individual is sometimes required to pursue subjects of study for which he has no adaptability and in which he can develop no interest. Teachers in Norway tell me that this requirement is a great handicap; retarding the progress of the class, demoralizing the individual, and increasing the burden of the teacher. More flexibility in this regard would doubtless be an advantage. The elective system, so common in our own schools, when rightly supervised preserves sufficient coherence between the studies taken up and gives opportunity for more perfect adjustment.
The education system in primary and secondary schools in Norway is the same for all students, except in the second and third years of gymnasium, where different subjects are offered. This setup is unfortunate because sometimes students have to study subjects that don’t suit them and that they have no interest in. Teachers in Norway have told me this requirement is a significant drawback; it slows down the class's progress, demoralizes individual students, and adds to the teacher's workload. More flexibility in this area would definitely be beneficial. The elective system, which is common in our own schools, when managed well, maintains a good connection between the subjects students choose and allows for better personal adjustment.
Not only in the course of study but also in organization, plans of instruction, and equipment, the schools of Norway are too uniform to result in the freest development of the intellect, the richest growth of individuality, or the greatest conservation of time, energy, or money. There are a few variations from their regular routine but these are not sufficiently numerous.
Not only in their curriculum but also in their organization, teaching plans, and resources, the schools in Norway are too uniform to allow for the fullest development of the mind, the richest expression of individuality, or the most efficient use of time, energy, or money. There are a few deviations from their usual routines, but these are not numerous enough.
One favorable innovation is the promotion of teachers along with classes through a part or all of the primary school. The consensus of opinion seems to be that better results accrue when a teacher continues with a class through several years of work. This plan is generally followed unless the special fitness of a teacher for work within particular limits renders it highly advisable for assignment to be made to such place. While special aptness for a particular class of instruction should be recognized, the promoting of teachers along with classes generally obviates any tendency to staleness and usually emphasizes special qualifications.
One positive change is the promotion of teachers along with their classes through part or all of primary school. Most people agree that better results come when a teacher stays with a class for several years. This plan is usually followed unless a teacher is particularly suited for a specific role, which makes it necessary to assign them elsewhere. While it's important to recognize a teacher's special skills for a certain subject, promoting teachers along with their classes typically avoids any feeling of monotony and highlights their unique qualifications.
While it would be interesting to discuss the methods used in presenting each subject in the curriculum a few must suffice.
While it would be interesting to talk about the methods used to present each subject in the curriculum, a few examples will be enough.
Religious Instruction and Moral Education
The church was first to establish schools in Norway, putting them into operation in connection with their cathedrals, probably about the middle of the twelfth century. The chief aim was to prepare the pupils for a religious life, either as ministers or as faithful disciples. Having these as definite ends, the materials for study were selected because of their fitness to contribute along these lines. Instruction was almost wholly in religion. Since morality is such a fundamental part of religion, moral education in large amount was given indirectly. The aim was religion and the result was both morality and religion.[Pg 199] Schools came to be generally regarded as institutions wherein moral and religious instruction were the prevailing if not the dominating features. This phase of work early became traditional and gained such momentum that it has ever formed a conspicuous part of every grade of instruction throughout the primary and secondary schools.
The church was the first to establish schools in Norway, starting them around the middle of the twelfth century in connection with their cathedrals. The main goal was to prepare students for a religious life, either as ministers or devoted followers. With these clear objectives, study materials were chosen for their ability to support these goals. Most of the instruction focused on religion. Because morality is such a fundamental aspect of religion, a significant amount of moral education was provided indirectly. The aim was religion, and the outcome included both morality and religion.[Pg 199] Schools eventually became widely viewed as places where moral and religious instruction were the main, if not the only, features. This approach quickly became traditional and gained such momentum that it has consistently remained a significant part of every level of instruction in primary and secondary schools.
During the formative period the instruction in religion maintained a vitality which was quite in keeping with the demands of the times. However, as the school system developed, especially during the closing half of the last century, it became necessary to arrange more definite plans of instruction in religion as well as in other subjects in the school curriculum. The adapting of instruction to the various grades of school work was a difficult task. The adjustment made to needs in the primary schools seems a very happy one. In this elementary section of the school system the instruction in religion consists mainly in story telling. The work is made concrete and personal, and its influence is most excellent.
During the early years, teaching religion remained vibrant and aligned with the needs of the time. However, as the school system evolved, especially in the latter half of the last century, it became necessary to create more structured plans for teaching religion, along with other subjects in the curriculum. Adapting instruction to the different grade levels was a challenging task. The adjustments made for primary schools seem particularly successful. In this basic part of the school system, religious education mainly involves storytelling. The approach is practical and personal, and its impact is very positive.
Not so fortunate has been the attempt to present the great truths and ideals of religion in the secondary grades. The human appeal, so fruitful in the lower classes, does not appear in the higher, at least to the same degree. Instead the work is formal and prescribed. Interest dies out and even respect for the work rapidly wanes as the pupil passes into more advanced grades. I have often thought while observing the listlessness of the pupils during the period for religious teaching that the effects upon morals[Pg 200] and religion would be better by far without the instruction as now provided.
Not so fortunate has been the attempt to present the great truths and ideals of religion in the secondary grades. The human appeal, which is so effective in the lower classes, doesn’t carry over to the higher grades, at least not to the same extent. Instead, the approach is formal and set in stone. Interest fades away, and even respect for the subject quickly diminishes as students move into more advanced levels. I have often thought, while noticing the apathy of the students during religious instruction, that the impact on morals[Pg 200] and religion would actually be better off without the current form of instruction.
To find lodgment in the heart and expression in the experiences of youth, religious principles must be made to appear practical and vital. They must be shown to be desirable in themselves and in their ends.
To settle in the heart and be expressed in the experiences of youth, religious principles need to be presented as practical and important. They must be shown to be appealing both in themselves and in what they aim to achieve.
To teach religion successfully one must be a living example of its true values, an earnest interpreter of its meaning and power, and a sympathetic friend of the pupils. Besides this he must be a genuine teacher with a knowledge of youth and ability to help others obtain a clear conception of the beauty and worth of the nobler life.
To effectively teach religion, you need to be a living example of its true values, a sincere interpreter of its meaning and impact, and a supportive friend to the students. Additionally, you must be a real teacher with an understanding of young people and the ability to help others grasp the beauty and significance of a better life.
Religion and morality are so intimately bound up with life's activities that it is difficult to consider them in and of themselves. It is quite impossible to curriculize and present them as subjects for study and instruction without building up in consciousness the idea that they may or may not be phases of life. When this is attempted it is liable to diminish rather than to increase their true meaning.
Religion and morality are so closely connected to everyday life that it's hard to think about them separately. It’s nearly impossible to turn them into subjects for study and teaching without creating the impression that they are just parts of life. When you try to do this, it often ends up reducing, rather than enhancing, their true significance.
It is at least possible that the most favorable results come through specific occasions which arise apart from set requirements. A genuine experience in real life is the best illustration of what morality and religion mean, and it furnishes the most secure foundation for instruction along these lines.
It’s at least possible that the best results come from specific occasions that happen outside of set requirements. A real-life experience is the best example of what morality and religion mean, and it provides the most solid foundation for teaching in these areas.
Few lessons and no subjects of instruction can be fully presented without giving considerable attention to their moral and religious phases. If a lesson is[Pg 201] completely mastered its moral and religious contributions will have been taken over and appropriated along with any and all other contents. When the moral and religious values inherent in school studies receive their proportionate emphasis there will be no crying need of arranging special courses for their study. The seriousness of the situation at present lies not in the fact that there are no special courses of instruction in morality and religion, but rather in the condition that teachers fail to recognize their opportunities for giving such instruction. They should impress the children with the fact that morality and religion are component parts of life and that they give meaning and reality to every human experience. While it would be gratifying to see these subjects taught as separate branches by individuals who could make them profitable, it is much more imperative that all teachers recognize their own responsibility in this regard, whatever subjects they have to teach.
Few lessons and no subjects can be fully taught without paying significant attention to their moral and religious aspects. When a lesson is[Pg 201]completely mastered, its moral and religious contributions will be understood and integrated alongside all other content. When the moral and religious values inherent in school subjects are given the appropriate emphasis, there will be no urgent need to create separate courses for their study. The crucial issue today is not that there are no specific courses on morality and religion, but rather that teachers fail to see their chances to provide such instruction. They should help students understand that morality and religion are essential parts of life and that they give meaning and reality to every human experience. While it would be nice to see these subjects taught as distinct areas by individuals who could effectively teach them, it’s even more important for all teachers to recognize their own responsibility in this matter, no matter what subjects they are teaching.
The Classics
In common with those of many other countries, the school curricula of Norway have been saturated with the classics. For a long time the secondary schools were devoted largely to the presentation of the Hebrew, Greek, and Latin languages. About 1850, there arose a demand for an education which was more utilitarian. Nature study, the sciences, manual training, modern foreign languages,[Pg 202] and home economics pressed their claims for recognition and the people became convinced of their values. The masses then began to investigate what right the languages of the ancients had for occupying so large a proportion of attention in school work.
Like many other countries, Norway's school curricula have been filled with the classics. For a long time, secondary schools focused mainly on teaching Hebrew, Greek, and Latin. Around 1850, there was a growing demand for a more practical education. Subjects like nature study, the sciences, manual training, modern foreign languages,[Pg 202] and home economics started to gain recognition, and people became convinced of their importance. The public then began to question why the ancient languages占据了学校工作中如此大一部分的注意力.
Gradually the ancient classics were replaced by more modern educational materials. Hebrew and Greek were in their turn dropped from the list of required subjects and the time thus saved was given to work regarded as more vital and beneficial. In 1896, a very decisive step was taken when by legislative enactment Latin—the last of the dead languages—was omitted from the list of subjects required in the school curriculum.
Gradually, the ancient classics were replaced by more modern educational materials. Hebrew and Greek were eventually removed from the list of required subjects, and the time saved was redirected towards work considered more essential and beneficial. In 1896, a major decision was made when a law was passed to eliminate Latin—the last of the dead languages—from the list of subjects required in the school curriculum.
This act of the Storthing has been severely criticised by some. However, the people whose right and duty it was to decide studied the matter carefully and thoroughly at home and abroad, and after calm consideration, acted in harmony with their best judgment, passed the law, and put in into immediate execution. The momentum of former practices, the force of tradition, or the example of other nations was not sufficient to control the Norwegian state in its action. It does not permit precedent to determine its policies, foreign nations to do its thinking, nor "well-enough" systems to prevent reform.
This action by the Storthing has been heavily criticized by some. However, the people who had the right and responsibility to make the decision examined the issue carefully and thoroughly, both at home and abroad. After thoughtful consideration, they acted according to their best judgment, passed the law, and implemented it immediately. The influence of past practices, the weight of tradition, or the example of other countries wasn't enough to sway the Norwegian state in its actions. It doesn't allow precedent to dictate its policies, foreign countries to do its thinking, or "good enough" systems to hinder reform.
When higher ground is seen clearly Norway moves forward with all its power, determined to occupy and utilize the greater opportunities. Such was the condition of the state in its consideration of the classics in their school curriculum. They were willing[Pg 203] that those individuals who might elect to pursue the study of the ancient languages should have the privilege to do so and they provided for them such opportunity. However, they were definitely convinced that to require all pupils to study these subjects in order to complete courses of study or enter the university was an injustice. To their credit be it said that when they are convinced that a certain course of procedure is best they have the moral courage to pursue it. In this particular instance the people were fully aware of the fact that they were taking a step which was a decided deviation from the straightforward course pursued for centuries by the leading national educational systems. Yet they became converted to the idea that for their own good, under their own conditions, and looking forward to their future as a state and nation, it would be the wiser solution to leave the classics behind and devote more time and energy to studies which they conceived to be more efficacious.
When higher ground is clearly visible, Norway confidently moves forward with all its strength, determined to seize and make the most of greater opportunities. This was the situation of the state in its evaluation of the classics in the school curriculum. They were open[Pg 203] to allowing those individuals who chose to study ancient languages the opportunity to do so, and they provided for that. However, they firmly believed that requiring all students to study these subjects to complete their courses or enter university was unfair. It’s commendable that when they are convinced a particular course of action is best, they have the moral courage to follow through. In this case, the people recognized they were taking a significant departure from the direct path followed for centuries by leading national education systems. Yet they became convinced that for their own benefit, under their own circumstances, and considering their future as a state and nation, it would be wiser to move away from the classics and focus more on subjects they believed to be more effective.
It is interesting to note the recent tendencies in this direction in other countries. In the United States Latin is becoming less and less a required subject of instruction in the high schools, and each year lengthens the list of colleges which do not require it for entrance. Even conservative and classic-loving Germany has recently opened the doors of her universities to those who have finished the Real-gymnasia. Thus they, too, acknowledge that the way of the classics is not the only road to higher culture and learning.
It’s interesting to see the recent trends in this direction in other countries. In the United States, Latin is becoming less and less of a required subject in high schools, and each year adds more colleges that don’t require it for admission. Even conservative, classical-loving Germany has recently welcomed students who have completed the Real-gymnasia into their universities. This shows that they, too, recognize that studying the classics isn’t the only path to higher culture and education.
It has come to be almost universally recognized that the schools exist for the learner rather than the learner for the schools. To debar an individual from privileges for which he is prepared simply because he has not met certain inherited traditional prescriptions is rapidly becoming unorthodox. Norway seems to have set the pace for other nations in at least this one respect, and her clearsighted move in displacing the classics by the introduction of larger amounts of modern foreign languages and other branches of greatest present utility is being followed by other nations of sound pedagogical principles.
It’s now nearly universally acknowledged that schools are meant for the learners, not the other way around. Denying someone opportunities they are ready for just because they haven’t fulfilled certain outdated requirements is quickly becoming outdated itself. Norway appears to be leading the way for other countries in this area, and its clear decision to shift from traditional classics to incorporating more modern foreign languages and other subjects that are more useful today is being adopted by other nations with solid educational principles.
Physical Culture
Few are the instances where the physical development of the children is so effectually provided for as among the Norwegians. Gymnastics is a regular feature throughout the entire course of study until the completion of the gymnasium. In addition to this the universal rule of requiring the pupils to go into the open air during the intermissions which follow every class meeting has its good effects. Athletic sports also have recently become more important features of school life. Fortunately they have not reached a point of specialization where their values are open to question.
Few instances demonstrate the physical development of children as effectively as among the Norwegians. Gymnastics is a regular part of the entire curriculum until students finish gymnasium. Additionally, there’s a universal rule that requires students to spend time outdoors during the breaks that follow each class, which has positive effects. Athletic sports have also recently become more significant aspects of school life. Thankfully, they haven't reached a level of specialization where their value is questioned.
Buildings and grounds are constructed and laid out with the physical welfare of children in mind. As a consequence we find gymnastic halls well equipped and grounds supplied with the advantages most essential[Pg 205] in the accomplishment of the desired end, viz., a strong and vigorous body in which to develop a sound mind. Their school grounds are small, making a crowded condition the rule in the larger schools. Strange as it may seem, the same unfortunate condition prevails almost universally in our own land where there appears to be little excuse for congestion. However, the size of the grounds is perhaps a matter of minor importance, especially when compared to their use. Space and equipment may be regarded as incidental; use is the all-important part. Our grounds are not used. We rarely have but one, if any, intermission except the noon hour, the greater portion of which is occupied in going for the midday meal. The results of the Norwegians' enforced, frequent, and regular use of the playgrounds are in evidence on every hand. Robust, vigorous, buoyant, active, healthy, sound, alert, and the like adjectives are the appropriate ones to use in speaking of the physiques of their pupils.
Buildings and grounds are designed with the physical well-being of children in mind. As a result, we find gymnasiums well-equipped and outdoor areas offering the essential benefits needed for achieving the goal of having a strong and healthy body to support a sound mind. Their school grounds are small, which leads to overcrowding being common in larger schools. Oddly enough, the same unfortunate situation exists almost universally in our country, where there seems to be little reason for crowding. However, the size of the grounds might be a minor issue compared to how they are used. While space and equipment can be seen as secondary, usage is the most critical factor. Our grounds are underutilized. We usually have only one break, if any, apart from the lunch hour, most of which is taken up by going to get lunch. The positive results of Norwegians’ enforced, frequent, and regular use of playgrounds are evident everywhere. Robust, energetic, lively, active, healthy, strong, and alert are just some of the adjectives that describe the physiques of their students.
Were the influences of bodily conditions upon mental growth and activity fully appreciated, the schools would doubtless make a sudden shift toward providing adequately for physical education. Physical development has been regarded with considerable favor for some time, but it has usually been a secondary affair when it should have been introduced as a vital feature. Educational systems should provide for the training and development of the physical as well as the mental life. They are dependent upon each other and are in fact two phases of the same life[Pg 206] It is obviously wasteful to seek to develop the one without regard to the other, or to attempt the cultivation of one at the expense of the other.
If the impact of physical conditions on mental growth and activity were fully recognized, schools would likely shift to properly emphasize physical education. While physical development has been valued for some time, it has often been treated as a secondary concern when it should be considered an essential component. Educational systems should focus on training and developing both physical and mental well-being. They are interconnected and are essentially two aspects of the same human experience[Pg 206]. It’s clearly inefficient to try to develop one without considering the other, or to promote one at the expense of the other.
Vocal Music
Music is among the most potent factors in developing national spirit and loyalty. Plato wrote: "Any musical innovation is full of danger to the whole state, and ought to be prohibited.... When modes of music change, the fundamental laws of the state always change with them."[28] Napoleon stated that if he might write the nation's songs he cared not who might write its laws. Music in the better forms has moved individuals and nations to great accomplishments, and its efficacy is generally recognized. As a means of education, however, it receives far too little attention.
Music is among the most potent factors in developing national spirit and loyalty. Plato wrote: "Any musical innovation is full of danger to the whole state, and ought to be prohibited.... When modes of music change, the fundamental laws of the state always change with them."[28] Napoleon stated that if he might write the nation's songs he cared not who might write its laws. Music in the better forms has moved individuals and nations to great accomplishments, and its efficacy is generally recognized. As a means of education, however, it receives far too little attention.
The quality of music sung in the schools of Norway has some points of superiority. One feature in making it a powerful contributor in developing loyal and competent citizens is the use they make of the best compositions from their own writers. Their poets and musicians have furnished large amounts of excellent productions. They sing of their heroes and of their national ideals and achievements. The spirit in their songs reflects the soul of their fatherland. The influence upon the lives of the pupils contributes to solidarity of the nation and to love for its institutions.
The quality of music taught in schools across Norway has several advantages. One key aspect that helps nurture loyal and capable citizens is the emphasis on the best works from their own writers. Their poets and musicians have created a wealth of outstanding pieces. They sing about their heroes and their national ideals and accomplishments. The spirit of their songs embodies the essence of their homeland. The impact on the students' lives fosters national unity and a love for the country's institutions.
Contrast this with the results of the rattle of rag-time and jigs. Too much of our public school, Sunday school, and church music has been of this order. Public school music and education along this line are matters deserving more attention than they receive. Recent introduction into many schools of victrolas with records of masterpieces produced by the leading artists of the world point to a recognition of the educative value of the better quality of selections. To hear the same productions direct from the soul of the artist would be many times as effectual as any mechanical reproduction, but this is beyond the reach of the masses. Present indications give assurance that the near future will see music more nearly occupying its legitimate place in our educational provisions.
Contrast this with the impact of ragtime and jigs. A lot of the music in our public schools, Sunday schools, and churches has fallen into this category. Music education in public schools deserves more attention than it currently gets. The recent introduction of Victrolas in many schools, featuring recordings of masterpieces by top artists, shows a growing recognition of the educational value of high-quality music selections. Experiencing the same performances directly from the artist would be far more effective than any mechanical reproduction, but that's not accessible to most people. Current trends suggest that music will soon take its rightful place in our educational system.
LINES OF INSTRUCTION IN THE GYMNASIUM
In the second and third years of gymnasial work three courses of study are open, viz., Real, Language-History, and Language-History with Latin. Here pupils get their first experience in electing the line of work wherein their study shall center. This seems a rather fortunate provision, for by this time likes and dislikes for certain subjects of study, special aptitudes along specific lines, and choice of life work are coming into the foreground of consciousness. The pupils' likes and aptitudes working together influence their decisions concerning life's activities. Again the disposition and nature of individuals render one line of study more attractive and beneficial than either of[Pg 208] the others. There are, indeed, many influences at work upon pupils of such age which make it appear highly advisable to follow some particular line of study.
In the second and third years of high school, students have three study options: Real, Language-History, and Language-History with Latin. This is their first chance to choose a focus for their studies. This is a great opportunity, as by this time, students are becoming more aware of their preferences for certain subjects, their natural talents in specific areas, and their future career choices. Their interests and skills together help guide their decisions about what to pursue in life. Additionally, each student's personality and nature can make one field of study more appealing and beneficial than the others. There are indeed many factors influencing students at this age that make it very advisable to follow a particular course of study.
Whether pupils go into the chosen line of life work directly from the gymnasium or by way of the university, it is of distinct advantage to specialize along the line for which they are preparing. Should they intend to teach, they would doubtless prefer studying most the subjects to be taught. In these they would have deepest interest, and from their pursuit they would derive greatest profit. If they determined to study theology, law, medicine, or some other special phase of learning, they would make selection of gymnasial course with that object in view. Whatever the work to follow completion of the gymnasium, the different courses prepare for the narrower specialization which characterizes life's activities and all their university study.
Whether students enter their chosen career directly from high school or through university, it’s definitely beneficial to specialize in the field they are preparing for. If they plan to teach, they would probably want to focus on the subjects they’ll be teaching. They would have the most interest in those subjects, and they would gain the most benefit from studying them. If they choose to study theology, law, medicine, or another specialized field, they would select their high school courses with that goal in mind. Regardless of the path they take after finishing high school, the various courses prepare them for the specific focus that defines their career activities and all their university studies.
The following table presents the exact work represented by the three courses in form convenient for comparisons.
The table below shows the specific work covered by the three courses in a format that makes comparisons easy.
TABLE XII.
The Three Courses of Study in the Gymnasia of Norway Showing Weekly Hours Given to Each Subject.[A]
1 | 2 | 3 | |||||||
I | II | III | I | II | III | I | II | III | |
————— | ————— | ————— | |||||||
Religion | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
Norwegian | 5 | 6 | 6 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 5 | 6 | 6 |
German | 4 | 3 | 3 | 4 | 3 | 3 | 4 | 3 | 3 |
English | 4 | 2 | 1 | 4 | 7 | 7 | 4 | 2 | 1 |
French | 4 | 2 | 2 | 4 | 3 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 3 |
Latin | 7 | 11 | |||||||
History | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 5 | 5 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
Geography | 2 | 1 | 2 | 2 | |||||
Natural Science | 4 | 5 | 7 | 4 | 2 | 4 | 2 | ||
Mathematics | 5 | 6 | 6 | 5 | 3 | 5 | 3 | ||
Drawing | 1 | 1 | |||||||
— | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | |
30 | 31 | 31 | 30 | 30 | 30 | 30 | 30 | 30 |
[Note A: 1. Singing and gymnastics—5 or 6 hours per week are omitted from the table.
[Note A: 1. Singing and gymnastics—5 or 6 hours per week are omitted from the table.]
2. 1, Real course, 2, Language-History course, 3, Language-History course with Latin.]
2. 1, Real course, 2, Language-History course, 3, Language-History course with Latin.]
As the table shows, the three courses are identical during the first year and uniform in religion and German throughout the three years. The Language-History[Pg 210] course lends itself favorably for purposes of comparison. It stresses the importance of several modern languages and history, giving to them a preeminence over all other work. The Real course reduces the work in English, French, Norwegian, and History and increases the amount of science and mathematics. The course including Latin makes similar reductions but emphasizes Latin instead of the sciences and mathematics.
As the table shows, the three courses are the same in the first year and consistent in religion and German over all three years. The Language-History[Pg 210] course is particularly useful for comparison. It highlights the importance of several modern languages and history, prioritizing them above all other subjects. The Real course reduces the focus on English, French, Norwegian, and History while increasing the emphasis on science and math. The course that includes Latin makes similar reductions but focuses on Latin rather than the sciences and math.
The Norwegians believe it better and cheaper to offer the different courses in the same school than to provide separate schools. This plan necessitates less duplication and at the same time affords quite as adequate facilities for whatever specialization the different courses represent.
The Norwegians think it's better and more cost-effective to offer different courses in the same school rather than run separate schools. This approach reduces duplication and still provides sufficient resources for whatever specialization the different courses offer.
CO-EDUCATION
Whether schools should be co-educational has been a live question among many nations for generations, and considerable time will yet elapse before unanimity of opinion is reached.
Whether schools should be co-ed has been a hot topic in many countries for generations, and it will take a considerable amount of time before everyone agrees on it.
Nearly all the schools of Norway are co-educational. However, in some of the city systems boys and girls use different playgrounds, and in certain schools they are segregated also for purposes of instruction. These matters are governed according to the wishes of the inspector or the desires of the principals of the different schools. The aim is to combine the better phases represented in various methods and to adopt the plan best suited to the local situation,[Pg 211] or the one to which the person in charge is converted and in which he can, because of his convictions, accomplish best results.
Almost all schools in Norway are co-ed. However, in some city school systems, boys and girls use different playgrounds, and in certain schools, they are separated for instruction as well. These decisions are made based on the preferences of the inspector or the principals of the individual schools. The goal is to blend the best aspects of different approaches and choose the plan that fits the local context best, or the one that the person in charge believes in and can achieve the best outcomes because of their convictions.[Pg 211]
"The separation of the sexes is complete in all the schools of Germany excepting some of the primary classes. The advisability of this is a large question, but by no means a settled one.... Germany feels that she has the proper solution, while in America, with an opposite answer, we feel for the most part satisfied."[29]
"The separation of the sexes is complete in all the schools of Germany excepting some of the primary classes. The advisability of this is a large question, but by no means a settled one.... Germany feels that she has the proper solution, while in America, with an opposite answer, we feel for the most part satisfied."[29]
In American public schools co-education is almost universally practiced. In reference to this matter we give the opinions of some prominent educators. The lamented Dr. Harris, while engaged in the St. Louis, Mo., schools, wrote: "Discipline has improved continually with the adoption of mixed schools;... the mixing of the male and female departments of a school has always been followed by improvement in discipline, not merely on the part of the boys, but on that of the girls as well. The rudeness and abandon which prevail among boys when separate at once give place to self-restraint in the presence of girls. The prurient sentimentality engendered by educating girls apart from boys... disappears almost entirely in mixed schools."[30] The Honorable John Eaton while Commissioner of Education of the United States made report concerning the co-education of the sexes in several hundred large and small cities[Pg 212] in the Union. The tenor of the entire report is well summarized in the following sentence: "We are created male and female; all the impulses and activities of nature enforce co-education; if we must live together we must be educated to that end; to educate separately is an attempt to change the natural order of human economy."[31]
In American public schools co-education is almost universally practiced. In reference to this matter we give the opinions of some prominent educators. The lamented Dr. Harris, while engaged in the St. Louis, Mo., schools, wrote: "Discipline has improved continually with the adoption of mixed schools;... the mixing of the male and female departments of a school has always been followed by improvement in discipline, not merely on the part of the boys, but on that of the girls as well. The rudeness and abandon which prevail among boys when separate at once give place to self-restraint in the presence of girls. The prurient sentimentality engendered by educating girls apart from boys... disappears almost entirely in mixed schools."[30] The Honorable John Eaton while Commissioner of Education of the United States made report concerning the co-education of the sexes in several hundred large and small cities[Pg 212] in the Union. The tenor of the entire report is well summarized in the following sentence: "We are created male and female; all the impulses and activities of nature enforce co-education; if we must live together we must be educated to that end; to educate separately is an attempt to change the natural order of human economy."[31]
In our higher institutions of learning the situation is much the same. The Commissioner of Education, referring to the State University of Iowa, writes, "The report of the president says that the experience of the institution has uniformly been favorable to the co-education of the sexes; that their influence on each other in the acquisition of learning has been most beneficial as well as conducive to orderly habits. The presence of both sexes is considered 'an invaluable feature' in restraining indecorum and an 'inducement to every virtue.'"[32] The practice has continued with similar results throughout the entire country.
In our higher institutions of learning the situation is much the same. The Commissioner of Education, referring to the State University of Iowa, writes, "The report of the president says that the experience of the institution has uniformly been favorable to the co-education of the sexes; that their influence on each other in the acquisition of learning has been most beneficial as well as conducive to orderly habits. The presence of both sexes is considered 'an invaluable feature' in restraining indecorum and an 'inducement to every virtue.'"[32] The practice has continued with similar results throughout the entire country.
Instances favorable to co-education might be multiplied. Its adoption has become a foregone conclusion so far as our general system of education is concerned. True we do have some colleges and a few secondary schools devoting themselves exclusively to the education of one or the other of the sexes. Not many of them are state institutions. They are usually private schools and they answer a certain demand whether well founded or not.
Instances supporting co-education can be increased. Its adoption has become an accepted fact regarding our overall education system. It's true that we have some colleges and a few high schools dedicated exclusively to the education of either boys or girls. However, not many of these are public institutions. They are usually private schools, fulfilling a certain demand, regardless of whether that demand is justified or not.
There are certain questions in connection with the education of the sexes which are fundamental and need considerable attention. However, no attempt can be made here to solve the many important problems suggested. It is the intent only to emphasize the necessity of being awake to real conditions and to indicate the fact that herein lies a field for the educator's most careful consideration.
There are key questions related to the education of boys and girls that are essential and deserve significant attention. However, we can't dive into all the pressing issues raised here. The goal is simply to highlight the importance of being aware of the actual circumstances and to point out that this is an area where educators should give their utmost thought.
The questions arise: Are the natural functions of man and woman enough alike to justify making their education identical, and will the adoption of such a plan of education result in the advancement or deterioration of the race? A recent article referring "to the endeavor to use women industrially, socially, and politically on the same footing as men" sounds a warning note, crying out against the present tendencies which are taking from the flower of womankind thousands who are eminently fitted for motherhood, "woman's essential function on the globe," and diverting their lives to other and less noble pursuits. "It is therefore essential to the race," say the authors, "that the ablest, healthiest, and finest women should be encouraged, tempted, compelled, if necessary, by circumstances to devote themselves to family life by becoming wives and mothers, and it is doubtful how far it is expedient to draw them off, even for a time to other occupations."[33]
The questions arise: Are the natural functions of man and woman enough alike to justify making their education identical, and will the adoption of such a plan of education result in the advancement or deterioration of the race? A recent article referring "to the endeavor to use women industrially, socially, and politically on the same footing as men" sounds a warning note, crying out against the present tendencies which are taking from the flower of womankind thousands who are eminently fitted for motherhood, "woman's essential function on the globe," and diverting their lives to other and less noble pursuits. "It is therefore essential to the race," say the authors, "that the ablest, healthiest, and finest women should be encouraged, tempted, compelled, if necessary, by circumstances to devote themselves to family life by becoming wives and mothers, and it is doubtful how far it is expedient to draw them off, even for a time to other occupations."[33]
While co-education is in agreement with conditions of family life, is economic, and continues to be[Pg 214] entirely practicable, the question still remains whether there may not be justification in a demand for certain fundamental differences to be made in adapting educational means and matter to the two sexes. Co-education, however, may continue without making the education of the sexes identical. In fact it is very easily possible to make the education of the sexes fundamentally different even though both institutions and class activities are co-educational in practice. A difference in the amount of work in certain groups of subjects required of men and women, respectively, might furnish a satisfying solution of this question. And if there are certain branches of study which should belong exclusively to one or the other of the sexes, it is a simple matter to separate for such work. On the whole it seems to the writer highly advisable to educate the sexes together as far as possible.
While co-education aligns with family life, is economical, and remains entirely feasible, the question still exists whether there is a valid reason to demand some fundamental differences in how we adapt educational methods and content for the two sexes. However, co-education can still happen without making the education of the sexes identical. In fact, it's quite easy to differentiate the education for males and females even if both institutions and class activities are co-educational in practice. A difference in the workload for certain subject groups required of men and women could provide a satisfying solution to this issue. And if there are specific areas of study that should be exclusive to one gender or the other, it's straightforward to separate those for such work. Overall, it seems to me very advisable to educate the sexes together as much as possible.
THE SCHOOL YEAR
The regular school year in Norway has forty weeks of six days each. The plan of having school on Saturdays furnishes an additional day of fruitful, well directed activity to the children, who might otherwise be permitted to spend the time in idleness or misguided conduct.
The regular school year in Norway lasts for forty weeks, with classes held six days a week. Having school on Saturdays provides an extra day of productive, focused activities for children, who might otherwise waste that time in inactivity or poor behavior.
In America we have so many vacations and holidays that our schools are in session only about 75 or 80 per cent of the time utilized in Norway. We may be justified in having the long summer vacations because of the inconvenience and depletion of strength[Pg 215] occasioned by the heat, but several of our vacations during the year and the practice of having no school on Saturdays are inheritances without much justification. School activities, when rightly conducted, should be invigorating and exhilarating instead of producing a state of prolonged fatigue requiring seasons of inactivity or other changes in order to regain lost vitality. Again, the relaxation occasioned by diversion of thought and change of activity on Sunday is certainly sufficient to counteract any necessity of using Saturday for recuperation. It appears evident that we are not as frugal in this matter as sound judgment demands that we should be.
In America, we have so many vacations and holidays that our schools are only in session about 75 to 80 percent of the time that schools in Norway are. We might be justified in having long summer breaks because of the heat and the fatigue it causes, but several of our vacations throughout the year and the practice of having no school on Saturdays don’t really have a good reason behind them. When school activities are run properly, they should be energizing and exciting, not leave students in a state of ongoing tiredness that requires breaks or other changes just to regain their energy. Also, the relaxation we get from taking a break to change our focus and activities on Sunday is definitely enough to eliminate the need for recuperation on Saturday. It seems clear that we aren’t as careful about this as we should be.
SCHOOL LUNCHES
It has been found that mental activity is very greatly affected by conditions of nutrition. The quality, quantity, and preparation of foods, together with regularity in eating, determine to a considerable extent what may be the progress of the pupil in his growth, both mental and physical. The child who is improperly fed or underfed is thereby handicapped, while the one who receives intelligent care along the same line is placed at a distinct advantage.
It has been discovered that mental activity is significantly influenced by nutrition. The quality, quantity, and preparation of food, along with consistent eating habits, greatly impact a student's growth, both mentally and physically. A child who is poorly nourished or underfed is at a disadvantage, whereas a child who receives proper care in this area has a clear advantage.
That in all large cities there are hundreds and thousands of underfed children is a fact of common knowledge. In many cities provisions have been made for supplying at least one meal per day free of charge to all needy pupils. Norway has been in the forefront[Pg 216] in this paternalistic movement. Several of her cities have undertaken this noble work and probably no city in the world can boast of more adequate facilities for carrying it on than Christiania.
That in all large cities there are hundreds and thousands of underfed children is a well-known fact. In many cities, efforts have been made to provide at least one free meal a day to all needy students. Norway has been a leader in this caring initiative. Several of its cities have taken on this important work, and likely no city in the world has better facilities for doing so than Oslo.
They purchase the best procurable quality of the most nutritious food, prepare it in a wholesome and palatable manner, and send it out from a central kitchen to the several primary schools of the city in such quantities as are needed to liberally supply the demands. The food is served hot in the regular lunch rooms absolutely free to all children whose parents ask it and at first cost to others. This work in Christiania is typical of the provisions made in other cities but the equipment, and possibly the system of distribution, is superior to that found elsewhere.
They buy the highest quality, most nutritious food available, prepare it in a healthy and tasty way, and send it from a central kitchen to the various primary schools in the city in sufficient amounts to meet the needs. The food is served hot in the lunchrooms completely free to all children whose parents request it, and at cost to others. This work in Christiania is typical of what is done in other cities, but the equipment and possibly the distribution system are better than what is found elsewhere.
In addition to this, nutritious and easily digested foods and drinks are provided at other schools and served at a moderate cost in the lunch rooms at stated hours in the day. This latter provision is generally in charge of the family of the janitor of the building and is most common in the private and secondary schools to which the previously mentioned plan does not extend.
In addition to this, healthy and easy-to-digest foods and drinks are offered at other schools and served at a reasonable price in the lunchrooms during specific times of the day. This service is usually managed by the janitor's family and is most common in private and secondary schools where the previously mentioned plan doesn’t apply.
Experiment has demonstrated in our own land that it is entirely practicable to provide at a minimum cost warm, well-cooked, wholesome foods to either supplement or replace the cold indigestible lunches so commonly carried by school children. The cities and towns enjoy few if any advantages over the rural districts in this regard. The plan is workable and advisable, and it should be more commonly adopted.
Experiment has shown in our own country that it is completely possible to provide affordable, warm, well-cooked, nutritious meals to either supplement or replace the cold, hard-to-digest lunches that many school children often bring. Cities and towns have little to no advantages over rural areas in this matter. The approach is practical and recommended, and it should be adopted more widely.
COMPARATIVE ATTAINMENTS
In the study of the school system of Norway it is interesting to compare the school life and attainments of the pupils with those of American children. It is true that until we have established norms for measuring the results of education, we cannot make accurate statements regarding the relative standing of pupils nor estimate precisely their accomplishments. However, we are able to single out some features of importance and compare them in a general way.
In examining Norway's school system, it's intriguing to compare the school experience and achievements of its students with those of American kids. While we can't make precise assessments about the relative standing of students or accurately gauge their accomplishments until we establish norms for measuring educational outcomes, we can identify a few key features and compare them in general terms.
It has been noted that the Norwegian pupils begin school at seven years of age, while the American children commence at five or six. Many prominent educators believe that our American children start to school too young. They are of the opinion that their development, physical and mental, would be better if they did not begin formal school work until at least seven or eight years of age. The greater physical development of the Norwegians, due to their later start, gives them a distinct advantage. Their bodily strength and vigor supplement and aid their mental growth.
It has been observed that Norwegian students start school at seven years old, while American kids begin at five or six. Many leading educators think that American children start school too early. They believe that kids would benefit more in their physical and mental development if they waited until at least seven or eight to begin formal schooling. The greater physical development of Norwegians, because they start later, gives them a clear advantage. Their physical strength and energy support and enhance their mental growth.
Passing through Norway's successive grades of school to the completion of the gymnasium requires twelve years. The same length of time is used in reaching graduation from our American high school. Now it is generally conceded that a graduate of the gymnasium in Norway is two years in advance of a graduate of the American high school; or in other[Pg 218] words a student entering the university from Norway's gymnasial course has an education equivalent to that of an individual entering the junior year of work in an American college or university. Some would rank the Norwegian even higher than I have here suggested; however, only a very general comparison can be made.
Getting through Norway's series of school levels up to graduating from the gymnasium takes twelve years. The same amount of time is needed to graduate from an American high school. It's widely agreed that a gymnasium graduate in Norway is two years ahead of a graduate of an American high school; in other words, a student entering university from Norway's gymnasium has an education comparable to someone starting their junior year in an American college or university. Some people might rank Norwegian graduates even higher than I've suggested here; however, only a very broad comparison can be made.
In consideration of these conditions the question arises: How shall we account for the fact that we use two extra years in order to reach approximately the same standard? It is recalled that the Norwegian entering school at seven and progressing at the normal rate are ready for university work at nineteen while the Americans begin two years earlier in order to reach the same attainments at the same age. If the Norwegian pupils accomplish as much in twelve years, beginning at seven years of age, as our American children do in fourteen years, commencing at five, should we rest satisfied, or should we modify our system so as to profit by their experience? Why permit traditions or precedent to rob us of choice benefits within our reach?
In light of these conditions, the question arises: How do we explain that we take an extra two years to reach roughly the same standard? It's noteworthy that Norwegian students who start school at age seven and progress at a normal pace are ready for university by nineteen, while American students begin two years earlier to achieve the same level by the same age. If Norwegian students achieve just as much in twelve years, starting at seven, as our American children do in fourteen years, starting at five, should we be satisfied with this, or should we adjust our system to learn from their experience? Why allow traditions or past practices to deny us the advantages that are available to us?
Again, the students entering the Norwegian university are older and more mature both physically and mentally than are ours. Being older, their habits of life are more definitely formed, and they are better fitted to undertake the responsibility of self-direction. It has been suggested by some that we extend the work of the high school in order to keep our children under parental guidance until they are sufficiently mature to care for themselves at less hazard.
Again, the students entering the Norwegian university are older and more mature both physically and mentally than our students. Being older, their life habits are more established, and they are better equipped to take on the responsibility of self-direction. Some have suggested that we should extend the high school experience to keep our children under parental guidance until they are mature enough to look after themselves with less risk.
The course pursued by Norwegian pupils is uniform for all until the last two years of the secondary school, when certain branches of study may be chosen for major attention. When students start to the university they enter immediately upon specialized lines of work and pursue them to their limits. The American pupils are privileged to elect a considerable proportion of their secondary school work, yet they do not generally specialize at all until their junior year in college; frequently they postpone definite specialization until the beginning of graduate courses.
The educational path for Norwegian students is the same for everyone until the last two years of secondary school, when they can choose certain subjects to focus on. When students go to university, they dive straight into specialized areas of study and follow them to the fullest. In contrast, American students have the option to select a significant part of their secondary school courses, but they typically don’t start specializing until their junior year in college; often, they delay specific specialization until they begin graduate programs.
Fundamental social characteristics enter into educational ideals, and each nation, very naturally, develops a system of schools peculiarly adapted to its needs. There are, of course, general underlying principles which operate in all educational systems and place them on similar bases; there are also certain features, essential in the make-up of the individual systems, which are not common. These peculiar factors give distinctive character to the various systems and are of telling effect in determining their excellencies. Whether these special phases affect the life and accomplishments of the pupils, the nature of their work, the management of school affairs, or other educational activities; they render the different systems almost impossible of comparison. However, they are suggestive, and frequently they may be modified and used in improving the systems of other countries.
Fundamental social characteristics influence educational ideals, and each country naturally develops a school system tailored to its needs. There are, of course, common underlying principles that apply to all educational systems and provide a similar foundation; however, there are also specific features that are essential to individual systems and aren’t shared. These unique factors give each system its distinctive character and significantly impact their strengths. Whether these specific aspects influence the students' lives and achievements, the nature of their work, the management of school affairs, or other educational activities, they make it nearly impossible to compare the different systems. Nonetheless, they are insightful, and often, they can be adjusted and utilized to improve the systems in other countries.
METHODS OF INSTRUCTION
Every successful teacher presents his subject in conformity with some universal principles of method. While these cannot be mechanically systematized and used according to unchanging rules, they form a necessary part of an instructor's equipment. The teacher who knows the subject and is master of the technique of instruction is sure of success, while the one without method will fail.
Every successful teacher presents their subject according to some universal principles of method. While these can't be rigidly structured and applied according to fixed rules, they are an essential part of a teacher's toolkit. The teacher who understands the subject and has a strong grasp of instructional techniques is bound to succeed, while the one who lacks a method will struggle.
It seems that the pedagogues of Norway have formed a happy combination of some methods of instruction. They appreciate the value of the class meeting and with them "teaching goes on chiefly in what we call the recitation. This is the teacher's point of contact with his pupils; here he meets them face to face and mind to mind; here he succeeds or fails in his function of teaching."[34]
It seems that the pedagogues of Norway have formed a happy combination of some methods of instruction. They appreciate the value of the class meeting and with them "teaching goes on chiefly in what we call the recitation. This is the teacher's point of contact with his pupils; here he meets them face to face and mind to mind; here he succeeds or fails in his function of teaching."[34]
The excellence of the work of instruction in Germany has long been recognized. That "the German teacher teaches" is very generally known. He transcends all texts and is an authority on the subjects he presents. By pedagogic training he has been exalted to a place of eminence in his profession. It is possible that they over-emphasize the work of the instructor and neglect the part that pupils should play.
The quality of education in Germany has been recognized for a long time. It's widely known that "the German teacher teaches." They go beyond just following texts and are experts in their subjects. Through their training, they've been elevated to a respected position in their field. However, it’s possible that they focus too much on the instructor's role and overlook the importance of the students' involvement.
In America various methods of instruction are in use. One plan is to regard teacher and pupils as cooperators in activities wherein interests are common.[Pg 221] The teacher, having had experience, exercises control and serves as chief guide through the most critical places in the way of progress. So far as possible the pupils are encouraged to exercise individual initiative and to become independent. They are not to be merely recipients from the teacher's vast store of knowledge, but with him they are to become genuine participators in the world's thoughts and activities.
In America, various teaching methods are being used. One approach sees the teacher and students as partners in activities where their interests align.[Pg 221] The teacher, having experience, takes charge and acts as the main guide during the critical moments of learning. As much as possible, students are encouraged to take individual initiative and become independent. They shouldn't just passively receive information from the teacher's extensive knowledge but should actively engage alongside him in the world’s ideas and activities.
Another plan in all too common use may be designated as the "text book method." According to it the major portion of information comes from the voluminous, logically developed, well-arranged, and somewhat attractively printed and bound readable text. The function of the teacher is largely testing knowledge gained from books, assigning lessons in the text, supplementing the work of the pupils from his own store or by reference to other works on the subject, and stimulating them to earnest effort in every possible way.
Another plan that's quite commonly used is called the "textbook method." In this approach, most of the information comes from a large, logically organized, and somewhat appealingly printed and bound textbook. The teacher's role mostly involves testing the knowledge that students have gained from the book, assigning lessons from the text, supplementing the students' work with their own resources or by pointing them to other materials on the subject, and encouraging them to put in serious effort in every way possible.
President Hall would not regard this text book plan of work as very worthy procedure. He writes that some teachers take time "telling pupils what to do and testing to see if they have done it. But this is not teaching; but a device of ignorance, laziness, or physical weakness, or all combined. The real teacher teaches and reduces recitation to a minimum. Whoever has visited the best continental schools or studied comparatively such national educational exhibitions as those of St. Louis must have been acutely impressed with the fact that we exhibit what the pupil does, Europe what the teacher does. Here he says, 'Go,[Pg 222] do this, and prove to me that you have done it.' There he says, 'Come, let us study together; I know and will inform, interest and inspire you to go on.'"[35]
President Hall would not regard this text book plan of work as very worthy procedure. He writes that some teachers take time "telling pupils what to do and testing to see if they have done it. But this is not teaching; but a device of ignorance, laziness, or physical weakness, or all combined. The real teacher teaches and reduces recitation to a minimum. Whoever has visited the best continental schools or studied comparatively such national educational exhibitions as those of St. Louis must have been acutely impressed with the fact that we exhibit what the pupil does, Europe what the teacher does. Here he says, 'Go,[Pg 222] do this, and prove to me that you have done it.' There he says, 'Come, let us study together; I know and will inform, interest and inspire you to go on.'"[35]
The instructors in the schools of Norway are true teachers but they do not rely wholly upon their own activity. The text finds a place not so large as in American schools but of some consequence. The pupils are privileged to act on their own initiative to some extent though they are not granted unlimited freedom. They cooperate with the teachers in many lines of school work where they find interest and profit. Demonstration is largely in the hands of the teachers. The testing of lessons studied is a common exercise with them, and their class hours are given to intensive activity in which every individual member is expected to be a participant and contributor. They, like we in America, aim to suit instruction to pupils of average ability rather than to the brightest as they do in Germany and France.
The teachers in Norway's schools are genuine educators, but they don’t rely solely on their own efforts. The curriculum holds a smaller role compared to American schools but still matters. Students are encouraged to take the initiative to some extent, although they don't have complete freedom. They work alongside teachers in various school projects where they find interest and value. Teachers primarily manage demonstrations. Testing what they've learned is a common practice, and class time is dedicated to active participation, with each student expected to engage and contribute. Similar to America, the focus is on adapting lessons for students of average ability rather than just the top performers, as is more common in Germany and France.
CONTINUITY OF EFFORT
By referring to the programs of work arranged for the successive years in the schools of Norway, one readily sees that there is but little variation in subjects of study from the first grades of the primary school to the completion of the gymnasium. The change of greatest importance is the introduction of foreign languages—German and English the first and second years in the middle schools and French the first year in the gymnasium.
By looking at the work programs set up for the different years in Norway's schools, it's easy to notice that there isn't much difference in the subjects studied from the early grades of primary school through to the end of gymnasium. The most significant change is the addition of foreign languages—German and English in the first and second years of middle school, and French in the first year of gymnasium.
When the child enters school he begins subjects of study which represent the several fields of knowledge. The teaching aims to keep him in touch with these in ways adapted to his stage of development. As the pupil grows the scope of each subject enlarges. They advance together. Keeping the subject definitely in mind for a long time tends to the creation of permanent interests and at the same time makes possible its assimilation into the very life of the learner. It becomes vital and usable after being acted upon in the various stages and conditions of life through which the child passes. Inter-relations and associations with other subjects of study and various phases of life are affected, which give to it distinct values. Too often we find in our own schools that hurried and intensive study of certain subjects does not create permanent interests nor prove of real worth.
When the child starts school, he begins studying various subjects that cover different fields of knowledge. The teaching is designed to connect him with these subjects in ways that fit his developmental stage. As the student matures, the depth of each subject increases. They progress together. Keeping a subject in mind for a long time helps develop lasting interests and makes it possible to integrate that knowledge into the learner's life. It becomes essential and applicable as the child experiences different stages and conditions of life. Interconnections and associations with other subjects and various life phases are impacted, giving it specific values. Too often, in our own schools, we see that rushed and intense study of certain subjects fails to foster lasting interests or prove genuinely valuable.
If natural forces in the child are recognized and utilized they facilitate the learning process and make school activities profitable and delightful. It is a well attested fact that at certain periods in the psychological development of a child mastery of special phases of learning is easy for him. Courses of study and plans of instruction should be prepared in such a way that the different phases of work included may be presented and stressed while the nascent period of interest is on.
If the natural abilities in the child are acknowledged and harnessed, they enhance the learning process and make school activities enjoyable and beneficial. It's a well-known fact that at certain stages of a child's psychological development, mastering specific aspects of learning comes easily to them. Curriculum and teaching plans should be designed to present and emphasize different aspects of work while the child's interest is still emerging.
We Americans are given to dividing a subject into its separate phases, studying them consecutively for short periods of time, and then forgetting them. The plan is wasteful and unpedagogic. Note the[Pg 224] manner in which we break up the work in mathematics and in the mother tongue. It is questionable whether there be a single valid argument favoring such practice.
We Americans tend to break a topic into its different parts, studying them one by one for a short time, and then forgetting them. This approach is inefficient and not very educational. Just look at how we split up subjects in math and in our native language. It's debatable whether there's any good reason to support this method.
The Norwegians present mathematics as a single and comprehensive subject. The same is true in their teaching of the mother tongue. The plan is advantageous from every view point. It is certainly conducive to economy of time and efficient results. Instead of breaking up subjects of instruction and isolating their several phases from each other, we ought rather to keep them intact and set about coordinating the several branches of instruction as closely as possible.
The Norwegians present mathematics as a single, comprehensive subject. The same goes for their teaching of the native language. This approach is beneficial from every perspective. It definitely saves time and leads to better results. Instead of breaking subjects into parts and isolating their different aspects, we should keep them together and focus on coordinating the various branches of learning as closely as possible.
Education should seek to associate and interrelate the truths we obtain and to organize our knowledge into an effectual system. The formation of a comprehensive curriculum, with arrangements for its presentation in harmony with sound psychological and pedagogical principles, is a matter of pressing importance.
Education should aim to connect and relate the truths we discover and to structure our knowledge into an effective system. Creating a thorough curriculum, with plans for its delivery that align with solid psychological and teaching principles, is extremely important.
While the school systems of the present are evidently superior to what any past generation has known, yet the investigations of psychologists and educationists stress the fact that in many ways they are weak and inefficient. The accumulated experience of the past needs overhauling by masters with insight and foresight. Educational methods and principles which have been tested and proven worthy should be put into operation. Each nation should devise and adopt the most perfect educational system possible, and this then should be carried into execution by an army of qualified teachers responsive to the call for truly consecrated service.
While today's school systems are clearly better than those of any previous generation, research by psychologists and educators highlights that they are weak and inefficient in many areas. We need to rethink the accumulated experience of the past with the help of insightful and forward-thinking leaders. Educational methods and principles that have been tested and found effective should be put into practice. Each country should create and adopt the best educational system possible, and this should then be implemented by a dedicated team of qualified teachers committed to truly meaningful service.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
BOOKS
Erichsen, A. E., Bergers Kathedralskoles Historie.
Erichsen, A. E., The History of Bergers Cathedral School.
Hertzberg, N., Paedagogiskens Historie.
Hertzberg, N., *History of Education*.
Holst, Axel, Skolehygiene.
Holst, Axel, *School Hygiene*.
Monroe, W. S., In Viking Land. Norway: Its People, Its Fjords and Its Fjelds.
Monroe, W. S., In Viking Land. Norway: Its People, Its Fjords and Its Mountains.
Paludan, J., Det Hoiere Skolevaesen i Danmark, Norge og Sverig.
Paludan, J., The Higher Education System in Denmark, Norway, and Sweden.
Salmonsens Store, Illustrerede Konversationsleksikon.
Salmonsens Store, *Illustrated Conversation Encyclopedia*.
Thieste, J. Schaan, Byskoleloven med Forklarende Anmerkninger.
Thieste, J. Schaan, The School Law with Explanatory Notes.
Thieste, J. Schaan, Landskoleloven med Forklarende Anmerkninger.
Thieste, J. Schaan, School Act with Explanatory Notes.
PERIODICALS AND REPORTS
Anderssen, Otto, Fra Norske Skoleforhold i 1908, Vor Ungdom, 1909.
Anderssen, Otto, From Norwegian School Conditions in 1908, Our Youth, 1909.
Anderssen, Otto, Fra Norske Skoleforhold i 1909, Vor Ungdom, 1910.
Anderssen, Otto, From Norwegian School Conditions in 1909, Our Youth, 1910.
Anderssen, Otto, "Norwegisches Schulwesen," Sonderabdruck aus W. Reins Encyklopadischem Handbuch der Pädagogik, 2. Auflage.
Anderssen, Otto, "Norwegian School System," Special Edition from W. Reins Encyclopedic Handbook of Education, 2nd Edition.
Anderssen, Otto, Skolen for Skolens Opgaver.
Anderssen, Otto, *Skolen for Skolens Opgaver*.
Anderssen, Otto, "The New Laws for the Secondary Schools in Norway," Special Reports on Educational Subjects, Gt. Britain, 8: 168.
Anderssen, Otto, "The New Laws for Secondary Schools in Norway," Special Reports on Educational Subjects, Great Britain, 8: 168.
Heiberg, J. V., "Education in Norway," Norway (Official Publication for the Paris Exhibition 1900), pp. 266-294.
Heiberg, J. V., "Education in Norway," Norway (Official Publication for the Paris Exhibition 1900), pp. 266-294.
Nissen, Hartvig, "Public Instruction in Norway," The American Journal of Education, 8: 295-304.
Nissen, Hartvig, "Public Instruction in Norway," The American Journal of Education, 8: 295-304.
Norsk Skoletidende, Published since 1869.
Norsk Skoletidende, Published since 1869.
Pogue, Belle C., "Education and Schools of Norway," Education, 10: 420-424.
Pogue, Belle C., "Education and Schools of Norway," Education, 10: 420-424.
Report of the Commissioner of Education of the United States, 1871, 1873, 1878, 1881, 1882-3, 1885-6, 1888-9, 1889-90, 1891-2, 1894-5, 1896-7, 1897-8, 1902, 1903, 1906, 1910.
Report of the Commissioner of Education of the United States, 1871, 1873, 1878, 1881, 1882-3, 1885-6, 1888-9, 1889-90, 1891-2, 1894-5, 1896-7, 1897-8, 1902, 1903, 1906, 1910.
Skolebladet, Published since 1898.
Skolebladet, published since 1898.
Thornton, J. S., "Schools Public and Private in the North of Europe," Special Reports on Educational Subjects, Great Britain, 17: 36-65.
Thornton, J. S., "Public and Private Schools in Northern Europe," Special Reports on Educational Topics, Great Britain, 17: 36-65.
Vold, J. Mourly, Report of Royal Commission of Secondary Education, Great Britain, 5: 640-644.
Vold, J. Mourly, Report of Royal Commission on Secondary Education, Great Britain, 5: 640-644.
OFFICIAL PUBLICATIONS
Beretning om Skolevaesenets tilstand i Kongeriget Norge. Yearly since 1861.
Beretning om Skolevæsenets tilstand i Kongeriget Norge. Yearly since 1861.
Forslag til en forandret Ordning af den høiere Almenskole af den ved kgl. Resolutions af[Pg 227] 3 die September 1890 nedsatte Kommission.
Forslag til en forandret Ordning af den højere Almenskole af den ved kgl. Resolutions af[Pg 227] 3. september 1890 nedsatte Kommission.
Gymnasiet: Lov om høiere Almenskoler; Reglement for de høiere Almenskoler; Undervisningssplan; Eksamensreglement; 1911.
Gymnasiet: Law on Higher Secondary Schools; Regulations for the Higher Secondary Schools; Teaching Plan; Examination Regulations; 1911.
Lov af 9de June 1903 om forandret Prøver ved Universitetet.
Lov af 9. juni 1903 om ændrede forsøg ved universitetet.
Lov om abnørme Børns Undervisning.
Law on Children's Education.
Lov om behandling af forsømte Børn.
Lov om behandling af forsømte børn.
Lov om det Kongelige Frederiks Universitet.
Lov om det Kongelige Frederiks Universitet.
Lov om Folkeskolen i Kjøbstaederne.
Law on Public Schools in Towns.
Lov om Folkeskolen paa Landet.
Law on Rural Public School.
Lov om høiere Almenskoler.
Act on Higher Public Schools.
Lov om Laererskoler og Prøver for Laerere og Laererinder i Folkeskolen.
Lov om Laererskoler og Prøver for Laerere og Laererinder i Folkeskolen.
Middelskolen: Lov om høiere Almenskoler; Reglement for de høiere Almenskoler; Undervisningsplan; Eksamensreglement. 1911.
Middelskolen: Law on Higher General Schools; Regulations for Higher General Schools; Teaching Plan; Examination Regulations. 1911.
Naermere Bestemmelser angaaende de offentlige Laererskoler og Laererprøver.
Naermere bestemmelser om de offentlige lærerskoler og lærerprøver.
Norwege: Lois sur L'Enseignement Public.
Norway: Public Education Laws.
Odelsthings Proposition Nr. 36 (1909) om forandringer i Lov om høiere Almenskoler av 27de Juli 1896.
Odelsthings Proposition No. 36 (1909) regarding changes to the Law on Higher Public Schools of July 27, 1896.
Odelsthing Proposition Nr. 12 (1910): A. Om forandringer i lov om høiere Almenskoler av 27de Juli 1896. B. Om forandring i lov om forberedende prøver ved Universitet av 9de Juni 1903.
Odelsthing Proposition No. 12 (1910): A. Regarding changes in the law on higher public schools from July 27, 1896. B. Regarding changes in the law on preparatory exams at the University from June 9, 1903.
Reglement for Aarsprøver, Middelskole-eksamen, og Eksamen Artium.[Pg 228] Reglement for de høiere Almenskoler og Undervisningsplan for Middelskolen, 1903.
Regulations for Annual Exams, Middle School Exams, and Final Exams.[Pg 228] Regulations for Higher General Schools and Curriculum for Middle Schools, 1903.
Reglement for den ved Lov af 18 de Januar 1902 anordnede Optagelsesprøve ved Laererskolerne.
Regulations for the admission exam established by the law of January 18, 1902, at teacher training schools.
Reglement for det Paedagogiske Seminar og Paedagogisk Eksamen.
Regulations for the Educational Seminar and Educational Examination.
Statistisk Aarbok for Kongeriket Norge. Yearly.
Statistical Yearbook for the Kingdom of Norway. Annual.
Sorthings Proposition Nr. 1, Hovedpost V. (1910) om bevilgning til det høiere Skolevaesen.
Sorthings Proposition No. 1, Main Item V. (1910) regarding funding for higher education.
Undervisningsplan for Gymnasiet, 1903.
Curriculum for High School, 1903.
Universitets-og Skole-Annaler. Yearly.
University and School Annals. Yearly.
INDEX
Age of pupils, 44-49;
completing secondary schools, 48;
on entering the university, 48;
in teachers' seminaries, 49.
Age of teachers, 49.
Agriculture, 24.
America of interest to the Norwegians, 173.
Apparatus, 145-146.
Astronomy, 177.
Attendance at school, 54, 77.
Authority, 189.
Certificates, 80.
Centralization of authority, 191.
Christiania's central kitchen, 75, 76.
Christianity established, 20.
Church and state united, 115, 184.
Classes, size of, 40.
Classics, in America, 204;
in Germany, 204;
their decline, 202.
Climate, effects of, 183.
Co-education, 40, 210-214;
in America, 211-213;
in Germany, 211.
Cooking, 148.
Co-ordination, between grades, 149;
between subjects, 162;
of educational agencies, 186.
Correlation, 223;
between schools 189, 190.
Course of study, 57, 96-181, 197-207, 209, 218, 219;
aim of, 148;
changes in, 97;
development of, 97-101, 222, 223;
during middle ages, 96;
linguistic-historical, 31;
Latin, 31;
real, 31;
secondary, 171;
suited to people served, 219;
uniformity of, 198.
Defective children, 186.
Department of Ecclesiastical and Educational Affairs, 51.
Delinquents, mental, 187; moral, 187.
Diocesan directors, 52.
Discipline in school, 76, 77.
Distribution of schools, 34, 35.
Drawing, 146, 147.
Educational commission, 52.
Educational attainments, Norway and America compared, 216-219;
time required, 217, 218.
Educational authority, 188.
Educational equipment, Norway and America compared, 49, 50.
Educational requirements, 27, 34;
parents held responsible for, 55.
Educational standards, 54, 55.
Educational system, 184, 188.
Electives, 207, 208.
English, 156, 172, 173;
in elementary schools, 173;
its grammar, 156;
length of course, 173;
methods in, 156.
Examen artium, 31.
Examinations, uniformity in, 188.
Exceptional child, 186.
[Pg 230]Eyesight, 77, 78.
Fisheries, 24.
French, 168-170;
difficulties in study of, 170;
length of course, 169.
Geography, 129-134, 158, 159, 177;
aim in, 129, 159;
methods of presenting, 130-133;
of America, 133;
texts, 159.
German, 154, 155, 167, 168;
authors studied, 168;
methods in, 155.
Grammar, 153, 154, 156.
Gymnasium, 100, 163-181, 207-210.
Gymnastic halls, 69.
Gymnastics, 69, 70, 74, 75, 148, 204-206;
apparatus, 148;
during intermissions, 69, 70;
Swedish system of, 75.
Hall, G. S., 189, 190.
Harold, the Fair-Haired, 19.
Health of pupils, 77, 78, 148, 205.
History, 19, 134-139, 156-158, 174-177;
aim of, 134, 138;
beginnings in, 134;
methods in, 157, 158, 176;
of Norway, 176;
nature of work in, 157;
related to geography, 135;
stories, 134, 135, 138.
Houses for janitors, 70;
for principals, 70;
for teachers in the rural districts, 70, 71.
Ideals of the people, 182, 183.
Illustrative materials, 66.
Imitation, law of, 82.
Industrial training, 147, 148.
Industries and occupations, 24.
Infant schools, 53.
Intermissions, 69, 70.
Laboratories, 67, 68, 69.
Latin, 173-174, 202;
courses in, 167;
length of course in, 174;
methods in, 174.
Libraries, 67, 68.
Lumbering, 24.
Lunches, 75, 76, 215, 216.
Lunch rooms, 69;
in Christiania, 215, 216.
Luther, influence of, on education, 184.
Lutheran church, 114, 115.
Management of schools, 188-191.
Manual training, 147, 148.
Martin Luther's influence in education, 184.
Mathematics, 125-129, 160, 178, 179, 223;
aim in, 125;
connection between phases of the subject, 160;
co-ordination in, 128;
methods in, 128, 129;
texts in, 129;
thoroughness in, 160;
use of, 128.
Medical inspection, 77, 78.
Mental delinquency, 187.
Methods, 72, 73, 74, 82, 83, 219-222;
in German, 155;
in history, 157, 158, 176;
in mother tongue, 118, 119;
in nature study, 140;
in religion, 163, 164, 200.
Middle school, 31, 32, 100, 149-162;
its aim, 149, 150;
its foundation, 149;
length of course in, 149, 150;
its limits, 149;
work of, 31, 32.
Moral delinquents, prevention and care of, 187.
Mother tongue, 118-124, 152-154, 164-167;
aim on instruction in, 118;
correct use of, 123;
in America, 124;
inclusiveness of work in, 123, 124;
methods in, 118, 119;
nature of work in, 166, 167.
Natural history, 179-181;
laboratory work in, 180, 181.
Nature study, 139-146, 161, 162, 179-181;
aim of, 139;
[Pg 231]illustrative material in, 140-146;
character, 161, 162;
laboratory work in, 180, 181;
methods in, 140;
scope of, 139.
Norway, adopts constitution, 20;
area of, 22;
becomes independent, 22;
climate of, 23;
development of, 20, 183;
geography of, 22;
history of, 19;
nights in, 24;
period of transition in, 183;
political divisions of, 22;
revolt of, 20;
its union with Denmark, 20;
its union with Sweden, 20.
Normal schools in the United States, 193, 194.
Norwegians, characteristics of, 25, 26, 27;
as colonizers, 20;
as sailors, 25;
conservative, 184, 185;
democratic, 184, 185.
Observation and practice, 83, 84.
Occupations, 24.
Offices, 67, 68.
Officials, duties of, 188;
efficiency of, 189.
Organization, needed in America, 189.
Paganism overcome, 20.
Pedagogical seminary, 84, 85, 185, 193, 195.
Pensions, 92, 93.
People, ideals of, 182, 183.
Permanency of teaching positions, 87-89;
advantages of, 87;
objections to, 88;
present tendencies with reference to, 89.
Physical culture, 204-207.
Physician, 77, 78.
Physical geography, 177.
Political geography, 177.
Practice teaching, 83, 84.
Private citizens, their part in school affairs, 61, 62.
Primary education, 52.
Private institutions, 81.
Private schools, 42-44, 54, 186;
equipment of, 43;
inspection of, 43;
recognition of, 44;
secondary, 186;
teachers' seminaries, 186;
technical institutes, 186;
tuition in, 43.
Primary schools, 36-39, 185;
attendance in, 36-39;
course of study in, 102, 104, 106;
curriculum in, 99;
rural and city, 101;
their financing, 62.
Professional training, 33, 79-85, 194, 195;
amount of, 194, 195;
attitude toward, 194;
standards of, 33.
Promotion of teachers, 198.
Pupils, in gymnasia, 40;
in lower schools, 40;
in middle schools, 40.
Recitation, method of, 72, 4.
Religion, 108-117.
Religious characters, 114.
Religious education, 115-117, 151, 152, 163, 164, 199-202;
advantages of, 116;
excused from, 117;
loss of interest in, 163, 164;
methods in, 163, 164, 200;
objection to, 116, 117;
required, 116;
results of, 115-117.
Royal Frederic University, 32.
Schools, agricultural, 33;
ambulatory, 29;
cathedral, 30;
communal, 63;
elementary, 20, 30;
gymnasial, 30;
maintained by industrial concerns, 53;
middle, 30;
military, 33;
peoples', 28;
state, 63;
technical, 33;
their distribution, 34, 35.
School boards, committees of, 56;
officers of, 56;
[Pg 232]organization of, 55, 56.
School buildings, appointment and equipment of, 64-69;
construction of, 205.
School committees, appointed by board, 56;
duties of, 57, 58, 59.
School curriculum, 197-207.
School discipline, 76, 77.
School districts, 53.
School funds, 62.
School grounds, 205.
School life, in Norway, 217, 218;
in America, 217, 218.
School physician, 77, 78.
School principal, 60;
duties of, 60, 61.
School room decoration, 67.
School system, its development, 197.
School year, 54, 55;
compared with American, 50;
length of, 28;
in America, 214.
Secondary schools, 52, 149, 185;
select strongest pupils, 149.
Sewing, 148.
Special classes for defectives, 186.
Special teachers, 80.
Specialization in university, 51.
Standards of work, 190.
Superintendent, 60, 85;
duties of, 60.
Teachers, attitude toward youth, 83;
certificates, 80;
life of, 195-197;
rooms for, 67, 68;
salaries of, 63, 91-95;
sex of, 71, 72;
special considerations, 91, 92;
their tenure of office, 71, 72.
Teacher's qualifications, 79, 80, 146, 196;
improvement of, 196;
in secondary schools, 79, 80.
Teachers' seminaries, 83, 193;
attendance at, 42;
curricula in, 82;
private, 41;
weaknesses of, 83;
work of, 81.
Teachers' tenure of office, 86-91;
in America, 89.
Teachers' titles, 85-86;
significance of, 86;
use of, 86.
Teachers' training, 81, 83, 84, 85, 191-195;
for secondary schools, 85;
in Germany, 192-193.
Teaching as a profession, in Norway, 79, 80;
its value, 196.
Technical schools, 185.
Vikings, 19.
Vocal music, in America, 207;
its influence, 206;
Napoleon on, 206;
nature of, in Norway, 147.
Writing, 146.
Age of pupils, 44-49;
finishing high school, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
on starting at university, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
in teacher training programs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Age of teachers, 49.
Agriculture, 24.
America of interest to the Norwegians, 173.
Apparatus, 145-146.
Astronomy, 177.
Attendance at school, 54, 77.
Authority, 189.
Certificates, 80.
Centralization of authority, 191.
Christiania's central kitchen, 75, 76.
Christianity established, 20.
Church and state united, 115, 184.
Classes, size of, 40.
Classics, in America, 204;
in Germany, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
their decline, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Climate, effects of, 183.
Co-education, 40, 210-214;
in America, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-213;
in Germany, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Cooking, 148.
Co-ordination, between grades, 149;
between subjects, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
of educational agencies, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Correlation, 223;
between schools 189, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Course of study, 57, 96-181, 197-207, 209, 218, 219;
goal of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
changes in __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
development of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-101, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
during the Middle Ages, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
linguistic history, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Latin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
genuine, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
secondary, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
suitable for those served, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
uniformity of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Defective children, 186.
Department of Ecclesiastical and Educational Affairs, 51.
Delinquents, mental, 187; moral, 187.
Diocesan directors, 52.
Discipline in school, 76, 77.
Distribution of schools, 34, 35.
Drawing, 146, 147.
Educational commission, 52.
Educational attainments, Norway and America compared, 216-219;
time needed, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Educational authority, 188.
Educational equipment, Norway and America compared, 49, 50.
Educational requirements, 27, 34;
parents held responsible for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Educational standards, 54, 55.
Educational system, 184, 188.
Electives, 207, 208.
English, 156, 172, 173;
in elementary schools, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
its grammar, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
course length, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
methods in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Examen artium, 31.
Examinations, uniformity in, 188.
Exceptional child, 186.
[Pg 230]Eyesight, 77, 78.
Fisheries, 24.
French, 168-170;
study challenges in __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
length of course, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Geography, 129-134, 158, 159, 177;
aim in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
presentation methods, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-133;
of America, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
texts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
German, 154, 155, 167, 168;
authors researched, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
methods in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Grammar, 153, 154, 156.
Gymnasium, 100, 163-181, 207-210.
Gymnastic halls, 69.
Gymnastics, 69, 70, 74, 75, 148, 204-206;
device, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
during breaks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
Swedish system of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Hall, G. S., 189, 190.
Harold, the Fair-Haired, 19.
Health of pupils, 77, 78, 148, 205.
History, 19, 134-139, 156-158, 174-177;
aim of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
beginnings in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
methods in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
of Norway, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
work environment in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
related to geography, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
stories, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.
Houses for janitors, 70;
for principals, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
for teachers in rural districts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Ideals of the people, 182, 183.
Illustrative materials, 66.
Imitation, law of, 82.
Industrial training, 147, 148.
Industries and occupations, 24.
Infant schools, 53.
Intermissions, 69, 70.
Laboratories, 67, 68, 69.
Latin, 173-174, 202;
courses in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
length of course in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
methods in __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Libraries, 67, 68.
Lumbering, 24.
Lunches, 75, 76, 215, 216.
Lunch rooms, 69;
in Christiania, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Luther, influence of, on education, 184.
Lutheran church, 114, 115.
Management of schools, 188-191.
Manual training, 147, 148.
Martin Luther's influence in education, 184.
Mathematics, 125-129, 160, 178, 179, 223;
aim in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
connection between phases of the subject, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
coordination in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
methods in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
texts in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
thoroughness in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
use of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Medical inspection, 77, 78.
Mental delinquency, 187.
Methods, 72, 73, 74, 82, 83, 219-222;
in German, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
in history, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
in native language, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
in nature exploration, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
in religion, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.
Middle school, 31, 32, 100, 149-162;
its goal, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
its foundation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
length of course in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
its limits, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
work of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Moral delinquents, prevention and care of, 187.
Mother tongue, 118-124, 152-154, 164-167;
focus on teaching in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
correct use of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
in the U.S., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
inclusiveness of work in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
methods in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
nature of work in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Natural history, 179-181;
lab work in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Nature study, 139-146, 161, 162, 179-181;
goal of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
[Pg 231]illustrative material in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-146;
character, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
lab work in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
methods in __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
scope of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Norway, adopts constitution, 20;
area of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
become independent, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
climate of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
development of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
geography of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
history of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
nights in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
transition period in __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
political divisions of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
uprising of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
its union with Denmark, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
its union with Sweden, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Normal schools in the United States, 193, 194.
Norwegians, characteristics of, 25, 26, 27;
as colonizers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
as sailors, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
conservative, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
democratic, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Observation and practice, 83, 84.
Occupations, 24.
Offices, 67, 68.
Officials, duties of, 188;
efficiency of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Organization, needed in America, 189.
Paganism overcome, 20.
Pedagogical seminary, 84, 85, 185, 193, 195.
Pensions, 92, 93.
People, ideals of, 182, 183.
Permanency of teaching positions, 87-89;
advantages of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
objections to __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
current trends regarding __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Physical culture, 204-207.
Physician, 77, 78.
Physical geography, 177.
Political geography, 177.
Practice teaching, 83, 84.
Private citizens, their part in school affairs, 61, 62.
Primary education, 52.
Private institutions, 81.
Private schools, 42-44, 54, 186;
gear of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
inspection of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
recognition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
secondary, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
teacher training colleges, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
tech schools, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
tuition in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Primary schools, 36-39, 185;
attendance in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-39;
study program in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
curriculum in __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
rural and urban, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
their funding, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Professional training, 33, 79-85, 194, 195;
amount of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
attitude towards, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
standards of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Promotion of teachers, 198.
Pupils, in gymnasia, 40;
in elementary schools, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
in middle schools, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Recitation, method of, 72, 4.
Religion, 108-117.
Religious characters, 114.
Religious education, 115-117, 151, 152, 163, 164, 199-202;
advantages of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
excused from, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
loss of interest in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
methods in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
objection to, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
required, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
results of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-117.
Royal Frederic University, 32.
Schools, agricultural, 33;
walking, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
cathedral, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
communal, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
elementary, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
high school, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
maintained by industry, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
middle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
military, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
people's, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
state, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
tech, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
their distribution, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
School boards, committees of, 56;
officers of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
[Pg 232]organization of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
School buildings, appointment and equipment of, 64-69;
building of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
School committees, appointed by board, 56;
duties of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.
School curriculum, 197-207.
School discipline, 76, 77.
School districts, 53.
School funds, 62.
School grounds, 205.
School life, in Norway, 217, 218;
in the U.S., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
School physician, 77, 78.
School principal, 60;
duties of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
School room decoration, 67.
School system, its development, 197.
School year, 54, 55;
compared to American, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
length of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
in the U.S., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Secondary schools, 52, 149, 185;
select top students, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Sewing, 148.
Special classes for defectives, 186.
Special teachers, 80.
Specialization in university, 51.
Standards of work, 190.
Superintendent, 60, 85;
duties of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Teachers, attitude toward youth, 83;
certificates, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
life of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-197;
rooms for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
salaries of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__-95;
gender of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
special considerations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
their time in office, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Teacher's qualifications, 79, 80, 146, 196;
improvement of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
in high schools, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Teachers' seminaries, 83, 193;
attendance at __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
curricula in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
private, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
weaknesses of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
work of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Teachers' tenure of office, 86-91;
in the USA, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Teachers' titles, 85-86;
importance of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
use of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Teachers' training, 81, 83, 84, 85, 191-195;
for high schools, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
in Germany, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-193.
Teaching as a profession, in Norway, 79, 80;
its value, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Technical schools, 185.
Vikings, 19.
Vocal music, in America, 207;
its impact, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Napoleon's move, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
nature of, in Norway, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Writing, 146.
FOOTNOTES:
[2] Statistics for 1907—the last published.
Statistics for 1907—the final edition.
[3] The law requires the opening of residences having sufficient room for the accommodation of these groups of pupils for instructional purposes. Law for Rural Schools, Sec. 41.
[3] The law requires the opening of residences having sufficient room for the accommodation of these groups of pupils for instructional purposes. Law for Rural Schools, Sec. 41.
[5] Statistics for 1907.
[7] Schools undertaking educational work of this character must meet specified standards in course of study, equipment, teaching staff, etc., to have their work accredited by the state.
[7] Schools undertaking educational work of this character must meet specified standards in course of study, equipment, teaching staff, etc., to have their work accredited by the state.
[8] The only difference between state and communal schools consists in the fact that in the one case the state and in the other a commune takes the initial step in the establishment of the school and bears the larger portion of the burden in its maintenance. The work of the two is uniform in every particular. They are together referred to as state schools in contrast to private schools.
[8] The only difference between state and communal schools consists in the fact that in the one case the state and in the other a commune takes the initial step in the establishment of the school and bears the larger portion of the burden in its maintenance. The work of the two is uniform in every particular. They are together referred to as state schools in contrast to private schools.
[14] In communes where the number of regular teaching positions in the primary schools is fifteen or over, of which at least five are positions for females, one male and one female teacher occupying regular posts are chosen. In communes where the number of positions is under fifteen, one male or female teacher occupying a regular post is chosen. Where a male and a female teacher are to be chosen, the elections take place in separate meetings of the male and the female teachers, each selecting its representative; in the other communes election takes place in a common meeting. Election is for two years. The meetings are conducted by the chairman of the school board. Schools provided and sustained by the owners of industrial concerns within the communes may each be represented in the meetings of the school board, by an owner of such establishment, while matters pertaining to the school in which he is interested are being considered. Law for Rural Schools, Sec. 47.
[14] In communes where the number of regular teaching positions in the primary schools is fifteen or over, of which at least five are positions for females, one male and one female teacher occupying regular posts are chosen. In communes where the number of positions is under fifteen, one male or female teacher occupying a regular post is chosen. Where a male and a female teacher are to be chosen, the elections take place in separate meetings of the male and the female teachers, each selecting its representative; in the other communes election takes place in a common meeting. Election is for two years. The meetings are conducted by the chairman of the school board. Schools provided and sustained by the owners of industrial concerns within the communes may each be represented in the meetings of the school board, by an owner of such establishment, while matters pertaining to the school in which he is interested are being considered. Law for Rural Schools, Sec. 47.
[15] The law provides that there shall be on the school board a priest for each pastorate within the commune, though not to exceed three. In all cases of necessity the bishop having direction of church affairs in the locality appoints the ministerial members of the board. Their appointments are for three years.
[15] The law provides that there shall be on the school board a priest for each pastorate within the commune, though not to exceed three. In all cases of necessity the bishop having direction of church affairs in the locality appoints the ministerial members of the board. Their appointments are for three years.
[17] In cities where the number of regular teaching positions is fifteen or more there are elected one male and one female teacher; and in cities where the number of regular teaching positions is less than fifteen, but at least five, one male or one female teacher. In cases where two teachers are elected, the sexes separate, each selecting its own representative; but where only one is elected they all meet together and choose one of their number. Election is for two years. The meetings are conducted by the chairman of the school board.
[17] In cities where the number of regular teaching positions is fifteen or more there are elected one male and one female teacher; and in cities where the number of regular teaching positions is less than fifteen, but at least five, one male or one female teacher. In cases where two teachers are elected, the sexes separate, each selecting its own representative; but where only one is elected they all meet together and choose one of their number. Election is for two years. The meetings are conducted by the chairman of the school board.
The above notes are from: Law for City Schools, Sec. 40.
The notes above are from: Law for City Schools, Sec. 40.
[21] Year 1905.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ 1905.
[22] Year 1910-1911.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ 1910-1911.
[24] An organization providing a series of weekly lectures by men of prominence from various places, for the populace and especially adapted to the working classes.
[24] An organization providing a series of weekly lectures by men of prominence from various places, for the populace and especially adapted to the working classes.
[25] The course with Latin includes 4 hours of French in the first year and 5 hours in the second; the real course offers it 4 hours in the first year, and 2 hours in the second and third years.
[25] The course with Latin includes 4 hours of French in the first year and 5 hours in the second; the real course offers it 4 hours in the first year, and 2 hours in the second and third years.
[26] A school law passed in 1896 omitted Latin from the course of study. Another act of the same Storthing granted privilege of offering Latin as an elective in several schools.
[26] A school law passed in 1896 omitted Latin from the course of study. Another act of the same Storthing granted privilege of offering Latin as an elective in several schools.
[28] Plato, The Republic, p. 424.
[31] Special Report, No. 2, 1883.
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!